605 Series Frequency Inverter: Product Manual

This manual was downloaded on www.sdsdrives.
com
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
605 Series
Frequency
Inverter
Product Manual
HA463550U001 Issue 5
Compatible with Version 5.x Software
 Copyright 2005 SSD Drives Limited (formerly Eurotherm Drives Limited)

All rights strictly reserved. No part of this document may be stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by
any means to persons not employed by an SSD Drives company without written permission from SSD Drives Ltd.
Although every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of this document it may be necessary, without notice, to
make amendments or correct omissions. SSD Drives cannot accept responsibility for damage, injury, or expenses
resulting therefrom.
This manual was downloaded on www.sdsdrives.com
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
WARRANTY
SSD Drives warrants the goods against defects in design, materials and workmanship
for the period of 12 months from the date of delivery on the terms
detailed in SSD Drives Standard Conditions of Sale IA058393C.
SSD Drives reserves the right to change the content and product specification without notice.
Cont.2
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Safety Information !
Requirements
IMPORTANT: Please read this information BEFORE installing the equipment.
Intended Users
This manual is to be made available to all persons who are required to install, configure or
service equipment described herein, or any other associated operation.
The information given is intended to highlight safety issues, and to enable the user to obtain
maximum benefit from the equipment.
Complete the following table for future reference detailing how the unit is to be installed and
used.
INSTALLATION DETAILS
Serial Number
(see product label)
Where installed
(for your own
information)
Unit used as a:
(refer to Certification
R Component R Relevant Apparatus
for the Inverter)
Unit fitted: R Wall-mounted R Enclosure
Application Area
The equipment described is intended for industrial motor speed control utilising AC induction or
AC synchronous machines.
Personnel
Installation, operation and maintenance of the equipment should be carried out by qualified
personnel. A qualified person is someone who is technically competent and familiar with all
safety information and established safety practices; with the installation process, operation and
maintenance of this equipment; and with all the hazards involved.
Cont.3
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Safety Information !
Hazards
WARNING!
This equipment can endanger life through rotating machinery and high voltages.
Failure to observe the following will constitute an ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD.
This is a product of the restricted sales distribution class according to IEC 61800-3.
In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures.
This product is designated as “professional equipment” as defined in EN61000-3-2.
Permission of the supply authority shall be obtained before connection to the low
voltage supply.
•
The equipment must be permanently earthed due to the high earth leakage current.
•
The drive motor must be connected to an appropriate safety earth.
•
The equipment contains high value capacitors which take time to discharge after removal of
the mains supply.
• Before working on the equipment, ensure isolation of the mains supply from terminals L1,
L2 and L3. Wait for at least 3 minutes for the dc link terminals (DC+ and DC-) to discharge
to safe voltage levels (<50V). Measure the DC+ and DC- terminal voltage with a meter to
confirm that the voltage is less than 50V.
• Never perform high voltage resistance checks on the wiring without first disconnecting the
drive from the circuit being tested.
• When replacing a drive in an application and before returning to use, it is essential that all
user defined parameters for the product’s operation are correctly installed.
• This equipment contains electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive parts. Observe static
control precautions when handling, installing and servicing this product.
IMPORTANT: Metal parts may reach a temperature of 90 degrees centigrade in operation.
Application Risk
The specifications, processes and circuitry described herein are for guidance only and may need
to be adapted to the user’s specific application.
SSD Drives does not guarantee the suitability of the equipment described in this Manual for
individual applications.
Risk Assessment
Under fault conditions, power loss or other operating conditions not intended, the equipment
may not operate as specified. In particular:
• The motor speed may not be controlled
• The direction of rotation of the motor may not be controlled
• The motor may be energised
Guards
The user must provide guarding and /or additional safety systems to prevent risk of injury and
electric shock.
Protective Insulation
• All control and signal terminals are SELV, i.e. protected by double insulation. Ensure all
wiring is rated for the highest system voltage.
Note: Thermal sensors contained within the motor must be double insulated.
• All exposed metalwork in the Inverter is protected by basic insulation and bonding to a
safety earth.
RCDs
These are not recommended for use with this product but ,where their use is mandatory, only
Type B RCDs should be used.
Cont.4
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Contents
Contents Page
Chapter 1 GETTING STARTED

Introduction .................................................................................................. 1-1
Optional Equipment ................................................................................................1-1
Equipment Inspection ................................................................................... 1-2
About this Manual ........................................................................................ 1-2
Initial Steps .............................................................................................................1-2
How the Manual is Organised .................................................................................1-3
• Information for Users without an Operator Station..................................1-3
Chapter 2 AN OVERVIEW OF THE INVERTER

Component Identification ............................................................................. 2-1
Control Features ........................................................................................... 2-2
Understanding the Product Code ................................................................. 2-3
Functional Overview ..................................................................................... 2-4
Filter Board.............................................................................................................2-4
Power Board ...........................................................................................................2-4
Control Board.........................................................................................................2-4
• Processor .............................................................................................2-4
• Technology Box Interface ......................................................................2-5
• Operator Station Interface.....................................................................2-5
Chapter 3 INSTALLING THE INVERTER

Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 3-1
Mounting the Inverter ..............................................................................................3-1
Minimum Air Clearances .........................................................................................3-2
• Ventilation ............................................................................................3-2
• Air Clearance: Cubicle-Mount Product/Application .................................3-2
• Air Clearance: Wall-Mount Product/Application......................................3-2
Electrical Installation .................................................................................... 3-3
Wiring the Inverter ..................................................................................................3-3
• Protective Earth (PE) Connections ...........................................................3-4
• Power Wiring Connections ....................................................................3-4
• Control Wiring Connections ..................................................................3-5
Optional Equipment ..................................................................................... 3-6
• Fitting the Remote 6901 Operator Station ..............................................3-6
• Top Cover ............................................................................................3-7
• External Brake Resistor ..........................................................................3-8
• External AC Supply EMC Filter ...............................................................3-9
• EMC Motor Output Filter .....................................................................3-10
• Output Contactors ..............................................................................3-10
• Earth Fault Monitoring Systems ............................................................3-10
• AC Motor Choke (output) ....................................................................3-10
Cont.5
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Contents
Contents Page
Chapter 4 OPERATING THE INVERTER

Pre-Operation Checks .................................................................................. 4-1
Control Philosophy........................................................................................ 4-2
Start/Stop and Speed Control....................................................................... 4-2
• Selecting Local or Remote Control .........................................................4-3
Start-up Routines .......................................................................................... 4-4
Remote Control using Control Terminals (default set-up) ...........................................4-4
• Reading the Status LEDs ........................................................................4-4
Local Control using the Operator Station .......................................................................4-5
Setting-up the Inverter ................................................................................. 4-5
Quick Set-up as an Open-loop Inverter (V/F fluxing) .................................................4-5
Set-up using the Sensorless Vector Fluxing Mode ......................................................4-6
The Autotune Feature ..............................................................................................4-6
Manual Tuning .......................................................................................................4-7
• Tuning using the Motor Equivalent Circuit ..............................................4-7
• Tuning using a Simple Tuning Sequence ................................................4-7
Tuning Difficulties....................................................................................................4-8
The Start/Stop Mode Explained .................................................................... 4-8
Starting and Stopping Methods ................................................................... 4-9
Normal Stopping Methods.......................................................................................4-9
• Ramp to Stop........................................................................................4-9
• Coast to Stop......................................................................................4-10
Advanced Stopping Methods .................................................................................4-10
• Forced Fast Stop .................................................................................4-10
• Forced Coast Stop ..............................................................................4-11
• The Trip Condition ..............................................................................4-11
• Logic Stopping....................................................................................4-11
Normal Starting Method ........................................................................................4-12
Advanced Starting Methods ...................................................................................4-12
• Starting Several Inverters Simultaneously ..............................................4-12
• Single Wire Logic Starting....................................................................4-12
• Two Wire Logic Starting.......................................................................4-13
• Three Wire Logic Starting ....................................................................4-13
Chapter 5 THE OPERATOR STATION

Connecting the Operator Station ................................................................. 5-1
• Welcome Screen...................................................................................5-1
Customising the Operator Station ................................................................ 5-1
Controlling the Operator Station.................................................................. 5-2

Control Keys ...........................................................................................................5-2
• Keys for Programming the Drive ............................................................5-2
• Keys for Operating the Drive Locally ......................................................5-2
LED Indications .......................................................................................................5-3
Cont.6
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Contents
Contents Page
The Menu System .......................................................................................... 5-4

Navigating the Menu System....................................................................................5-4
• The Menu System Map ..........................................................................5-5
Changing a Parameter Value...................................................................................5-6
What do the Symbols mean next to some Parameters?..............................................5-6
• Parameter Status Information → ← =.................................................5-6
• Expanded Menu Information >>..........................................................5-6
Alert Message Displays ............................................................................................5-7
The PROG Key ........................................................................................................5-7
The L/R Key ............................................................................................................5-7
The MMI DIAGNOSTICS Menu ...................................................................... 5-8
Special Menu Features ............................................................................... 5-10

Menu Shortcuts and Special Key Combinations.......................................................5-10
• Quick Link Information .......................................................................5-10
• Quick Save to Memory........................................................................5-10
• Changing the Display Language..........................................................5-10
• Quick Drive Copy ...............................................................................5-10
• Changing the Product Code ................................................................5-11
• Quick Restore Default .........................................................................5-11
• Quick Enter Configuration Mode .........................................................5-11
Menu Viewing Levels .............................................................................................5-11
• Startup Screen Timeouts ......................................................................5-12
Selecting the Display Language..............................................................................5-12
Control Key Enable/Disable...................................................................................5-12
Password Protection ..............................................................................................5-12
• To Activate Password Protection ...........................................................5-12
• To Deactivate Password Protection .......................................................5-13
Selecting Parameters for the Operator Menu ..........................................................5-13
• Selecting a Startup Screen ...................................................................5-13
• Customising the Welcome Screen ........................................................5-14
• Creating Custom Screens ....................................................................5-14
How to Save, Restore and Copy your Settings............................................ 5-14
Saving Your Application ........................................................................................5-14
Restoring Saved Settings ........................................................................................5-14
Copying an Application .........................................................................................5-14
• Transferring Your Application to Another Inverter .................................5-14
• Backing-up Your Application ...............................................................5-15
Cont.7
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Contents
Contents Page
Chapter 6 PROGRAMMING YOUR APPLICATION

Introducing the Macro .................................................................................. 6-1
Programming with Block Diagrams ............................................................. 6-1
Modifying a Block Diagram .....................................................................................6-1
• Configuration and Parameterisation Modes ...........................................6-1
• Making and Breaking Links in Configuration Mode ................................6-1
• Programming Rules ..............................................................................6-2
Execution Rules ............................................................................................. 6-2
• Saving Your Modifications .....................................................................6-3
Understanding the Function Block Description ..........................................................6-3
• MMI Menu Maps ..................................................................................6-3
Hexadecimal Representation of Trips........................................................................6-4
Function Block Descriptions .......................................................................... 6-5
• ANALOG DIGIN...................................................................................6-6
• ANALOG INPUT ...................................................................................6-8
• ANALOG OUTPUT .............................................................................6-10
• AUTO RESTART..................................................................................6-12
• AUTOTUNE........................................................................................6-14
• BRAKE CONTROL...............................................................................6-15
• COMMS CONTROL............................................................................6-16
• CURRENT FEEDBACK..........................................................................6-17
• CURRENT LIMIT ..................................................................................6-19
• CUSTOM SCREEN ..............................................................................6-20
• DEMULTIPLEXER .................................................................................6-22
• DIGITAL INPUT...................................................................................6-23
• DIGITAL OUTPUT ...............................................................................6-24
• DYNAMIC BRAKING ...........................................................................6-25
• ENCODER..........................................................................................6-26
• FLUXING............................................................................................6-27
• FLYCATCHING...................................................................................6-29
• I/O TRIPS ...........................................................................................6-31
• I*t TRIP ...............................................................................................6-32
• INJ BRAKING......................................................................................6-33
• JOG ..................................................................................................6-34
• LOCAL CONTROL..............................................................................6-35
• LOGIC FUNCTION ............................................................................6-36
• MINIMUM SPEED................................................................................6-40
• MULTIPLEXER......................................................................................6-41
• OPERATOR MENU ..............................................................................6-42
• OP STATION ......................................................................................6-43
• PASSWORD........................................................................................6-45
• PATTERN GEN....................................................................................6-46
• PID ....................................................................................................6-47
• PRESET ...............................................................................................6-49
Cont.8
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Contents
Contents Page
• RAISE/LOWER.....................................................................................6-51
• REFERENCE ........................................................................................6-52
• SEQUENCING LOGIC........................................................................6-54
• SETPOINT SCALE................................................................................6-56
• SKIP FREQUENCIES ............................................................................6-57
• SLEW RATE LIMIT ................................................................................6-59
• SLIP COMP.........................................................................................6-60
• STABILISATION...................................................................................6-61
• STALL TRIP..........................................................................................6-62
• STOP .................................................................................................6-63
• SYSTEM PORT (P3)..............................................................................6-64
• SYSTEM RAMP ....................................................................................6-65
• TEC OPTION......................................................................................6-67
• TRIPS HISTORY ...................................................................................6-68
• TRIPS STATUS .....................................................................................6-69
• UNDERLAP COMP ..............................................................................6-71
• VALUE FUNCTIONS ...........................................................................6-72
• VECTOR FLUXING ..............................................................................6-79
• VOLTAGE CONTROL..........................................................................6-80
• ZERO SPEED.......................................................................................6-81
Motor-Specific Parameters ......................................................................... 6-82
Chapter 7 TRIPS AND FAULT FINDING

Trips .............................................................................................................. 7-1
What Happens when a Trip Occurs..........................................................................7-1
• Inverter Indications................................................................................7-1
• Operator Station Indications (when connected).......................................7-1
Resetting a Trip Condition........................................................................................7-1
Using the Operator Station to Manage Trips.............................................................7-2
• Trip Messages ......................................................................................7-2
• Automatic Trip Reset .............................................................................7-3
• Setting Trip Conditions ..........................................................................7-3
• Viewing Trip Conditions ........................................................................7-3
Checksum Fail ........................................................................................................7-3
• Inverter Indications................................................................................7-3
• Operator Station Indications (when connected).......................................7-4
Fault Finding................................................................................................. 7-4
Chapter 8 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

Routine Maintenance.................................................................................... 8-1
Repair ........................................................................................................... 8-1
Saving Your Application Data ..................................................................................8-1
Returning the Unit to SSD Drives ..............................................................................8-1
Disposal .................................................................................................................8-1
Cont.9
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Contents
Contents Page
Chapter 9 SEQUENCING LOGIC

Principle State Machine ................................................................................ 9-1
Main Sequencing States...........................................................................................9-1
State Outputs of the SEQUENCING LOGIC Function Block .......................................9-1
Transition of States ..................................................................................................9-2
State Diagram ........................................................................................................9-3
Communications Command .......................................................................... 9-4
• Example Commands.............................................................................9-5
Communications Status ...........................................................................................9-6
Chapter 10 P A R A M E T E R S P E C I F I C A T I O N T A B L E
Specification Table: Tag Number Order..................................................... 10-2
Product-Related Default Values ............................................................... 10-18
• Language Dependant Defaults ..........................................................10-18
• AC Supply Voltage and Power Rating Dependant Defaults ..................10-18
Chapter 11 T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
Environmental Details............................................................................................11-1
EMC Compliance..................................................................................................11-1
External AC Supply (RFI) Filters...............................................................................11-1
Cabling Requirements for EMC Compliance ...........................................................11-2
Fuse Rating and Recommended Wire Sizes .............................................................11-2
Terminal Block Wire Sizes ......................................................................................11-3
Earthing/Safety Details ..........................................................................................11-3
Power Details........................................................................................................11-3
Control Terminals .................................................................................................11-4
Analog Inputs/Outputs ..........................................................................................11-5
Digital Inputs ........................................................................................................11-5
Digital Outputs .....................................................................................................11-5
Power Loss Estimates .............................................................................................11-5
Switching Frequencies ...........................................................................................11-5
Supply Harmonic Analysis......................................................................................11-6
Chapter 12 CE R T I F I C A T I O N FOR THE INVERTER

Requirements for EMC Compliance ............................................................ 12-1
Minimising Radiated Emissions ..............................................................................12-1
Earthing Requirements...........................................................................................12-1
• Protective Earth (PE) Connections .........................................................12-1
• EMC Earth Connections ......................................................................12-1
Cabling Requirements ...........................................................................................12-2
• Planning Cable Runs...........................................................................12-2
• Increasing Motor Cable Length............................................................12-2
EMC Installation Options .......................................................................................12-3
• Screening & Earthing (wall mounted, Class A) ......................................12-3
Cont.10
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Contents
Contents Page
• Screening & Earthing (cubicle mounted, Class B) ..................................12-3

• Star Point Earthing ..............................................................................12-4
• Sensitive Equipment ............................................................................12-5
Requirements for UL Compliance ............................................................... 12-6
• Solid-State Motor Overload Protection .................................................12-6
• Short Circuit Rating .............................................................................12-6
• Solid-State Short-Circuit Protection.......................................................12-6
• Recommended Branch Circuit Protection ..............................................12-6
• Motor Base Frequency.........................................................................12-6
• Field Wiring Temperature Rating .........................................................12-6
• Field Wiring Terminal Markings ...........................................................12-6
• Power Wiring Terminals ......................................................................12-6
• Terminal Tightening Torque ................................................................12-6
• Field Grounding Terminals..................................................................12-6
• Operating Ambient Temperature .........................................................12-6
• Direct Wall-Mountable Models ............................................................12-6
European Directives and the CE Mark........................................................ 12-7
CE Marking for Low Voltage Directive ....................................................................12-7
CE Marking for EMC - Who is Responsible? ...........................................................12-7
• The Legal Requirements of CE Marking for EMC ..................................12-8
• Applying for CE Marking for EMC........................................................12-8
Which Standards Apply?........................................................................................12-9
• Basic and Generic Standards...............................................................12-9
Certificates .........................................................................................................12-12
Chapter 13 A P P L I C A T I O N N O T E S
Synchronous Motor Control ........................................................................ 13-1
Brake Motors .............................................................................................. 13-1
Using Multiple Motors on a Single Inverter ............................................... 13-2
Dynamic Braking ........................................................................................ 13-2
Brake Resistor Selection ............................................................................. 13-3
Chapter 14 S E R I A L C O M M U N I C A T I O N S
Connection to the P3 Port ........................................................................... 14-1
Cont.11
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Contents
Contents Page
Chapter 15 A P P L I C A T I O N M A C R O S
The Default Application .............................................................................. 15-1
How to Load a Macro.................................................................................. 15-1
Macro Descriptions ..................................................................................... 15-1
Macro 0 ...............................................................................................................15-1
Macro 1: Basic Speed Control (default) ..................................................................15-3
Macro 2: Run Forward/Run Reverse .......................................................................15-5
Macro 3: Raise/Lower Trim....................................................................................15-7
Macro 4: Process PID ............................................................................................15-9
Macro 5: Preset Speeds .......................................................................................15-11
Macro 6: Closed-Loop Speed Feedback ...............................................................15-13
Macro Control Blocks ..........................................................................................15-15
Macro User Blocks ..............................................................................................15-16
Cont.12
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Getting Started 1-1

GETTING STARTED
1
Introduction
The 605 Series Frequency Inverter is designed for speed control of standard 3-phase induction
motors. It is available in two frame sizes - 605 Type A and 605 Type B.
• It can be controlled remotely using configurable analogue and digital inputs and outputs,
requiring no optional equipment.
• Controlling the unit remotely using the ConfigEd Lite (or other suitable PC programming
tool) and 6053 Technology Box options, or locally using the Operator Station option gives
access to parameters, diagnostic messages, trip settings, full application programming.
Other features are also available, such as the advanced sensorless vector control scheme
which gives high torque, low speed operation; selectable switching frequencies; and a
unique Quiet Pattern control system that minimises audible noise from the motor.
The optional internal RFI filters offer enhanced EMC compliance without the need for
additional external components (where fitted).
IMPORTANT: Motors used must be suitable for inverter duty.
Optional Equipment
Item Part Number
6901 Operator Station 6901
A plug-in unit providing control, monitoring and programming
capabilities
Panel Mounting Kit for the 6901 Operator Station 6052
Braking Resistor
A resistor fitted for transient braking operations
100Ω, 100W CZ389853
56Ω, 200W CZ463068
EMC Installation Guidelines for Modules and Systems HA388879
An SSD Drives application manual detailing EMC requirements
Technology Box Option
Plug-in field bus communications interface options:
• Profibus AH463470U001
• Profibus Technology Option manual HA463561
• RS485 AH463469U001
• RS485 Technology Option manual HA463560
• Link AH470016
• Link Technology Option manual HA470237
ConfigEd Lite Order by name
SSD Drives’ Windows-based block programming software
External AC Supply (RFI) Filter Refer to Chapter 11:
For 605 Type A units without internal filters, on cable runs in excess “External AC Supply
of 25 metres (RFI) Filters” for Part
Numbers
Top Cover (UL Type 1 / IP4X) 605A:BD388832U007
A protective cover fitted to wall-mounted units to give improved 605B:BD463503U007
compliance ratings
Table 1-1 Optional Equipment
605 Series Frequency Inverter

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
1-2 Getting Started
Equipment Inspection
• Check for signs of transit damage
• Check the product code on the rating label conforms to your requirement.
If the unit is not being installed immediately, store the unit in a well-ventilated place away from
high temperatures, humidity, dust, or metal particles.
Refer to Chapter 2: “An Overview of the Inverter” to check the rating label/product code. Refer
to Chapter 8: “Routine Maintenance and Repair” for information on returning damaged goods.
About this Manual

This manual is intended for use by the installer, user and programmer of the 605 inverter. It
assumes a reasonable level of understanding in these three disciplines.
Note: Please read all Safety Information before proceeding with the installation and operation
of this unit.
Enter the “Model No” from the rating label into the table at the front of this manual. There is
also a column for you to record your application’s parameter settings in the table in Chapter 10.
It is important that you pass this manual on to any new user of this unit.
Initial Steps
Use the manual to help you plan the following:
Installation
Know your requirements:
• certification requirements, CE/UL/CUL conformance
• wall-mount or enclosure?
• conformance with local installation requirements
• supply and cabling requirements
Operation
Know your operator:
• how is it to be operated, local and/or remote?
• what level of user is going to operate the unit?
• decide on the best menu level for the Operator Station (where supplied)
Programming (Operator Station or suitable PC programming tool only)

Know your application:
• install the most appropriate macro
• plan your “block diagram programming”
• enter a password to guard against illicit or accidental changes
• learn how to back-up your application data
• customise the Operator Station to the application

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Getting Started 1-3

How the Manual is Organised
The manual is divided into chapters and paragraphs. Page numbering restarts with every
chapter, i.e. 5-3 is Chapter 5, page 3.
Application Block Diagrams

You will find these at the rear of the manual. The pages unfold to show a complete block
diagram, these will become your programming tool as you become more familiar with the 605’s
software.
Quick-Start Guide
Chapters 3 and 4
install and run
the product
Chapter 5
details the
Operator Station
and menu system
Chapter 11
holds many of the
technical details
Information for Users without an Operator Station

This symbol identifies important text for users operating the Inverter using the default (factory)
DEFAULT set-up.
If the text is italic, such as this, then the information is especially for users without the Operator
Station or suitable PC programming tool.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
1-4 Getting Started

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
An Overview of the Inverter 2-1

AN OVERVIEW OF THE INVERTER
2
Component Identification
9 2
EUROTHERM
DRIVES
EUROTHERM
DRIVES
12
HEALTH RUN
16
3
EUROTHERM
DRIVES
1
1
E PROG
13 10
M L
R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
14
CHARGE
L1 L2/NL3 DC+DBRDC-
M1/U
M2/VM3/W
8
11 15
5
Figure 2-1 View of Component Parts
1 Main Inverter assembly 9 Blank cover

2 Top cover 10 Control terminals
3 6053 technology box (optional) 11 Power terminals
4 Terminal cover retaining screw 12 I/O configuration switches
5 Terminal cover 13 RS232 programming port
6 Gland plate 14 Power terminal shield (605 Type A only)
7 Cooling fan (605 Type B only) 15 Power terminal shield (605 Type B only)
8 6901 Operator Station (optional) 16 Technology Box Interface Connector
Charge LED This can be seen through a viewing hole in the power terminal shield (item 14)
when the terminal cover (item 5) is removed on the 605 Type A Inverter

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
2-2 An Overview of the Inverter
Control Features
The Inverter is fully-featured when controlled using the optional Operator Station (or a suitable
PC programming tool).
The `General’ control features below are not user-selectable when the unit is controlled using
DEFAULT the analog and digital inputs and outputs.
General Output Selectable 0-120Hz, 240Hz or 480Hz

Frequency
Switching Selectable 3kHz, 6kHz or 9kHz
Frequency (select 3kHz for all 605B type units if using screened
motor cable - maximum permitted length is 50 metres)
Flux Control 1. V/F control with linear or fan law profile
2. Sensorless vector with automatic flux control and slip
compensation
Skip 4 skip frequencies with adjustable skip band width
Frequencies
Preset Speeds 8 presets with programmable ramp rates
Stopping Ramp, ramp with hold, coast, dc injection, fast stop
Modes
Ramps Symmetric or asymmetric ramp up and down rates
Raise/Lower Programmable MOP function
Jog Programmable jog speed
Logic Functions 10 programmable 3 input logic function blocks
performing NOT, AND, NAND, OR, NOR and XOR
functions
Value Functions 10 programmable 3 input value function blocks
performing IF, ABS, SWITCH, RATIO, ADD, SUB, RATIO,
TRACK/HOLD, and BINARY DECODE functions
Diagnostics Full diagnostic and monitoring facilities
Protection Trip Conditions Output short line to line, and line to earth
Overcurrent > 250%
Overvoltage and undervoltage
Heatsink overtemperature
Current Limit Adjustable 50%-150%
Inputs/ Analog Inputs 2 configurable inputs - voltage or current
Outputs
Analog 1 configurable output - voltage or current
Outputs
Digital Inputs 5 configurable 24V dc inputs
Digital Outputs 2 configurable 24V dc open collector outputs
Table 2-1 Control Features

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Understanding the Product Code
The unit is fully identified using an eight block alphanumeric code which records how the
Inverter was calibrated, and its various settings when despatched from the factory.
The Product Code appears as the “Model No.”. Each block of the Product Code is identified as
below:
Block Variable Description

No.
1 605 Generic product
2 XXX Three numbers specifying the power output, for example:
007 = 0.75kW
015 = 1.5kW
022 = 2.2kW
040 = 3.7kW
3 XXX Three numbers specifying the nominal input voltage rating:
230 220 to 240V (±10%) 50/60Hz
400 380 to 460V (±10%) 50/60Hz
4 X One digit specifying the supply phases
1 = Single
3 = Three
5 X One character specifying the use of the Internal RFI Filter:
F = Filter
0 = No Filter
6 XXXX Four digits specifying mechanical package including livery and mechanical
package style, and any option installed over and above the standard
features of the product:
First two digits Livery
00 Standard SSD Drives livery
01-99 Defined customer liveries
Third digit Mechanical packaging style
1 Standard (IP20), protected panel mounting
2 IP20 and falling dirt protection (UL Type 1) with
glandplate cable entry
Fourth digit Option
0 No Option
1 Fitted Operator Station
2 Fitted RS485 Technology Box
3 Fitted Profibus Technology Box
4 Fitted Link Technology Box
7 XXXX These characters are the same as used for computer keyboard
specifications:
UK English (50Hz)
FR French (50Hz)
GR German (50Hz)
SP Spanish (50Hz)
US English (60Hz)
P5 P Language (50Hz)
P6 P Language (60Hz)
8 XXX Reserved

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Functional Overview
L1 L2/N L3
RS232 6901 FILTER

OPERATOR
PROGRAMMING
STATION
PORT INTERFACE
TECHNOLOGY BOX
INTERFACE TECHNOLOGY BOX
CONNECTOR INTERFACE
18
605A: Diode Bridge
17
16 on Filter Board
PE
15 605B: Diode Bridge
14 Diode Bridge
on Power Board
13
12
CONTROL 11 POWER
TERMINALS 10 PROCESSOR
9 DC+
8
7 DC-
6
5
4 DBR
3
2
1
CONTROL
M1 M2 M3
U V W
Figure 2-2 Functional Block Diagram
Filter Board
This two-stage filter consists of common and differential mode elements. It attenuates the
Inverter noise produced on to the mains supply. Mains supply is applied to terminals L1, L2 (N)
and L3.
Power Board
DC link capacitors smooth the dc voltage output prior to the Inverter power stage. The IGBT
(Insulated Gate Bi-polar Transistor) output stage converts the dc input to a three phase output
used to drive the motor.
Control Board
Processor
The processor provides for a range of analog and digital inputs and outputs, together with their
reference supplies. For further details refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” - Control
Terminals.
The I/O configuration switches (SW1 & SW2) on the control board can be seen through the
DEFAULT outer casing of the Inverter when the blank cover, the Operator Station, or the Technology Box
option is removed. These switches configure the analog i/o terminals. Refer to Chapter 6:
“Programming Your Application” - ANALOG INPUT and ANALOG OUTPUT.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Technology Box Interface
This is a multi-way connector and processor bus interface with control signals allowing various
6053 technology box options to be fitted to the Inverter.
Operator Station Interface

This is a non-isolated RS232 serial link for communication with the Operator Station.
Alternatively, a PC running SSD Drives’ “ConfigEd Lite” Windows-based configuration
software (or some other suitable PC programming tool) can be used to graphically program and
configure the Inverter.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Installing the Inverter 3-1

INSTALLING THE INVERTER
3
IMPORTANT: Read Chapter 12: “Certification for the Inverter” before installing this unit.
Mechanical Installation
Mounting the Inverter
The unit must be mounted vertically on a solid, flat, vertical surface. It can be wall-mounted, or
mounted inside a suitable cubicle, depending upon the required level of EMC compliance - refer
to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications”.
W
W1
Control Heat
Sink
H H1 If wall-mounted, the unit

must be fitted with the
Top Cover firmly screwed
into position. The overall
height H is not affected.
W2 D
Figure 3-1 Mechanical Dimensions for 605 Type A
605 Model Number H H1 W W1 W2 D Fixings

Type
605 /007 /230/ 1 .... Mounting holes 5.5mm
605 /015/ 230/ 1 .... 198.0 173.5 155.0 109.0 114.0 154.5 Use M4 fixings
A 605 /007/ 230/ 3 .... (7.80) (6.84) (6.11) (4.30) (4.49) (6.09) Weight 3kg (6.6lb)
605 /015/ 230/ 3 ....
All dimensions are in millimetres (inches)
Table 3-2 Mechanical Dimensions for 605 Type A
W
W1
Control Heat
Sink
H H1
If wall-mounted, the unit
must be fitted with the
Top Cover firmly screwed
into position. The overall
W2 height H is not affected.
D
Figure 3-2 Mechanical Dimensions for 605 Type B
605 Type Model Number H H1 W W1 W2 D Fixings

605 /022 /230/ 1 ....
605 /022/ 230/ 3 ....
605 /040/ 230/ 3 .... 233.0 223.0 171.0 129.5 129.5 181.0 Slot 4.8mm wide
B 605 /007/ 400/ 3 .... (9.17) (8.78) (6.73) (5.09) (5.09) (7.15) Use M4 fixings
605 /015/ 400/ 3 .... Weight 4.3kg (9.5lb)
605 /022/ 400/ 3 ....
605 /040/ 400/ 3 ....
All dimensions are in millimetres (inches)
Table 3-1 Mechanical Dimensions for 605 Type B

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
3-2 Installing the Inverter

Minimum Air Clearances
Ventilation
The inverter gives off heat in normal operation and must therefore be mounted to allow the free
flow of air through the ventilation slots and heatsink. Maintain minimum clearances for
ventilation as given in the tables below to ensure heat generated by other adjacent equipment is
not transmitted to the Inverter. Be aware that other equipment may have its own clearance
requirements. When mounting two or more 605s together, these clearances are additive.
Ensure that the mounting surface is normally cool.
Air Clearance: Cubicle-Mount Product/Application

(Europe: IP2x, USA/Canada: Open Type)
The Inverter, without the top cover fitted, must be mounted in a suitable cubicle.
J K
L Control Heat
Sink
AIR FLOW
M
Figure 3-3 Air Clearance for a Cubicle-Mount Product/Application

605 Type Clearances for Standard Product without UL Type 1 Top Cover (mm)
J K L M
A&B 15 0 (zero) 70 80
Air Clearance: Wall-Mount Product/Application

(Europe: IP2x plus IP4x top surface protection, USA/Canada: Type 1)
Wall-mounted 605s must have the top cover correctly fitted. The top cover fixing screw has a
maximum tightening torque of 1.5Nm (1.2Nm recommended). Refer to Chapter 12: “Direct
Wall-Mountable Models”.
UL Type 1 Top Cover
J K
L Control Heat
Sink
AIR FLOW
M
Figure 3-4 Air Clearance for a Wall-Mount Product/Application

605 Type Clearances for Standard Product with UL Type 1 Top Cover (mm)
J K L M
A&B 15 15 70 80

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Electrical Installation
IMPORTANT: Please read the Safety Information on page Cont. 3 & 4 before proceeding.
Wiring the Inverter

WARNING!
Ensure that all wiring is electrically isolated and cannot be made “live”
unintentionally by other personnel.
Note: Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” for additional Cabling Requirements and
Terminal Block Wire Sizes.
signal/control cable
(sensitive)
(noisy) (noisy)
power
supply external motor
cable ac inverter EMC
line motor motor cable motor
choke supply
output choke
(clean) EMC (noisy)
filter
filter
(noisy)
fuse or suitable internal ac supply EMC filter
circuit breaker (the external ac supply EMC filter
brake resistor
(RCD not recommended) must not be used with the
internal filter)
Figure 3-5 Cabling Requirements
Cables are considered to be electrically sensitive, clean or noisy. You should already have
planned your cable routes with respect to segregating these cables for EMC compliance.
If not, refer to Chapter 12: “Certification for the Inverter”.
Cable Gland Requirements

Use a metal gland to connect to the internally earthed gland plate. It must be capable of securing
a 360 degree screened connection to give EMC compliance. A 360 degree screened connection
can be achieved as shown.
Figure 3-6 360 Degree Screened Connection
The receiving hole in the gland plate has a compromised diameter of 22.8mm to accept metric
M20, PG16 and American ½” NPT cable gland sizes. The Frame B gland plate is fitted with
grommets, alternatively, the supplied screen termination clamps may be fitted.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Protective Earth (PE) Connections
The unit must be permanently earthed using two independent earth conductors. Protect the
incoming mains supply using a suitable fuse or circuit breaker as shown in Chapter 11:
“Technical Specifications” - Power Details.
IMPORTANT: The Inverter fitted with an internal or external ac supply EMC filter is only suitable for
earth referenced supplies (TN). Refer to “Earth Fault Monitoring Systems”, page 3-10.
Power Wiring Connections

1. Remove the terminal cover retaining screws and lift off the terminal cover.
2. Remove the internal power terminal shield.
3. Feed the power supply and motor cables into the inverter through the metal gland plate
using the correct cable entries, and connect to the power terminals. Tighten the terminals to
a torque of 1.0Nm (9 in.lb). Refer to Figure 3-8 Power Wiring and Earth Connections.
4. Re-fit the internal power terminal shield.
earth clamp connection

1 standard fitment
rubber grommet 2 metal cable gland 3 (605 Type A only)
screen
fit earth clamp
over cable screen
gland plate
metal gland must power wiring

have 360 degree to motor
screened connection
rubber for EMC compliance PE
grommet
PE power wiring
International
to motor
M grounding symbol
M
PE Protective Earth
power control motor control control

supply (metal
gland)
power power
605 Type A Gland Plate 3 motor supply/ motor
supply
(if using earth motor
clamp connection)
605 Type B Gland Plate

Figure 3-7 Cable and Screen Fixings showing recommended usage of Gland Plate
brake resistor Brake resistor and cable must be screened brake resistor
if not fitted inside a control cubicle
L1 L2/N DC+ DBR DC- M1/U M2/V M3/W L1 L2 L3 DC+ DBR DC- M1/U M2/V M3/W
PE1 PE2 PE1 PE2
power supply motor power supply motor

Cable Fixings
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3
(see above)
Type 605A Type 605A
Single Phase Input only Three Phase Input only
Figure 3-8 Power Wiring and Earth Connections

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Control Wiring Connections
Note: Use screened control cables to comply with EMC requirements.
1. Feed the control cables into the inverter through the metal gland plate and connect to the
control terminals. The diagram below shows the typical control connections required for
operation as a simple speed controller.
2. Refit and secure the terminal cover using the retaining screws.
Note: Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” for Control Terminal information
Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your Application” for ANALOG INPUT and ANALOG
OUTPUT 1 configuration switch settings.
T)
P M)
)
U
LY
H
AM RI
O
PU (EX IO
LT
M PP
( JO R IP
(R T
)
)
T)
EA
T ED
U SU
ED
EC
)
SE
U
)
(H
N
T
P U PE
PE
IT NPU (DIR
(R
IM R
E
PU RU
AX D E
IG INP 2 (R
UT (S
1
(S
2
IN 1 (
T
IN 4
O 2
A CO
T
1
PU
U
T
T
T
T
AN REF T
UT
T
TP
O PU
PU
0m (EN
T
IT PU
M
U
AL I N
A
10 IN
B
O
IG N
O
I
18 C
e
G
+ o te
I
F
D AL
0V AL
AN OG
D AL
AL
+ G
ot
AL
D
AL
RE
AL
O
N
IT
N
IT
V
V
IT
V
IT
IT
0V
AL
IG
AL
24
24
IG
IG
e
IG
e
IIG
0V
Se
Se
D
D
AN
D
+
D
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Speed
Setpoint Health Relay
10k Run Direction 24V DC 50mA maximum
PE
Note A: DIGITAL INPUT 6
5 or Note B: DIGITAL INPUT 7
6 or Encoder signals are 5-24V
ENCODER SIGNAL CHANNEL A ENCODER SIGNAL CHANNEL B with respect to Terminal 15
Figure 3-9 Typical Connection to the Control Terminals
Retro-fitting the 605

Digital outputs DOUT1 and DOUT2 (terminals 13 and 14) were changed to the industry
standard Current Source type with the introduction of Software Version 4.x.
Internal User Connections Internal User Connections
24V 24V
Load
DOUT DOUT
Load
0V 0V
Pull-down Current Sink Pull-up Current Source

Software Version 1.x to 3.x Software Version 4.x onwards
Directly replacing a "sink" drive with a newer "source" drive requires some simple rewiring of
the load, as shown above. The current software version is given on the first page of the manual.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Optional Equipment
Fitting the Remote 6901 Operator Station
Figure 3-10 Inverter showing the RS232 programming port

The 605 Inverter allows the Operator Station to be remotely-mounted. It replaces the drive-
mounted Operator Station. The two cannot be operated simultaneously. The remote Operator
Station is connected to the RS232 programming port using a 3 metre, 4-way cable.
Note: The 6901 Operator Station requires the 6052 Panel Mounting Kit.
6052 Mounting Kit Parts

Qty. Description
1 Gasket for remote Operator Station
1 4-Way cable assembly for remote Operator Station
1 Operator station retaining moulding
4 Screw No. 6 x 12mm
Tools Required
No. 2 Posidrive screwdriver.
Assembly Procedure
1. If fitted, remove the drive-mounted Operator Station for remote-mounting.
2. Select the location for the Operator Station and drill the four mounting holes.
3. Cut out the cable aperture.
4. Peel backing from gasket and attach to the panel.
5. Place the Operator Station into the retaining moulding and screw to the panel.
6. Connect the supplied cable (either end) to the Inverter’s RS232 programming port, in the
Operator Station recess.
7. Route the cable from the Inverter to the remote-mounted Operator Station and secure,
ensuring that adequate protection from live parts and abrasion is achieved.
8. Finally, connect the free end to the remote-mounted Operator Station.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Cutout Dimensions
mm
Template
Figure 3-11 Mounting Dimensions for the Remote-Mounted Operator Station 6901
Top Cover
This UL Type 1 top cover is fitted to wall-mounted 605 units to give improved compliance
ratings. Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” - Environmental Details.
Align the top cover to be flush with the front of the unit and press the locating pegs firmly into
position. The top must be secured with a screw.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

External Brake Resistor
Two standard heat resistors flying leads
are available from SSD a L2 W b
D
Drives. These resistors should b a
be mounted on a heatsink
(back panel) and covered to
prevent injury from burning. L3
L1
Part Number L1 L2 L3 W H D a b
CZ389853 165 152 125 22 41 4.3 10 12
CZ463068 165 146 125 30 60 5.3 13 17
Table 3-3 External Brake Resistor Dimensions
Part Number CZ389853 CZ463068

Resistance 100Ω 56Ω
Max wattage 100W 200W
5 second rating 500% 500%
Electrical connection M4 spade M5 spade
Table 3-4 External Brake Resistor Details

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

External AC Supply EMC Filter
W
W1
H
H1
D1
D
Figure 3-12 External AC Supply EMC Filter

Outline Dimensions (mm)
Model H H1 W W1 D D1
CO389969 214 192 145 104 40 24
CO389970 214 192 204 164 47 28
CO389971 214 192 204 164 47 28
Model Phase Frequency Current Voltage Watt Loss

CO389969 1 50/60Hz 16A 250VAC 7W
CO389970 1 50/60Hz 23A 250VAC 10W
CO389971 3 50/60Hz 16A 250VAC 10W
Table 3-5 External AC Supply EMC Filter Details (dimensions are in millimetres)
WARNING!
Do not use an internal or external ac supply EMC filter with supplies that are not
balanced with respect to earth (IT). They must only be used with earth referenced
supplies (TN).
Do not touch filter terminals or cabling for at least 3 minutes after removing the ac
supply.
Only use the ac supply filter with a permanent earth connection.
Mount the filter as close as possible to the inverter.

IMPORTANT: Do not use this filter on the Inverter when supplied with an internal ac supply EMC filter.
The external ac supply EMC filter models all have the same fixings:
• back mounting - 4 x M4
• side mounting - 2 x M6
Follow the cabling requirements given in Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications”

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

EMC Motor Output Filter
This can help the Inverter achieve EMC and filter thermal conformance with cable lengths
greater than those specified. It also ensure longer motor life by reducing the high voltage slew
rate and overvoltage stresses. Mount the filter as close to the VSD as possible. Please refer to
SSD Drives for the selection of a suitable filter.
Output Contactors
Output contactors can be used, although we recommend that this type of operation is limited to
emergency use only, or in a system where the inverter can be inhibited before closing or
opening this contactor.
Earth Fault Monitoring Systems

We do not recommend the use of circuit breakers (e.g. RCD, ELCB, GFCI), but where their use
is mandatory, they should:
• Operate correctly with dc and ac protective earth currents (i.e. type B RCDs as in
Amendment 2 of IEC755).
• Have adjustable trip amplitude and time characteristics to prevent nuisance tripping on
switch-on.
When the ac supply is switched on, a pulse of current flows to earth to charge the
internal/external ac supply EMC filter’s internal capacitors which are connected between phase
and earth. This has been minimised in SSD Drives’ filters, but may still trip out any circuit
breaker in the earth system. In addition, high frequency and dc components of earth leakage
currents will flow under normal operating conditions. Under certain fault conditions larger dc
protective earth currents may flow. The protective function of some circuit breakers cannot be
guaranteed under such operating conditions.
WARNING!
Circuit breakers used with VSDs and other similar equipment are not suitable for
personnel protection. Use another means to provide personal safety. Refer to
EN50178 (1997) / VDE0160 (1994) / EN60204-1 (1994)
AC Motor Choke (output)

Maximum Motor dv/dt = 10,000V/µs. This can be reduced by adding a motor choke in series
with the motor.
Installations with longer than specified motor cable runs may suffer from nuisance overcurrent
trips, refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” - Cabling Requirements for maximum
cable lengths. A choke may be fitted in the inverter output to limit capacitive current. Screened
cable has a higher capacitance and may cause problems in shorter runs. The recommended
choke values are shown in the tables below.
Inverter kW Choke Inductance RMS Current Rating SSD Part No.
0.75 2mH 7.5A CO055931
1.5 2mH 7.5A CO055931
2.2 0.9mH 22A CO057283
3.7 0.9mH 22A CO057283
Table 3-6 Recommended Choke Values for 220-240V Inverters

Note: Motor chokes must be fitted for 380-460V units with screened cable runs in excess of
50m; limit the switching frequency to 3kHz in these applications. Refer to Chapter 6:
“Programming Your Application” - PATTERN GEN.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Inverter kW Choke Inductance RMS Current Rating SSD Part No.
0.75 2mH 7.5A CO055931
1.5 2mH 7.5A CO055931
2.2 2mH 7.5A CO055931
3.7 0.9mH 22A CO057283
Table 3-7 Recommended Choke Values for 380-460V Inverters
130 +- 5 earth stud 130 +- 5 earth stud

15 15
140 140
27.5 +- 5 50 +- 2 100 +- 2 27.5 +- 5 50 +- 2 100 +- 2
slot 7 slot 7
12 long 12 long
105 +-3 105 +-3
75 +-1 95 +-3 47 +-1 67 +-3
120 +-3 120 +-3
155 +- 2 155 +- 2
M6 crimp M5 crimp
terminal terminal
dimensions are in millimetres dimensions are in millimetres
Eurotherm Part No. CO057283 Eurotherm Part No. CO055931
Figure 3-13 Fitting details for the AC Motor Choke

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Operating the Inverter 4-1

OPERATING THE INVERTER
4
By default, the Inverter will operate in Remote Start/Stop and Remote Speed Control. Analog
DEFAULT and digital inputs and outputs are selected to control the unit.
The Inverter will operate as an open-loop Inverter. No set-up or tuning is required. It is

programmed to control an induction motor of equivalent power, current and voltage rating to
the Inverter.
In this chapter, refer to Control Philosophy, Start-up Routines (Remote Control using Control
Terminals) and The Start/Stop Mode Explained.
Pre-Operation Checks
WARNING!
Wait for 5 minutes after disconnecting power before working on any part of the
system or removing the terminal cover from the Inverter.
Inital checks before applying power:

• Mains power supply voltage is correct.
• Motor is of correct voltage rating and is connected in either star or delta, as appropriate.
• Check all external wiring circuits - power, control, motor and earth connections.
Note: Completely disconnect the Inverter before point to point checking with a buzzer, or when
checking insulation with a Meggar.
• Check for damage to equipment.
• Check for loose ends, clippings, drilling swarf etc. lodged in the Inverter and system.
• If possible check that the motor can be turned freely, and that any cooling fans are intact and
free from obstruction.
Ensure the safety of the complete system before the Inverter is energised:
• Ensure that rotation of the motor in either direction will not cause damage.
• Ensure that nobody else is working on another part of the system which will be affected by
powering up.
• Ensure that other equipment will not be adversley affected by powering up.
Prepare to energise the Inverter and system as follows:

• Remove the supply fuses, or isolate using the supply circuit breaker.
• Disconnect the load from the motor shaft, if possible.
• If any of the Inverter’s control terminals are not being used, check whether these unused
terminals need to be tied high or low. Refer to Chapter 11: Technical Specifications -
Control Terminals.
• Check external run contacts are open.
• Check external speed setpoints are all zero.
Re-apply power to the Inverter and system

The Inverter has Macro 1 installed as the factory default. If you are controlling the Inverter in
Remote control, refer to Chapter 15: “Application Macros” for details of the most suitable
macro for your application.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
4-2 Operating the Inverter
Control Philosophy
There are four ways to control the Inverter using Remote and Local control:
605 inverter 605 inverter 605 inverter 605 inverter

using using using using
analog
6053
and digital Technology
inputs and Box
outputs to fieldbus Operator
PC running
and Station
DEFAULT ConfigEd Lite
Comms link
or other suitable
software
REMOTE CONTROL LOCAL CONTROL
Figure 4-1 Remote and Local Control Modes
Start/Stop and Speed Control

There are two forms of control in operation at any time: Start/Stop and Speed Control. Each can
be individually selected to be under either Local or Remote Control.
• Local or Remote Start/Stop decides how you will start and stop the Inverter.
• Local or Remote Speed Control determines how you will control the motor speed.
In each case, Local and Remote control are offered by using the following:
Local: The Operator Station
Remote: Analog and digital inputs and outputs, RS232 Port or the 6053 Technology Box
Thus the Inverter can operate in one of four combinations of local and remote modes:
REMOTE LOCAL
SPEED CONTROL SPEED CONTROL
SPEED SETPOINT
SPEED SETPOINT
DEFAULT
LOCAL START/STOP
REMOTE START/STOP
REMOTE LOCAL
SPEED CONTROL SPEED CONTROL
SPEED SETPOINT
SPEED SETPOINT
REMOTE START/STOP
LOCAL START/STOP
Figure 4-2 The Four Combinations of Local and Remote Control

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Note: Start/Stop is also known as “Sequencing”.
Speed Control is also known as “Reference Generation”.
Selecting Local or Remote Control

If the default combination of remote Start/Stop and Speed Control is not suitable for your
application, follow the instructions below using the Operator Station or a suitable PC
programming tool to select suitable combinations of local or remote control.
Note: You can only change between Local and Remote control when the Inverter is “stopped”.
To change a combination the Operator Station must have the “Advanced” viewing level
selected; allowing you to view enough of the menu structure to make the change. Refer to
Chapter 5: “ The Operator Station” - Menu Viewing Levels.
The L/R key on the Operator Station toggles between Local and Remote control, changing both
Start/Stop and Speed Control modes at the same time.
However, you can “fix” either or both modes in software to be either Local or Remote control.
This makes the L/R key inoperative for that mode. In this way, you can select a combination
where both Local and Remote modes are present.
To do this, go to the LOCAL CONTROL menu at level 4 and select MMI Menu Map
either: 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
LOCAL ONLY Sets Local control
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
REMOTE ONLY Sets Remote control
3 SEQ & REF
LOCAL/REMOTE Gives selection powers back to the L/R key.
4 LOCAL CONTROL
Fixing only one of the modes will mean that the L/R key will still
toggle the other mode between Local and Remote control.
LED Indications
The mode of control is indicated by the
“LOCAL” LEDs on the Operator Station: SEQ MODES
SEQ = Start/Stop LOCAL ONLY
HEALTH LOCAL
REF = Speed Control SEQ REF
If the LED is illuminated ( ● ), then LOCAL

mode is in force. Figure 4-3 Control Mode LED Indications
Note: The default is for the L/R key to be operative for both Sequencing and Reference
Generation, and to be set for Remote control, i.e. both LEDs will be off.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Start-up Routines
Remote Control using Control Terminals (default set-up)
DEFAULT This is the simplest method of operating the Inverter.No Set-up or tuning is required.
This routine assumes that the Inverter’s control terminals are wired as shown in Figure 3-13
Typical Connection to the Control Terminals.
Note: Ensure that the speed potentiometer is set to zero.
1. Power-up the unit. The HEALTH LED will light (the RUN LED remains off).
If the HEALTH LED flashes, the Inverter has tripped. Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault
Finding” to investigate and remove the cause of the trip. Reset the unit by momentarily
closing either the RESET switch or the RUN switch. The HEALTH LED will now light.
2. Close the RUN switch. The RUN LED will flash if the setpoint is at zero. Turn the speed
potentiometer up a little to apply a small speed setpoint. The RUN LED will light and the
motor will rotate slowly.
Reverse the motor’s direction of rotation either by pressing the DIR key, or by swapping two of
the motor phases (WARNING: Disconnect the mains supply first).
Reading the Status LEDs EUROTHERM

DRIVES
The HEALTH and RUN LEDs indicate status. The
LEDs are considered to operate in five different
ways:
OFF
SHORT FLASH
EQUAL FLASH
HEALTH RUN
LONG FLASH
ON Figure 4-4 Blank Cover

showing LEDs
Table 4-1 StatusRUN

HEALTH indications given by
Inverter the Health
State
Re-configuration, or corrupted non-volatile memory at power-up
Tripped
Auto Restarting
Stopped
Running with zero reference
Running
Stopping
Braking and running with zero reference
Braking and running
Braking and stopping
and Run LEDs

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Local Control using the Operator Station
Note: Refer to Chapter 5: “The Operator Station” to familiarise yourself with the Operator
Station’s LED indications, and how to use the keys and menu structure.
The following start-up routine assumes that the Operator Station is fitted and is in default mode,
and that the Inverter’s control terminals are wired as shown in Figure 3-13 - Typical Connection
to the Control Terminals.
1. Power-up the unit. The display will show the power-up screen, “AC MOTOR DRIVE”.
After a few seconds, SETPOINT (REMOTE) % will appear on the display.
The HEALTH, STOP, and FWD LEDs will light.
If the HEALTH LED flashes, the Inverter has tripped. The display will indicate the reason
for the trip. Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding” to investigate and remove the
cause of the trip. Reset the trip condition by pressing the Stop/Reset key on the keypad. The
HEALTH LED will now light.
2. Press the L/R (Local/Remote) key to enable Local control. Both the LOCAL SEQ and
LOCAL REF LEDs will light when Local control in enabled.
3. Press the RUN key. The RUN LED will light and the motor will rotate slowly. (The RUN
LED would flash if the setpoint was at zero.)
4. Reverse the motor’s direction of rotation by pressing either the DIR key, or by swapping
two of the motor phases (WARNING: Disconnect the mains supply first).
Setting-up the Inverter

The Inverter is set-up using the Operator Station, or a suitable PC programming tool. It can be
run in Sensorless Vector Fluxing mode, or as a simple Open-loop Inverter (V/F fluxing).
Quick Set-up as an Open-loop Inverter (V/F fluxing)

By loading a different macro, you are installing the default settings for MMI Menu Map
that macro’s application. Once a macro has been loaded (or the default
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
is used), the parameters most likely to require attention are contained
in the QUICK SETUP menu at level 2. 2 QUICK SETUP
QUICK SETUP Default Brief Description

Parameters
BASE FREQUENCY * 50.0 Hz Frequency at which Inverter gives maximum output volts
MAX SPEED * 50.0 Hz Max speed clamp and scale factor for other speed
parameters
MIN SPEED -100.00 % Min speed clamp
RAMP ACCEL RATE 10.0 s Acceleration time from 0Hz to max speed
RAMP DECEL RATE 10.0 s Deceleration time from max speed to 0Hz
V/F SHAPE LINEAR LAW Constant torque V to F characteristic
FULL LOAD CALIB ** 3.4 A Calibrates Inverter to motor full load current
NO LOAD CALIB ** 1.9 A Calibrates Inverter to motor no load current
POWER FACTOR ** 0.80 Set this to the motor power factor rating
MOTOR CURRENT xxxx.x A Motor current diagnostic (read only)
MOTOR I LIMIT 100.00% Level of motor current as % of FULL LOAD CALIB
FIXED BOOST 6.00 % Boosts starting torque by adding volts at low speed
RUN STOP MODE RAMPED Ramp to standstill when RUN signal removed
JOG SETPOINT 10.0 % Inverter speed setpoint whilst jogging
AIN 1 TYPE 0..+10V Input range and type
AIN 2 TYPE 0..+10V Input range and type
DISABLED TRIPS 0600 >> Sub-menu to set disabled trips
* These values are dependent upon the Language field of the Product Code, e.g. UK
Table 4-2 Important Parameters for the Open-loop Inverter

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Set-up using the Sensorless Vector Fluxing Mode
The Inverter must be tuned to the motor in use by matching the motor parameters in the Inverter
to those of the motor being controlled. The most important motor parameters are:
• Per-phase stator resistance
MMI Menu Map
• Per-phase leakage inductance 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
• Per-phase mutual (magnetising) inductance 2 VECTOR SETUP
Tuning can be performed manually by entering known parameter values, or by calculating the
parameter values using the motor manufacturer’s per-phase equivalent circuit.
Enter values for the following parameters, found under VECTOR SETUP menu at level 2.
VECTOR SETUP Default Brief Description

Parameters
VECTOR ENABLE FALSE Slip compensation is enabled. Change to
TRUE to enable sensorless vector operation
NAMEPLATE RPM ** 1420 n/min (rpm) Motor nameplate speed
MOTOR POLES 4 Number of motor poles
MOTOR VOLTS ** 230.0 V Maximum motor output voltage
SUPPLY VOLTAGE ** xxxx.x V Line-to-line rms supply voltage to the Inverter
(read-only)
MOTOR CONNECTION ** DELTA Type of motor connection
AUTOTUNE ENABLE FALSE Enables the Autotune feature
STATOR RES ** 1.0 Ohm Motor per-phase stator resistance
FIELD 0.0% Diagnostic only
LEAKAGE INDUC ** 10.0 mH Motor per-phase stator leakage inductance
MUTUAL INDUC ** 1000.0mH Motor per-phase stator mutual (magnetising)
inductance
** These parameters are set to a value depending on the overall “power-build”,
e.g. 230V, 0.75kW
Table 4-3 Important Parameters for the Sensorless Vector Fluxing Mode
The Autotune Feature

The Autotune feature can be used to identify and store the following parameters:
STATOR RES
LEAKAGE INDUC
MUTUAL INDUC
CURRENT FEEDBACK (if selected in the AUTOTUNE function block)
The remaining important parameters are preset to a value depending on the overall “power-
build”, as detailed in the table above.
Operating the Inverter with the Autotune function block enabled starts MMI Menu Map
the Autotune sequence. 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
• With ADVANCED view level selected, select the AUTOTUNE 2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
menu at level 4. Press the M key to reveal the AUTOTUNE
ENABLE page. 3 MOTOR CONTROL
• Press the M key. The up (∆) and down (∇) keys toggle the 4 AUTOTUNE
parameter between TRUE and FALSE. Set to TRUE. Press the E AUTOTUNE ENABLE
key to exit the parameter. AUTOTUNE MODE
AUTOTUNE ACTIVE
• On starting the Inverter, the Autotune sequence is initiated. When
complete (after a maximum of 10 seconds), the Inverter is returned to the stopped condition
and the AUTOTUNE ENABLE parameter is reset to FALSE.
Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your Application” - AUTOTUNE for further information.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Manual Tuning
Tuning using the Motor Equivalent Circuit
Rs L1 L2
Is Ir
Rr
S
Vs Lm Im
Figure 4-5 The Motor Equivalent Circuit

From the motor equivalent circuit, the values programmed into the Inverter are:
STATOR RES = Rs Ohms
( Lm ) 2
(
LEAKAGE INDUC = L1 + Lm − ) mH
( L2 + Lm )
MUTUAL INDUC =
( Lm ) 2 mH
( L2 + Lm )
Tuning using a Simple Tuning Sequence
MMI Menu Map
If the motor equivalent circuit is not available, the following simple
tuning sequence can be used. All QUICK SETUP parameters must be 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
correctly set, including FULL LOAD CALIB and NO LOAD CALIB: 2 QUICK SETUP
• Set FULL LOAD CALIB to the rms line current given on the
motor nameplate
• Set NO LOAD CALIB to the Inverter’s rms line current value while running the
motor at base frequency (V/F) under no-load conditions.
Now set the following parameters in this order to complete the manual MMI Menu Map
tuning process. 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
NAMEPLATE RPM Enter the motor nameplate rated speed 2 VECTOR SETUP
MOTOR POLES Enter the number of motor poles
SUPPLY VOLTAGE Enter the Inverter rms line-to-line volts
MOTOR CONNECTION Enter the motor 3-phase connection type
VECTOR ENABLE Set to TRUE.
STATOR RES Set STATOR RES to zero. Run motor at zero speed (unloaded).
Note the BOOST parameter value (see PATTERN GEN).
Calculate STATOR RES as follows and enter the result:
STAR CONNECTION DELTA CONNECTION
BOOST 3 x BOOST
STATOR RES = STATOR RES =
3 x NO LOAD CALIB NO LOAD CALIB
LEAKAGE INDUC Set parameter to zero and run motor at 50Hz un-loaded
MUTUAL INDUC Alter until FIELD diagnostic reads approximately 100%.
1. Take the manually tuned value for MUTUAL INDUC, and
split it into 20% and 80% portions.
2. Enter the 20% portion into LEAKAGE INDUC parameter
3. Enter the 80% portion into MUTUAL INDUC parameter.
IMPORTANT: Remember to save the parameter settings.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Tuning Difficulties
The most important parameter setting for correct operation at low MMI Menu Map
motor speeds is stator resistance (STATOR RES): 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
• Too low and motor torque will be lower than expected 2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
• Too high and the Inverter enters the current limit and will be 3 MOTOR CONTROL
unable to ramp-up to speed. Reduce the value of STATOR RES
to eliminate this problem. 4 VECTOR FLUXING
See VECTOR FLUXING at menu level 4.
The Start/Stop Mode Explained

The default configuration below shows the Inverter in Remote control, (using the analog and
digital inputs and outputs). This example will be referred to in the following explanations.
SETPOINT SPEED SETPOINT

Analog Input 1
Terminal 2 + +
- - ACCEL RATE MAX SPEED CLAMP
Reference Selection
SETPOINT TRIM
Analog Input 2 SETPOINT(REMOTE) System Ramp Clamps
Terminal 4
+ SPEED DEMAND
+
DIRECTION JOG SETPOINT
Digital Input 3
Terminal 9 0%
RAMP OUTPUT
Analog Output 1
DECEL RATE MIN SPEED CLAMP Terminal 5
LOCAL SETPOINT +
-
SPEED TRIM
FORWARD/REVERSE
Key on Operator Station
0% Selected with DEFAULT
REMOTE SETPOINT
RUN
Digital Input 1
Terminal 7
TRIP RESET Sequencing Logic HEALTH

Digital Input 2 Digital Output 1
Terminal 8 Terminal 13
EXTERNAL
TRIP
Digital Input 4 RUNNING
Terminal 10 Digital Output 2
Terminal 14
JOG
Digital Input 5
Terminal 11
Figure 4-6 Portion of the Default Configuration
Start/Stop Controlled Remotely

In the configuration shown, the reference value is obtained by summing ANALOG INPUT 1
DEFAULT and ANALOG INPUT 2. The direction of rotation is controlled by DIGITAL INPUT 3. When
the RUN input (DIGITAL INPUT 1) is TRUE, the SPEED DEMAND ramps up to the reference
value at a rate controlled by ACCEL RATE. The Inverter will continue to run at the reference
value while the RUN input remains TRUE.
Similarly when the JOG input (DIGITAL INPUT 5) is TRUE, the SPEED DEMAND ramps up
to the JOG SETPOINT at a ramp rate set by JOG ACCEL RATE (not shown in the diagram).
The Inverter will continue to run at the JOG SETPOINT while the JOG input remains TRUE.
Start/Stop Controlled Locally

The reference value is set by the SETPOINT (LOCAL) parameter. The direction of rotation is
controlled by the DIR key (forward/reverse) on the Operator Station. When the RUN key is
pressed the SPEED DEMAND ramps up to the reference value at a rate controlled by ACCEL
RATE. The Inverter will continue to run at the reference value even when the RUN key is
released. Press the STOP key to “stop” the Inverter.
When the JOG key is pressed and held, the SPEED DEMAND ramps up to the JOG SETPOINT
at a ramp rate set by JOG ACCEL RATE (not shown in the diagram). Release the JOG key to
“stop” the Inverter.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Interaction between RUN and JOG
Only one of these signals can be in effect at any one time; the other signal is ignored. The
Inverter must be “stopped” to change from running to jogging, or vice versa.
Start/Stop Mode Diagnostics

In the configuration shown, Start/Stop mode provides two DIGITAL OUTPUT signals (RUN
and HEALTH).
The RUN signal is TRUE from the time a start command is processed until a stop sequence is
completed. This normally means the time between the Inverter starting until the power stack is
quenched. Refer to Chapter 9: “Sequencing Logic States” for a more detailed description.
The HEALTH output is TRUE when the Inverter is not tripped.
Additional diagnostic parameters are available when using the Operator Station. These are
described in Chapter 6: “Programming Your Application” and Chapter 9: “Sequencing Logic
States”.
Starting and Stopping Methods

Note: Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your Application - REFERENCE, SEQUENCING LOGIC,
STOP and SYSTEM RAMP, for explanations of parameters.
Normal Stopping Methods

DEFAULT Macro 1 is set to “Ramp to Stop” (at STOP RATE, set to 10.0s).
With the Operator Station, or suitable programming tool, the Inverter can be selected to “Coast
to Stop”, or to “Ramp to Stop” at one of two rates (STOP RATE or FAST STOP RATE). The
stopping procedure is different for Local and Remote Start/Stop. Refer to “Start/Stop Controlled
Locally”, page 4-8 and “Start/Stop Controlled Remotely”, page 4-8.
Ramp to Stop
When a stop command is received, the Inverter decelerates from its actual speed towards zero
for the programmed RAMP DECEL RATE time. When this time has elapsed, SPEED TRIM is
ramped to 0% in the programmed STOP RATE time.
Note: If SPEED TRIM does not operate, SPEED DEMAND is reduced to 0% in RAMP DECEL RATE
time.
The power stack remains energised until the STOP DELAY period has elapsed.
RUN input
SPEED DEMAND
REMOTE SETPOINT
POWER
SPEED TRIM CIRCUIT
DISABLED
Speed 0%
Ramp to zero speed at STOP DELAY
RAMP DECEL RATE
Ramp SPEED TRIM to

zero at STOP RATE
Figure 4-7 Ramp to Stop with a Remote Reference

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

A special case exists when the RAMP DECEL RATE is set to 0.0 seconds, or when the RAMP
HOLD parameter is TRUE. In both these situations the SPEED DEMAND will ramp down to
zero at the STOP RATE.
RUN input
REMOTE SETPOINT
SPEED DEMAND
SPEED TRIM POWER
Speed 0% CIRCUIT
DISABLED
Ramp SPEED DEMAND STOP DELAY
to zero at STOP RATE
Figure 4-8 Remote to Stop with a Remote Reference: no RAMP DECEL RATE
Coast to Stop
In this mode the RAMP DECEL RATE ramp and the STOP RATE ramp are both ignored. Thus
the SPEED DEMAND changes immediately to 0% as soon as the Stop command is given. The
power stack is also immediately disabled at this time, causing the load to coast.
POWER CIRCUIT DISABLED

RUN input
REMOTE SETPOINT
SPEED DEMAND
Speed 0%
Figure 4-9 Coast to Stop with a Remote Reference
Advanced Stopping Methods

The Inverter can be selected to /FAST STOP or to /COAST STOP. The stopping procedure is
unaffected by Local or Remote Sequencing options.
Forced Fast Stop

The /Fast Stop mode overrides the RUN FWD, RUN REV and JOG inputs in Remote mode, and
the RUN and JOG Operator Station keys in Local mode. It is selected by setting /FAST STOP to
TRUE.
The Fast Stop mode can be set to either RAMP or COAST. The stopping sequence starts when
the /FAST STOP input goes FALSE, regardless of the state of the RUN input.
/FAST STOP
SPEED DEMAND
REMOTE SETPOINT
POWER
SPEED TRIM CIRCUIT
Speed 0% DISABLED
Ramp SPEED DEMAND to
zero at FAST STOP RATE
FAST STOP LIMIT
Figure 4-10 Forced Fast Stop RAMP Mode example

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Forced Coast Stop
Using the /Coast Stop mode immediately disables the power stack, causing the load to coast to a
stop. The Inverter gives priority to the /COAST STOP signal. The /FAST STOP signal is
therefore ignored while /COAST STOP is active.
/COAST STOP POWER CIRCUIT DISABLED
REMOTE SETPOINT
SPEED DEMAND
SPEED TRIM
Speed 0%
Figure 4-11 Forced Coast Stop example
The Trip Condition

When a trip condition is detected, a similar stopping method to /COAST STOP is used. The
power stack cannot be re-enabled until the trip condition has been cleared and successfully reset.
Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding” for further details.
Logic Stopping
The Inverter can be stopped by setting the /STOP to FALSE for a short time, (>100 ms). The
stop sequence continues even if the /STOP signal goes inactive before the Inverter is stopped.
Various combinations of stop logic are shown below.
RUN FWD not ignored RUN FWD acted on

RUN FWD ignored as
as now stopping immediately as previous
already running
state was RUN FWD
RUN FWD
RUN REV
/STOP
REMOTE SETPOINT
Speed 0%
SPEED DEMAND
REMOTE SETPOINT
Figure 4-12 Interaction between RUN FWD, RUN REV and /STOP Parameters
JOG not ignored as now

stopping. Waits for stop to
JOG ignored as complete before acting on JOG immediately effective
already running JOG. as previous mode was JOG
JOG
RUN FWD
/STOP
REMOTE SETPOINT
JOG SETPOINT
Speed 0% SPEED DEMAND
Figure 4-13 Example of the Interaction between RUN and JOG Parameters

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Normal Starting Method
In the default configuration view, two digital input signals are used to control the RUN FWD
DEFAULT parameter and the REMOTE REV parameter, as shown below. Note that the /STOP parameter
is active, (FALSE), meaning that the Inverter will only run while the relevant RUN parameters
are held TRUE.
24V RUN Sequencing Logic

Digital Input 1
RUN FWD
DIRECTION FALSE RUN REV

Digital Input 3
REMOTE REVERSE
JOG
JOG
Digital Input 5
FALSE /STOP
TRUE /FAST STOP
TRUE /COAST STOP
TRUE DRIVE ENABLE
Figure 4-14 Default Sequencing Wiring
Advanced Starting Methods

Starting Several Inverters Simultaneously
IMPORTANT: We do not recommend that this signal is used to start an Inverter in “normal” use.
Use the DRIVE ENABLE parameter to control the output power stack. When this parameter is
FALSE, the power stack is disabled regardless of the state of any other parameters. In
conjunction with the HEALTHY output parameter, DRIVE ENABLE can synchronise several
Inverters on power-up.
Single Wire Logic Starting

Use this when the motor direction will always be the same. The motor will run while the switch
is closed, and will stop when it is open.
24V Sequencing Logic

RUN FWD
FALSE RUN REV
FALSE REMOTE REVERSE
FALSE JOG
FALSE /STOP
TRUE /FAST STOP
TRUE /COAST STOP
TRUE DRIVE ENABLE
Figure 4-15 Single Wire Sequencing example

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Two Wire Logic Starting
This is an alternative to the default configuration. The Inverter can operate in forward and
reverse depending upon which switch is closed. If both RUN FWD and RUN REV are TRUE
at the same time, both are ignored and the Inverter will stop.
24V Sequencing Logic

RUN FWD
RUN REV
FALSE JOG
FALSE /STOP
TRUE /FAST STOP
TRUE /COAST STOP
TRUE DRIVE ENABLE
Figure 4-16 Two Wire Sequencing example
Three Wire Logic Starting

In this example the /STOP parameter is held inactive using a digital input. In this situation the
RUN FWD and RUN REV signals are latched.
For example, setting RUN FWD to TRUE temporarily, (> 100ms), by closing the push button
switch causes the Inverter to start running. The Inverter continues running when the push button
contact is released causing RUN FWD to return to FALSE. While the Inverter is running
forwards, the RUN REV parameter is ignored until the Inverter is stopped, even though the
RUN FWD signal is now FALSE.
The JOG parameter is never latched in this way. The Inverter only jogs while the JOG
parameter is TRUE.
Normally open
24V push button switch Sequencing Logic
RUN FWD
RUN REV
FALSE JOG
/STOP
TRUE /FAST STOP

Normally closed TRUE /COAST STOP
push button switch
TRUE DRIVE ENABLE
Figure 4-17 Push Button Bi-directional Sequencing example

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
The Operator Station 5-1

THE OPERATOR STATION
5
Connecting the Operator Station

The Operator Station is a
plug-in MMI (Man-Machine
Interface) option that allows
full use of the Inverter’s
features. DC
A I GM
I TO
ATLODRCDD
RRI VI V
EE
1
It provides local control of the DC 4Q 15A230V 4.x
0.75kW
Inverter, monitoring, and
complete access for OK SEQ REF
application programming.
E PROG
Insert the Operator Station Programming
into the front of the Inverter Keys
L
(replacing the blank cover and M R
plugging into the RS232
programming port); or mount
it up to 3 metres away using Local
the optional panel mounting Control
kit with connecting lead by Keys
plugging into the lower JOG
Remote Op Station port P3 (if

the port is already in use,
simply remove the cable).
Figure 5-1 Operator Station displaying Welcome screen
Welcome Screen
On power-up, a default Welcome screen is displayed for several seconds showing the product
description; power rating, voltage and software version of the Inverter.
After a few seconds the display changes to SETPOINT (REMOTE) by default.
Customising the Operator Station

This chapter contains information on how to customise the Operator Station to your application.
Below are some of the ways in which you can make the Operator Station work effectively for
you.
Consider the following features:
• The Welcome screen can be customised so that it displays the process name, for example.
• Create two custom screens for the user, using units and names relevant to the process.
• Choose which parameters you need to see in the OPERATOR menu.
• Set a password for the Operator Station to make all parameters “read-only”
• Enable/disable the keys on the Operator Station as required, i.e., JOG, DIR etc.
• Select the correct viewing level to reduce the menu size for easy operation.
HINT: Customise the action of the Operator Station to create an effective working tool. Spend
time setting up the OPERATOR menu, as this is the list of parameters most used in the
operation of your Inverter. Refer to “Special Menu Features”, page 5-10.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
5-2 The Operator Station
Controlling the Operator Station

Control Keys
Keys for Programming the Drive
Note: See “Error! Reference source not found.”, page 5-Error! Bookmark not defined. for a
quick-start to using the menu.
UP Navigation - Moves upwards through the list of parameters.

Parameter - Increments the value of the displayed parameter.
Command Acknowledge - Confirms action when in a command menu.
DOWN Navigation - Moves downwards through the list of parameters.
Parameter - Decrements the value of the displayed parameter.
ESCAPE Navigation - Displays the previous level’s Menu.

Parameter - Returns to the parameter list.
E Trip Acknowledge - Acknowledges displayed Trip or Error message.
MENU Navigation - Displays the next Menu level, or the first parameter of the
current Menu.
Parameter - Allows a writable parameter to be modified (this is indicated
M by → appearing on the left of the bottom line).
PROG Navigation - Toggles between current locations within the Operator
menu and any other menu.
PROG
LOCAL/ Control - Toggles between Remote and Local Control for both Start/Stop
REMOTE (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref). When toggling, the display automatically
goes to the relevant SETPOINT screen, and the SETPOINT (LOCAL)
L
R screen will have the ▲ and ▼ keys enabled to alter the setpoint.
Keys for Operating the Drive Locally

FORWARD/ Control - Changes the direction of motor rotation. Only operates
REVERSE when the drive is in Local Speed Control mode.
JOG Control - Runs the motor at a speed determined by the JOG

SETPOINT parameter. When the key is released, the drive returns to
JOG
“stopped”. Only operates when the drive is “stopped“ and in Local
Start/Stop mode.
RUN Control - Runs the motor at a speed determined by the LOCAL
SETPOINT or REMOTE SETPOINT parameter.
Trip Reset - Resets any trips and then runs the motor as above. Only
operates when the drive is in Local Start/Stop (Seq) mode.
STOP/RESET Control - Stops the motor. Only operates when the drive is in Local
Sequence mode.
Trip Reset - Resets any trips and clears displayed message if trip is
no longer active.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

LED Indications
There are seven LEDs that indicate the status of the Inverter. Each LED is considered to operate
in three different ways:
OFF The LEDs are labelled HEALTH, LOCAL (as SEQ

FLASH and REF), FWD, REV, RUN, and STOP.
Combinations of these LEDs have the following
ON meanings:
HEALTH RUN STOP Inverter State
Re-Configuration
Tripped
Stopped
Stopping
Running with zero reference
Running
Autotuning
FWD REV Forward / Reverse State
Requested direction and actual direction are forward
Requested direction and actual direction are reverse
Requested direction is forward but actual direction is reverse
Requested direction is reverse but actual direction is forward
LOCAL LOCAL Local / Remote Mode

SEQ REF
Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref) are controlled from the
terminals
Start/Stop (Seq) is controlled using the RUN, STOP, JOG and

FWD/REV keys. Speed Control (Ref) is controlled from the terminals
Start/Stop (Seq) is controlled from the terminals

Speed Control (Ref) is controlled using the up (∆) and down (∇) keys
Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref) are controlled using the
Operator Station keys

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
The Menu System

The menu system is divided into a `tree’ structure with 5 menu levels. Menu Level 1 is at the top
of the tree. Parameters contained in Menu Level 1 are the most frequently used, as you descend
the menu levels the parameters are less frequently used.
The Operator Station has selectable “viewing levels” which can restrict the view of the menu
system, refer to “Menu Viewing Levels”, page 5-11.
Below is a simple description of the menus at Menu Level 1: The Menu System
• OPERATOR: a view of selected parameters contained in
WELCOME SCREEN
the FUNCTION BLOCKS menu. You can customise the
Operator menu to create a working list of parameters for timeout
operating your Inverter. from
power-up
• DIAGNOSTICS: a view of important diagnostic OPERATOR

parameters contained in the FUNCTION BLOCKS menu. menu at level 1
• SETUP PARAMETERS: contains all the function block DIAGNOSTICS

parameters for programming your application, including menu at level 1
parameters for tuning the Inverter.
SETUP PARAMETERS
• PASSWORD: a view of important Password parameters menu at level 1
contained in the FUNCTION BLOCKS menu.
• TRIPS STATUS: a view of the trip diagnostic parameters PASSWORD
menu at level 1
contained in the FUNCTION BLOCKS menu.
• MENUS: a view of parameters contained in the TRIPS STATUS
menu at level 1
FUNCTION BLOCKS menu for setting-up the Operator
Station display.
MENUS
• PARAMETER SAVE: Save the application. menu at level 1
• SYSTEM: Macro selection and enter/exit Configuration PARAMETER SAVE

Mode. menu at level 1
SYSTEM
Figure 5-2 The Menu System showing Menus at Level 1 menu at level 1
Navigating the Menu System

On power-up, the Operator Station defaults into the OPERATOR menu, timing out from the
Welcome screen. You can skip the timeout by pressing the M key immediately after power-up
which will take you directly to the OPERATOR menu.
scroll
The menu system can be thought of as map which
is navigated using the four keys shown opposite.
exit to
Keys E and M navigate through the menu levels. previous E M next menu
The up (∆) and down (∇) keys scroll through the menu
Menu and Parameter lists.
scroll
Refer to “The Menu System Map” to see how the NAVIGATING THE MENU
menu is mapped.
HINT: Remember that because the Menu and Parameter lists are looped, the ∆ key can
quickly move you to the last Menu or Parameter in the loop.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

The Menu System Map
MENU LEVEL 1 MENU LEVEL 2 MENU LEVEL 3 MENU LEVEL 4 MENU LEVEL 5
OPERATOR
menu at level 1
DIAGNOSTICS
menu at level 1
SETUP PARAMETERS QUICK SETUP

menu at level 1
VECTOR SETUP
PASSWORD FUNCTION BLOCKS INPUTS & OUTPUTS ANALOG INPUT ANALOG INPUT 1
menu at level 1 ANALOG INPUT 2
DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT 1

TRIPS STATUS
menu at level 1 DIGITAL INPUT 5
ANALOG DIGIN ANALOG DIGIN 1

MENUS
ANALOG DIGIN 2
menu at level 1
ANALOG OUTPUT ANALOG OUTPUT 1
PARAMETER SAVE
SAVE TO MEMORY
menu at level 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT DIGITAL OUTPUT 1
SAVE TO OP
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2
SYSTEM RESTORE DEFAULTS MACRO 1 ENCODER
menu at level 1
MACRO 2
MACRO 3
SEQ & REF SEQUENCING LOGIC
MACRO 4
AUTO RESTART
MACRO 5 LOCAL CONTROL
MACRO 6 REFERENCE
MACRO 0 SYSTEM RAMP
STOP
LOAD FROM MEMORY
JOG
LOAD FROM OP ALL PARAMETERS
ZERO SPEED
APPLICATION ONLY
SETPOINT FUNCS RAISE/LOWER
LINKS
PRESET PRESET 1
ENABLE CONFIG PRESET 8
SKIP FREQUENCIES
MINIMUM SPEED
PID
BRAKE CONTROL
MOTOR CONTROL SETPOINT SCALE
SLEW RATE LIMIT
SLIP COMP
CURRENT FEEDBACK
CURRENT LIMIT
STABILISATION
FLUXING
VECTOR FLUXING
AUTOTUNE
VOLTAGE CONTROL
UNDERLAP COMP
PATTERN GEN
DYNAMIC BRAKING
INJ BRAKING
FLY CATCHING
TRIPS TRIPS STATUS

OPERATOR VIEW:
I/O TRIPS
OPERATOR menu at level 1
plus VIEW LEVEL parameter only in I*T TRIPS
MENUS menu at level 1
STALL TRIP
TRIPS HISTORY
BASIC & ADVANCED VIEWS
MENUS OP STATION
PASSWORD
ADVANCED VIEW ONLY
OPERATOR MENU
CUSTOM SCREEN 1
CUSTOM SCREEN 2
SERIAL LINKS COMMS CONTROL
SYSTEM PORT (P3)
E M TEC OPTION
MISCELLANEOUS VALUE FUNCTION VALUE FUNC 1
VALUE FUNC 10
LOGIC FUNCTION LOGIC FUNC 1
LOGIC FUNC 10
MULTIPLEXER
DEMULTIPLEXER

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Changing a Parameter Value
Refer back to “The Menu System Map” to see how increment
the menu is mapped.
Each menu contains parameters.
exit enter
parameter
change
E M parameter
With the Parameter you want on view, press M to change
begin editing.
The up (∆) and down (∇) keys will now change the
decrement
parameter/function value.
EDITING PARAMETERS
Press E to finish editing.
The four keys will once again navigate around the Menus. Refer back to “Navigating the Menu
System”, page 5-4.
What do the Symbols mean next to some Parameters?

Parameter Status Information → ← =
→ Pressing M in a parameter displays → on the left of the bottom line to indicate

that the up and down keys will now change parameter values. Pressing E
removes the symbol and reverts the up and down keys to scrolling through the
parameters.
← A writable parameter may be non-writable if it is the destination of a link. In

this case it will be indicated by ← appearing on the left of the bottom line.
= Non-writable parameters are identified by = appearing on the left of the

bottom line.
Note that some parameters become non-writable when the Inverter is running.
Expanded Menu Information >>

The parameters listed below are followed by >> to the right of the bottom display line indicating
that there is more information. Press the M key to display a further list of parameters.
AUTO RESTART menu at level 4: AR TRIGGERS 1

AR TRIGGERS 2
TRIPS STATUS menu at level 4: DISABLED TRIPS

ACTIVE TRIPS
TRIP WARNINGS
OP STATION menu at level 4: ENABLED KEYS

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Alert Message Displays
A message will be displayed on the Operator Station when either:
• A requested operation is not allowed.

The top line details the illegal operation, while the * KEY
1 INACTIVE *
bottom line gives the reason or cause. See example 1
REMOTE SEQ
opposite.
HEALTH LOCAL
SEQ REF
• The Inverter has tripped.

The top line indicates a trip has occurred while the * *1* TRIPPED * * *
1
bottom line gives the reason for the trip. See HEATSINK TEMP
example opposite. HEALTH LOCAL
SEQ REF
Most messages are displayed for only a short period, or for as long as an illegal operation is
tried, however, trip messages must be acknowledged by pressing the E key.
Experience will show how to avoid most messages. They are displayed in clear, concise
language for easy interpretation. Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding” for trip messages
and reasons.
The PROG Key

The PROG key toggles between the OPERATOR menu and any other menu, remembering and
returning to previous positions in each menu. As you press the PROG key, the title of the menu
you are about to enter is displayed, i.e. OPERATOR or for example TRIPS. Releasing the key
clears the display and releases you into that menu.
The Menu System

WELCOME SCREEN press immediately after
power-up to skip the
timeout timeout
E from M
power-up
OPERATOR PROG to other menus/parameters
SETPOINT (REMOTE)
to other parameters
Figure 5-3 The Menu System showing Operation of the E, M and PROG Keys
The L/R Key

The L/R key (LOCAL/REMOTE) toggles between Remote and Local Control. In doing so, the
view of the SETPOINT parameter in the OPERATOR menu toggles between LOCAL
SETPOINT and REMOTE SETPOINT. The default is for the REMOTE SETPOINT parameter
to be displayed.
Note: A different naming convention is applied in the OPERATOR menu for these parameters
when displayed as the first parameter entry:
• REMOTE SETPOINT is displayed as SETPOINT (REMOTE)
• LOCAL SETPOINT is displayed as SETPOINT (LOCAL)

Pressing the L/R key when in Remote mode takes you directly to the SETPOINT (LOCAL)
parameter with the Edit mode enabled. Press the PROG key to return to the previous display.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
The MMI DIAGNOSTICS Menu

SPEED DEMAND Tag No. 255 xxx.xh%
Actual speed demand.
(Refer to reference )
REMOTE SETPOINT Tag No. 245 -300.00 to 300.00 %
Target remote reference used when ramping in remote reference mode.
(Refer to reference, page)
COMMS SETPOINT Tag No. 269 -300.00 to 300.00 %
Target reference used when ramping in remote reference Comms mode.
LOCAL SETPOINT Tag No. 247 0.00 to 100.00 %
The Operator Station setpoint.
JOG SETPOINT Tag No. 246 0.00 to 100.00 %
Target reference used when ramping in local or remote reference Jog mode.
(Refer to jog, page)
DRIVE FREQUENCY Tag No. 591 xxx.xHz
The Inverter output frequency.
(Refer to pattern gen, page)
ENCODER SPEED Tag No. 568 xxxx.xHz
Speed feedback in Hz.
(Refer to encoder, page)
ENCODER SPEED Tag No. 569 xxxxx n/min
Speed feedback in RPM
ENCODER SPEED Tag No. 749 xxx.xx%
Speed feedback as a percentage of MAXIMUM SPEED.
MOTOR CURRENT Tag No. 67 xxxx.xA
Level of rms line current being drawn from the Inverter.
(Refer to current feedback, page 6-Error! Bookmark not
defined.)
LOAD Tag No. 207 xxx.xx%
Normalised version of the I TORQUE diagnostic: 100% = motor operating at rated load
(torque).
(Refer to current feedback, page)
FIELD Tag No. 73 xxx.xh%
Normalised version of the MOTOR CURRENT diagnostic: 100% = motor operating at rated
magnetic flux (field).
CURRENT LIMITING Tag No. 370 FALSE / TRUE
Indicates if current limit is active (altering Inverter output frequency).
(Refer to current limit, page)
BRAKING Tag No. 81 FALSE / TRUE
Indicates the state of the brake switch.
(Refer to dynamic braking, page)
DC LINK VOLTS Tag No. 75 xxxx.xV
The internal dc voltage being tested by the braking block.
ACTIVE TRIPS Tag No. 4 0000 to FFFF
Indictes which trips are currently active.
(Refer to trips status, page)
FIRST TRIPS Tag No. 6 enumerated
Indictes the source of the first trip from when a trip occurs.
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

(Refer to trips status, page)
AIN 1 VALUE Tag No. 16 xxx.xx%
The input reading with scaling and input applied.
(Refer to analog input, page)
AIN 2 VALUE Tag No. 25 xxx.xx%
The input reading with scaling and input applied.
(Refer to analog input, page)
DIN 1 VALUE Tag No. 31 FALSE / TRUE
The TRUE or FALSE input (after any inversion).
(Refer to digital input, page)
AOUT 1 VALUE Tag No. 45 -300.00 to 300.00%
The demanded value to output.
(Refer to anaolog output, page)
DOUT1 VALUE Tag No. 52 FALSE / TRUE
The True or False output demand.
(Refer to digital output, page)
DOUT 2 VALUE Tag No. 55 FALSE / TRUE
The True or False output demand.
(Refer to digital output, page)

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Special Menu Features

Menu Shortcuts and Special Key Combinations
Quick Link Information
When in Advanced view level, pressing the M key for approximately 3 seconds in any
parameter will display link information about that parameter (a message may be displayed
during this time). The information is displayed in the following format:
325- - - 7 ->[245]
Source tag number Link number Destination tag number
Note: The Inverter must be in Configuration mode before links can be edited. However, holding
the M key down in Parameterisation mode will allow the information to be displayed but
the information disappears when the key is released.
Use the up (∆) and down (∇) keys to change the source tag number. If the source number is
changed from zero, the next available link number will be assigned. Press E twice to clear the
link information and return to the parameter.
All link information is also available through the menu LINKS, menu at level 2.
Quick Save to Memory

Holding down the PROG key for about 2 seconds quickly takes you to the SAVE TO
MEMORY menu in the PARAMETER SAVE menu at level 1.
After saving, press the PROG key to return to the previous display.
Changing the Display Language

Holding down the PROG key at power-up takes you immediately to the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE parameter in the MENUS menu at level 1.
Refer to “Selecting the Display Language”, page 5-12 for information on selecting a language.
The selected view level (when previously powered-down) determines how you will exit the
parameter:
• Operator: releases you into the OPERATOR menu at level 1
• Basic: releases you into the MENUS menu at level 1
• Advanced: releases you into the MENUS menu at level 1
Quick Drive Copy

With an application stored in the Operator Station (refer
to “Copying an Application”, page 5-14), holding the
down (∇) key at power-up takes you immediately to the ALL
1 PARAMETERS
1
ALL PARAMETERS display in the LOAD FROM OP ÙP` FOR ACTION
menu at level 2. The Advanced view mode is
HEALTH LOCAL
automatically selected. SEQ REF
Note: Pressing the up (∆) key, as instructed, copies all

parameter settings including motor specific data from the Operator Station to the
Inverter.
The Operator Station will still contain the application data, allowing transfer to successive units.
This information is replaced by any subsequent SAVE T O OP operation.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Changing the Product Code
On rare occasions it may be necessary to change the default settings by changing the Product
Code. The Product Code is referred to in Chapter 2. You can select a different Language field
(and associated frequency) for the Inverter; other information is automatically read from the
power board.
A special key combination is required to change the product code. This feature is only available
at power-up as a security measure.
• Hold down the ∆, E and PROG keys, then power-up the Inverter
An alert message may be displayed, “ALERT CONFIG MODE”. This is warning you that you
have initialised the Operator Station into the configuration mode and therefore parameters
can be changed.
• Use the up (∆) and down (∇) keys to select a default language and frequency
• Hold down the E key to exit

The new settings will be saved automatically. The next time the defaults are restored, or a
different macro is loaded, the language/frequency parameters will be set to match the entered
Product Code.
Note: Holding down the ∆, E and PROG keys whilst displaying the Welcome screen will also
display the product code, but you will be unable to change the parameter. To go to the
Welcome screen, press the PROG key until you enter the OPERATOR menu, then press the
E key until the Welcome screen is displayed.
Quick Restore Default

A special key combination restores to the Inverter the current product code default values and
Macro 1 parameter values. This feature is only available at power-up as a security measure.
• Hold down the up (∆) and down (∇) and keys, then power-up the Inverter.
Quick Enter Configuration Mode

If you hold down the STOP key during power-up, the drive enters the Configuration mode (for
modifying the links in the function block diagram). This is indicated by all the LEDs flashing.
The Inverter cannot run in this mode.
The main use for this feature is if you write a configuration that starts running the motor every
time the drive is turned on, and you need to interrupt it.
Menu Viewing Levels

For ease of operation, there are three `viewing levels` for the Operator Station. The setting for
the viewing level decides how much of the menu system will be displayed.
The choice of menu for each has been designed around a type of user, hence we have the
Operator, Basic and Advanced viewing levels.
Note: The contents of the OPERATOR menu remains unchanged for all view levels.
Refer to “The Menu System Map”, page 5-5 to see how the viewing level changes the displayed
menu.
To change the viewing level, go to MENUS menu at level 1. The first parameter in this menu,
VIEW LEVEL, selects the viewing level.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Startup Screen Timeouts
Another action of selecting different viewing levels is to introduce a timeout to the Startup
screen. By default, the Startup screen is the SETPOINT parameter, but you can select any
parameter to be the Startup screen.
Operator viewing level

The Startup screen will be displayed after an extended period without a key press when
viewing the Welcome screen or the VIEW LEVEL parameter in the MENUS menu at
level 1.
Basic viewing level

There is no timeout
Advanced viewing level

There is no timeout
Selecting the Display Language

There is an option to select a different display language without changing the product code
information.
The choice of display language is selected by the LANGUAGE parameter in MENUS menu at
level 1. Although the display language will change, the unit will still be operating with the
existing product code information. Remember to use the SAVE TO MEMORY parameter if you
need the new language to be saved on power-down.
The available languages are: ENGLISH, FRENCH, GERMAN, SPANISH.
Control Key Enable/Disable

The ENABLED KEYS parameter, in the OP STATION menu at level 4, allows you to enable
and disable the control keys on the front of the Operator Station.This may be very important in
situations where say, changing the direction of the Inverter could have disastrous results.
Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your Application “ - OP STATION.
Password Protection
When in force, the password prevents unauthorised parameter modification by making all
parameters “read-only”. If you attempt to modify a password protected parameter, it will cause
an ‘alert/reason’ message to be displayed. By default, the password feature is disabled, i.e. 0000.
There are two password parameters, stored in the PASSWORD menu at level 1:
ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD.
The ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD values are hidden by “XXXX” until
you press the M key to begin editing the parameter.
To Activate Password Protection
1. Use the ∆ and ∇ keys in the CHANGE PASSWORD CHANGE

1 PASSWORD
parameter to set a password (anything other than 1
0000
0000). Press the E key to exit the parameter.
HEALTH LOCAL
SEQ REF
1. Move to the ENTER PASSWORD parameter. Enter

any number other than the password and press the E
key to exit. The system is now `password locked’. ENTER
1 PASSWORD
1
0000
Having activated the password protection, you can no HEALTH LOCAL
longer edit the CHANGE PASSWORD parameter until SEQ REF
you deactivate the password protection.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

To Deactivate Password Protection
Enter the current password in the ENTER PASSWORD
parameter. Press the E key to exit.
ENTER
1 PASSWORD
Note: You can also choose to have the password protect the 0000
1
entire OPERATOR menu, or just the SETPOINT
(LOCAL) parameter. Under default conditions these HEALTH
SEQ
LOCAL
REF
are not protected. Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming
Your Application” - PASSWORD.
Selecting Parameters for the Operator Menu

The diagram below shows the default view of this menu.
OPERATOR
SETPOINT (REMOTE)
menu at level 1
SPEED DEMAND
DRIVE FREQUENCY
MOTOR CURRENT
LOAD
DC LINK VOLTS
CURRENT LIMITING
ENTER PASSWORD
The selected “view level” has no effect on this menu, it is always available.
The default setting for the OPERATOR menu is to display 8 parameters, however it actually
contains 16 parameters. Except for parameter No. 1 which is fixed as the SETPOINT parameter
and the last parameter which is always ENTER PASSWORD, the remaining 14 parameters can
be changed to display any diagnostic or configurable parameter, (also refer to “Creating Custom
Screens” below).
1. Select the OPERATOR MENU menu at level 4. To
view this menu the Operator Station must have
ADVANCED view level selected. OPERATOR
1 MENU 2
1
= 115
2. Press the M key to reveal the STARTUP SCREEN
parameter (this is described below). HEALTH
SEQ
LOCAL
REF
Press the down (∇) arrow to display the

OPERATOR MENU 2 parameter. You select a
parameter for display by entering its tag number
into one of the OPERATOR MENU parameters; OPERATOR
1 MENU 16
press the M key and use the up (∆) and down (∇) 1
= 0
keys to set the tag number. Press the E key to exit
HEALTH LOCAL
the parameter. SEQ REF
For more details on customising this menu to your application refer to Chapter 6: “Programming
Your Application” - OPERATOR MENU.
Selecting a Startup Screen

The STARTUP SCREEN parameter selects which of the
OPERATOR MENU parameters will be used as the
Startup screen. Press the M key and use the up (∆) and STARTUP
1 SCREEN
down (∇) keys to set the screen number. Press the E key 1
1
to exit the parameter. The example shown has
OPERATOR MENU 1 selected (this is the “fixed” HEALTH
SEQ
LOCAL
REF
OPERATOR MENU parameter that always displays the
SETPOINT parameter). Setting the STARTUP SCREEN to an OPERATOR MENU parameter
whose tag number is set to zero will cause the STARTUP SCREEN to revert to OPERATOR
MENU 1.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Customising the Welcome Screen
You can edit the top line of the start-up screen to display
a useful and/or personalised message.
1 PUMP 2
1. Select the OP STATION menu at level 4. To view 1
this menu the Operator Station must have 0.75kW 230V 2.x
ADVANCED view level selected. HEALTH LOCAL
SEQ REF
2. Use the up (∆) and down (∇) keys to scroll through
the character set for each of the 16 character spaces. Press the M key to move to the next
character. Press the E key to exit the parameter.
Creating Custom Screens

You can create two “custom screens”, which can be very
useful when added to the OPERATOR menu.
WHISKY
1 PUMPED
Each screen contains: 1
• a top line of sixteen characters 103.0 l/s
• user-definable units HEALTH LOCAL
• user-selectable scaling factor SEQ REF
• user-selectable limits
• user-selectable coefficients
This feature may be used to re-display the setpoint, for example, in more convenient units. Refer
to Chapter 6: “Programming Your Application” - CUSTOM SCREEN.
How to Save, Restore and Copy your Settings

Saving Your Application
The PARAMETER SAVE menu at level 1, only available in the Basic and Advanced view
levels, provides two save options:
1. SAVE TO MEMORY menu at level 2: saves to non-volatile memory within the Inverter
2. SAVE TO OP menu at level 2: saves to the Operator Station
Note: The SAVE TO OP function produces a copy of the Inverter’s setup, including all user
options and the current password, refer to “Copying an Application” below.
Restoring Saved Settings

If you are unsure about any changes you have made,
you can re-load the last saved setup from memory. LOAD
1 FROM MEMORY
1
Enter the LOAD FROM MEMORY menu at level 2 to menu at level 2
display the ÙP` FOR ACTION page.
HEALTH LOCAL
SEQ REF
Note: Pressing the ∆ key, as instructed, restores to the Inverter the last saved parameter
settings.
Copying an Application
The Operator Station is a programming tool for writing to the Inverter, where the information is
stored. But the Operator Station itself can also be used to store this data.
Transferring Your Application to Another Inverter

Note: The Inverter you are copying to must have the same (or a newer software) release. Refer
to the Welcome screen (power-up).
1. Write the application to the Operator Station via the SAVE TO OP menu at level 2. To
view the SAVE TO OP menu the Operator Station must have Basic or Advanced view level
selected.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

2. Connect the Operator Station to the receiving Inverter.
3. Select Advanced view level, if necessary. Transfer the data via the LOAD FROM OP menu
at level 2. Two sub-menus allow you to choose between loading a full parameter load
which includes motor-specific data, or just the application without any motor-specific data:
ALL PARAMETERS
APPLICATION ONLY
Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your Application” - Motor-Specific Parameters.
Note: Both methods will transfer the password of the host unit. Refer to “Password Protection” ,
page 5-12.
The Operator Station still has the application data stored allowing transfer to successive units.
This information is replaced by any subsequent SAVE TO OP operation.
Backing-up Your Application

The Operator Station can be used to back-up the application data stored in the Inverter as a
safety measure. Refer to “Transferring Your Application to Another Inverter” above.
You can have the Operator Station back-up the application each time a SAVE TO MEMORY is
performed by enabling the AUTO BACKUP parameter. Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming
Your Application” - OP STATION.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Programming Your Application 6-1

PROGRAMMING YOUR APPLICATION
6
Introducing the Macro

You can program the Inverter for specific applications.
The Inverter is supplied with macros (set-ups) which can be used as starting points for
application-specific programming. This programming could simply involve the inputting of
parameter values, or it may require the making or breaking of programmable links, which is a
feature of this unit.
Each macro instantly recalls a pre-programmed set of default parameters when it is loaded.
Refer to Chapter 15: “Application Macros” for further information.
Programming with Block Diagrams

Block diagram programming provides a visual method of planning the software to suit your
application. There are ten block diagrams provided at the end of this chapter, each showing the
software connections for an application macro.
The processes performed by a macro are represented as a block diagram, consisting of function
blocks and links:
• Each function block contains the parameters required for setting-up a particular processing
feature. Sometimes more than one function block is provided for a feature, i.e. for multiple
digital inputs.
• Software links are used to connect the function blocks. Each link transfers the value of an
output parameter to an input parameter of another (or the same) function block.
Each individual block is a processing feature, i.e. it takes the input parameter, processes the
information, and makes the result available as one or more output parameters.
Modifying a Block Diagram

Configuration and Parameterisation Modes
There are two modes of operation used while modifying a block diagram:
Parameterisation and Configuration modes.
The ENABLE CONFIG and DISABLE CONFIG commands, found under SYSTEM menu at
level 1, is used to toggle between these two modes of operation.
Parameterisation Mode
In parameterisation mode you can change parameter values. The Inverter can be
DEFAULT running or stopped. Note that some parameters can only be changed when the Inverter
is stopped. It is not possible to modify the internal links when the Inverter is in
parameterisation mode.
Configuration Mode
In the configuration mode you can modify the links in the function block diagram. You
can also change parameter values, as above. This mode is indicated by all the LEDs on
the operator station flashing at once. The Inverter cannot run in this mode.
Making and Breaking Links in Configuration Mode

Links can be moved, added or deleted from a block diagram whilst in the Configuration mode.
There are 50 links available, each has its own identification number (“link” number). You make
a link by setting the link’s “source” and “destination” tags to be the two parameter tag numbers
to be linked. The outputs of function blocks are not updated whilst in this mode.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
6-2 Programming Your Application

Programming Rules
The following rules apply when programming:
Parameterisation Mode
• Function block output parameter values cannot be changed (because they are a result of the
function block’s processing)
• Function block input parameter values that receive their values from a link cannot be
changed (as they will change back to the value they receive from the link when the Inverter
is running).
Configuration Mode
• A link’s destination tag must be set to an
input parameter (only one link per input Feedback Link
parameter). BLOCK
• A link’s source tag may be set to any

BLOCK
parameter. Both input and output
parameters can be used as a source.
• Disable a link by setting the “destination” BLOCK 18
and “source” tag to zero.
[99]
• Setting a link’s source tag to a negative -18
value (i.e. 18 becomes -18) nominates it
as a feedback link, forcing this link to be Figure 6-1 Quick Link Information:
executed first. This is used to reduce -18 .. (-) → [99]
execution timing delays in a feedback
loop situation.
Execution Rules
The complete block diagram is executed every 20ms, with individual control blocks executing
within 2ms. Just before a function block is executed, all the links that have that block as their
destination are executed, thereby copying new values in to the block’s parameter inputs. The
input parameters are then processed to produce a new set of output parameters. The execution
order of the blocks is automatically arranged for minimal delay.
• The output value transferred by a link on execution is clamped to be between the maximum
and minimum value for its destination input parameter.
• If a links’ source and destination parameters have different decimal point positions, there is
no automatic adjustment. Use a VALUE FUNCTION function block to modify the input
into the correct destination format. Refer to the table below for the result of linking
different parameters types.
Source Value Source Destination Destination Value
(the input) Format Format (the result)
100.00 XXX.XX XXXX.X 1000.0

100.00 XXX.XX X.XXXX 1.0000
TRUE Boolean XXX.XX 0.01
FALSE Boolean XXX.XX 0.00
0.01 XXX.XX Boolean TRUE
0.00 XXX.XX Boolean FALSE
LOCAL ONLY (1) Enumerated XXX.XX 0.01
0.02 XXX.XX Enumerated REMOTE ONLY (2)
Note that (2) will not always return
Remote Only
Table 6-1 Execution Rules

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Note: Check the source and destination formats from the Function Block diagrams and/or
Chapter 10: “Parameter Specification Tables” because the Operator Station displays
some parameters with the least significant digit suppressed.
Saving Your Modifications

If parameter values or links have been modified or a macro has been loaded, the new settings
must be saved. The Inverter will then retain the new settings during power-down. Refer to
Chapter 5: “The Operator Station” - Saving Your Application.
Understanding the Function Block Description

The following function Instance Name
Output Parameter
blocks show the parameter Name
information necessary for
programming the Inverter. ANALOG INPUT 1
The diagrams assume that Default Value
VALUE [ 16] – 0.00%
the UK country code is BREAK [ 18] – FALSE
selected and that a 220V 100.00% – [ 14] SCALE –
0.75kW power board is
0.00% – [ 15] OFFSET –
fitted.
0..+10V – [ 13] TYPE – Default Value
Input parameters are shown FALSE – [ 12] BREAK ENABLE –
on the left hand side, and 0.00% – [ 17] BREAK VALUE –
output parameters are shown
on the right hand side of the
block. Input Parameter
Tag Number Name
Figure 6-2 Function Block Parameter Information
Instance Name Names the function block type
Default Value The default value of the unmodified macro, Macro 0
Input/Output The name shown on ConfigEd Lite
Parameter Name
Tag Number Unique identification used for linking and communications
* Parameters marked with “*” are set to a value depending on the Language
portion of the product code. Refer to Chapter 2: “Understanding the
Product Code” and Chapter 10: “Product-Related Default Values”.
** Parameters marked with “**” are set to a value depending on the overall
“power build “ of the Inverter indicated by the product code. Refer to
Chapter 2: “Understanding the Product Code” and Chapter 10: “Product-
Related Default Values”.
Note: Decimal Places (dp) - some internally-held parameters with two decimal places are only
displayed with one decimal place. These parameters are indicated in the Parameter
Descriptions tables. The Range parameter shows the hidden character as “h”, i.e. (h).
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
MMI Menu Maps
The function block descriptions include an easy-find menu showing the menu levels and titles
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS encountered to find the appropriate menu title, and the parameters contained in the menu(s).
3 INPUTS & OUTPUTS The menu maps are shown as if the Advanced view level is selected.
4 ANALOG INPUT Where there is more than one sub-menu, i.e. ANALOG INPUT as illustrated, the parameters
shown will be for the last sub-menu. In many cases, these parameters will reflect the name and
4 ANALOG INPUT 1 number of the last sub-menu.
4 ANALOG INPUT 2 Because of this intuitive naming of parameters, which is designed to make using the Operator
AIN 2 SCALE Station easier, MMI parameter names may vary slightly from Function Block names.
AIN 2 OFFSET
AIN 2 TYPE
AIN 2 BREAK ENBL
AIN 2 BREAK VAL
AIN 2 VALUE
AIN 2 BREAK

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Hexadecimal Representation of Trips
The ACTIVE TRIPS, WARNINGS, DISABLED TRIPS, TRIGGERS 1 and TRIGGERS 2
parameters use a four digit hexadecimal number to identify individual trips. Each trip has a
unique corresponding number as shown below.
Trip Trip Code
Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1
0 NO TRIP
1 LINK OVERVOLTS 1
2 LINK UNDERVOLT 2
3 OVERCURRENT 4
4 HEATSINK TEMP 8
5 EXTERNAL TRIP 1
6 INPUT 1 BREAK 2
7 INPUT 2 BREAK 4
8 MOTOR STALLED 8
9 I*T TRIP 1
10 BRAKE RESISTOR 2
11 BRAKE SWITCH 4
12 OP STATION 8
13 LOST COMMS 1
14 Not used 2
15 Not used 4
16 Not used 8
When more than one trip is to be represented at the same time then the trip codes are simply
added together to form the value displayed. Within each digit, values between 10 and 15 are
displayed as letters A to F
Decimal number Display For example, if the ACTIVE TRIPS parameter is 01A8
10 A then this represents a “1” in digit 3, an “8” and a “2” in
11 B digit 2, (8+2 = 10, displayed as A), and an “8” in digit 1.
12 C This in turn represents the active trips I*T TRIP,
13 D MOTOR STALLED, INPUT 1 BREAK and
14 E HEATSINK TEMP, (an unlikely situation).
15 F

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Function Block Descriptions
The following function block descriptions are arranged in alphabetical order. They each appear
as a Menu in the FUNCTION BLOCKS menu at level 2.
Note: Remember to select the correct mode, Parameterisation or Configuration, whilst editing.
Refer back to “Modifying a Block Diagram”, page 6-1. You must select the Advanced
view level to see the FUNCTION BLOCKS menu at level 2, to do this go to MENUS menu
at level 1.
Contents List
Function Block Page Function Block Page
ANALOG DIGIN 6-6 OPERATOR MENU 6-42

ANALOG INPUT 6-8 OP STATION 6-43
ANALOG OUTPUT 6-10 PASSWORD 6-45
AUTO RESTART 6-12 PATTERN GEN 6-46

AUTOTUNE 6-14 PID 6-47
BRAKE CONTROL 6-15 PRESET 6-49
COMMS CONTROL 6-16 RAISE/LOWER 6-51
CURRENT FEEDBACK 6-17 REFERENCE 6-52

CURRENT LIMIT 6-19 SEQUENCING LOGIC 6-54
CUSTOM SCREEN 6-20 SETPOINT SCALE 6-56
DEMULTIPLEXER 6-22 SKIP FREQUENCIES 6-57

DIGITAL INPUT 6-23 SLEW RATE LIMIT 6-59
DIGITAL OUTPUT 6-24 SLIP COMP 6-60
DYNAMIC BRAKING 6-25 STABILISATION 6-61

ENCODER 6-26 STALL TRIP 6-62
FLUXING 6-27 STOP 6-63

FLYCATCHING 6-29 SYSTEM PORT (P3) 6-64
I/O TRIPS 6-31 SYSTEM RAMP 6-65
I*t TRIP 6-32 TEC OPTION 6-67
INJ BRAKING 6-33 TRIPS HISTORY 6-68
JOG 6-34 TRIPS STATUS 6-69

LOCAL CONTROL 6-35 UNDERLAP COMP 6-71
LOGIC FUNCTION 6-36 VALUE FUNCTION 6-72

MINIMUM SPEED 6-40 VECTOR FLUXING 6-79
MULTIPLEXER 6-41 VOLTAGE CONTROL 6-80
ZERO SPEED 6-81

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

ANALOG DIGIN
MMI Menu Map The analog digital input block allows the analog input terminals to be used as digital input
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
signals.
ANALOG DIGIN 1 ANALOG DIGIN 2
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
VALUE [ 90] – FALSE VALUE [95] – FALSE
3 INPUTS & OUTPUTS FALSE – [ 89] INVERT – FALSE – [94] INVERT –
30.00 % – [ 91] LEVEL – 30.00 % – [96] LEVEL –
4 ANALOG DIGIN
5.00 % – [ 92] HYSTERISIS – 5.00 % – [97] HYSTERISIS –
5 ANALOG DIGIN 1
5 ANALOG DIGIN 2
A DIN 2 INVERT Parameter Descriptions

A DIN 2 LEVEL
A DIN 2 HYST INVERT Range: FALSE / TRUE
A DIN 2 VALUE
When this is TRUE, the VALUE output is inverted.
LEVEL Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
This is the level used to determine whether the input is high or low. The actual level also
depends on the hardware range selected.
HYSTERISIS Range: 0.00 to 50.00 %
A hysteresis value used to prevent jitter on the input. The actual hysteresis also depends on the
hardware range selected.
VALUE Range:FALSE / TRUE
A TRUE or FALSE output depending on the input volts or current.
Functional Description
The Inverter has two analog inputs. There is a digital analog input function block for each:
ANALOG DIGIN 1 is associated with the signal on terminal 2, whilst ANALOG DIGIN 2 is
associated with the signal on terminal 4.
The analog digital input function blocks allow the analog terminals to be used as digital inputs
where extra digital inputs are required. The input voltage or current is converted to a TRUE or
FALSE digital signal. Generally, (when INVERT is FALSE), an input greater than the
comparison LEVEL will cause the output VALUE to be TRUE. Similarly, an input less than the
comparison LEVEL will cause the output VALUE to be FALSE.
+10V 100%
raw input
LEVEL 30%
-10V 0%
TRUE 1 (TRUE)
VALUE
FALSE 0 (FALSE)

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

HYSTERISIS is used to make the function block resistant to noise on the input. It operates so
that if the last non-inverted output was TRUE then the comparison level used is LEVEL -
HYSTERISIS. If the last non-inverted output was FALSE then the comparison level used is
LEVEL + HYSTERISIS.
HYSTERISIS INVERT
LEVEL
VALUE
RAW INPUT
The input voltage or current is converted to an equivalent percentage by the Inverter's analog
input electronics. The percentage generated by a given input voltage depends on the hardware
range selected, as shown in the table below. The hardware range is selected using switch bank
SW1 on the control PCB, as described under the ANALOG INPUT function block.
Nominal Hardware Range Hardware Input Equivalent % Suggested Level

0 to 20mA 0mA 0% 22%
20mA 44%
-10 to 10V -10V 0% 50%
10V 100%
0 to 10V 0V 0% 50%
10V 100%

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

ANALOG INPUT
MMI Menu Map The analog input block converts the input voltage or current into a value expressed as a
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
percentage of a configurable range.
ANALOG INPUT 1 ANALOG INPUT 2
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
VALUE [ 16] – 0.00 % VALUE [ 25] – 0.00 %
3 INPUTS & OUTPUTS BREAK [ 18] – FALSE BREAK [ 27] – FALSE
100.00 % – [ 14] SCALE – 100.00 % – [ 23] SCALE –
4 ANALOG INPUT
0.00 % – [ 15] OFFSET – 0.00 % – [ 24] OFFSET –
5 ANALOG INPUT 1 0..+10 V – [ 13] TYPE – 0..+10 V – [ 22] TYPE –
FALSE – [ 12] BREAK ENABLE – FALSE – [ 21] BREAK ENABLE –
5 ANALOG INPUT 2 0.00 % – [ 17] BREAK VALUE – 0.00 % – [ 26] BREAK VALUE –
AIN 2 SCALE
AIN 2 OFFSET
AIN 2 TYPE
AIN 2 BREAK ENBL
AIN 2 BREAK VAL
Parameter Descriptions
AIN 2 VALUE SCALE Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
AIN 2 BREAK
A scaling factor applied to the raw input. With a scaling factor of 100.00% and an offset of
0.00%, an input equal to the low input range will appear as a value of 0.00%. Similarly, an
input equal to the high input range will appear as a value of 100.00%.
OFFSET Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %

An offset added to the input after the scaling factor has been applied.
TYPE Range: Enumerated - see below

The input range and type. Warning: For correct operation, ensure that the hardware range
selected using switch bank SW1 corresponds to the TYPE selected.
Enumerated Value : Type

0 : 0..+10 V
1 : +2..+10 V
2 : 0..+5 V
3 : +1..+5 V
4 : -10..+10 V
5 : 0..20 mA
6 : 4..20 mA
7 : 20..4 mA
8 : 20..0 mA
BREAK ENABLE Range: FALSE / TRUE

For input types that support sensor break detection, this parameter may be used to disable
sensor break detection. For input types that do not support break detection, this parameter is
FALSE.
BREAK VALUE Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %

The value that will appear as the VALUE output when BREAK is TRUE
VALUE Range: xxx.xx %

The input reading with scaling and offset applied.
BREAK Range: FALSE / TRUE

Indicates that the input sensor signal is not present. See below for more details on break
detection.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

The 605 inverter has two analog inputs. There is an analog input function block for each:
ANALOG INPUT 1 is associated with the signal on terminal 2, ANALOG INPUT 2 is
associated with the signal on terminal 4.
The input voltage is pre-processed and converted into a numeric value by the analog input
electronics of the 605 inverter. The analog input function blocks further process this reading so
that a value of 0.00% represents an input equal to the low input range, while a value of 100.00%
represents an input equal to the high input range. The SCALE and OFFSET factors are then
applied as shown to produce a value suitable for use in the application.
The break detect facility may only be used in conjunction with the following hardware ranges:
2 to 10V, 1 to 5V, 4 to 20mA and 20 to 4mA. An input break is defined as an input reading less
than either 0.1V or 0.45mA. When an input break has been detected, the VALUE output is
forced to be the BREAK VALUE .
TYPE SCALING OFFSET
UNPROCESSED
INPUT X +
BREAK VALUE VALUE
BREAK
INPUT LOSS LEVEL
BREAK ENABLE
Configuration Switch Settings (SW1)

The analog input terminals are configured for voltage or current operation by the I/O
configuration switch settings. Remember to select the appropriate TYPE parameter.
OFF ON
Input Type Switch Settings 1
ANALOG 0-20 or 4-20mA SW1/1 OFF, SW1/2 ON
2
INPUT 1 SW1
3
Terminal 2 0-10V* SW1/1 OFF, SW1/2 OFF*
4
± 10V SW1/1 ON, SW1/2 OFF
OFF ON
ANALOG 0-20 or 4-20mA SW1/3 OFF, SW1/4 ON 1
INPUT 2
2
Terminal 4 0-10V* SW1/3 OFF, SW1/4 OFF* SW2
3
± 10V SW1/3 ON, SW1/4 OFF
4
* Default settings, as shown
Table 6-2 Select Input Signal
Figure 6-3 I/O Configuration

Switches shown at
Manufacturing Defaults

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

ANALOG OUTPUT
MMI Menu Map The analog output block converts the ANALOG OUTPUT 1
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
demand percentage into a form suitable for 0.00 % – [ 45] VALUE –
driving the analog output electronics of the 100.00 % – [ 46] SCALE –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS 605 inverter. 0.00 % – [ 47] OFFSET –
3 INPUTS & OUTPUTS TRUE – [ 48] ABS –

0..+10 V – [ 49] TYPE –
4 ANALOG OUTPUT
5 ANALOG OUTPUT 1
AOUT 1 VALUE Parameter Descriptions
AOUT 1 SCALE
AOUT 1 OFFSET
VALUE Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
AOUT 1 ABS The demanded value to output.
AOUT 1 TYPE
SCALE Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
A scaling factor to apply to VALUE . A scaling factor of 100.00% has no effect.
OFFSET Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
An offset added to VALUE after the scaling factor has been applied. An offset factor of 0.00%
has no effect.
ABS Range: FALSE / TRUE
When true the output sign is ignored.
TYPE Range: Enumerated - see
below
The output hardware type, either Volts or Amps.
WARNING: For correct operation, ensure that the hardware range selected using switch bank
SW2 corresponds to the TYPE selected. The values that this parameter may take are:
0 : 0..+10 V
1 : 0..20 mA
2 : 4..20 mA
See below for how to set the I/O configuration switches.
The ANALOG OUTPUT function block is associated with the analog output of the 605
(terminal 5).
The scaling and offset parameters are applied to the demand value as shown.
If ABS is TRUE then the final output is the magnitude of value after being scaled and offset.
If ABS is FALSE then the final output will be limited at 0% of the output hardware range.
With scale and offset applied, a value of 0.00 causes the output to be equal to the low hardware
range, (i.e. 0V on the 0 to 10V range), a value of 100.00% causes the output to be equal to the
high hardware range, (i.e. 10V on the 0 to 10V range).
SCALE OFFSET ABS TYPE
VALUE X + OUTPUT

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Configuration Switch Settings (SW2)
The analog output terminals are configured for voltage or current operation by the I/O
configuration switch settings. Remember to select the appropriate TYPE parameter.
OFF ON
1
Input Type Switch Settings
2
ANALOG 0-20 or 4-20mA SW2/1 OFF, SW2/2 OFF SW1
3
OUTPUT 1
4
Terminal 5 0-10V* SW2/1 ON, SW2/2 ON*
OFF ON
* Default settings, as shown 1
2
Table 6-3 Select Input Signal SW2
3
Figure 6-4 I/O Configuration Switches

shown at Manufacturing defaults

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

AUTO RESTART
MMI Menu Map Auto Restart (or Auto Reset) provides the AUTO RESTART
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
facility to automatically reset a choice of PENDING [608] – FALSE
trip events and restart the drive with a RESTARTING [616] – FALSE
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS programmed number of attempts, after ATTEMPTS LEFT [614] – 5
which, a manual or remote trip reset is TIME LEFT [615] – 10.0 s
3 SEQ & REF
required if the drive is not successfully
FALSE – [611] ENABLE –
4 AUTO RESTART restarted. The number of attempted restarts
5 – [612] ATTEMPTS –
are recorded. This count is cleared after a
AR ENABLE 10.0 s – [610] INITIAL DELAY 1 –
trip-free period of operation
AR ATTEMPTS 10.0 s – [613] ATTEMPT DELAY 1 –
(5 minutes or 4 x ATTEMPT DELAY 1 ,
AR INITIAL DLY 1 0000 – [609] TRIGGERS 1 –
AR ATTEMPT DLY 1
whichever is the longer), or after a
0.1 s – [678] INITIAL DELAY 2 –
AR TRIGGERS 1
successful manual or remote trip reset. This
function is inhibited in Remote Sequencing 0.1 s – [679] ATTEMPT DELAY 2 –
AR INITIAL DLY 2
Comms mode. 0000 – [677] TRIGGERS 2 –
AR ATTEMPT DLY 2
AR TRIGGERS 2
AR PENDING
AR RESTARTING
AR ATTEMPTS
LEFT Parameter Descriptions
AR TIME LEFT ENABLE Range: FALSE / TRUE
Enables operation of the auto restart feature.
ATTEMPTS Range: 1 to 10
Determines the number of restarts that will be permitted before requiring an external fault
reset.
INITIAL DELAY 1 Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
Determines the delay for the first restart attempt when the trip is included in TRIGGERS 1 .
The delay is measured from all error conditions clearing.
ATTEMPT DELAY 1 Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
Determines the delay between restart attempts for a trip included in TRIGGERS 1 . The delay
is measured from all error conditions clearing.
TRIGGERS 1 Range: 0000 to FFFF
Allows Auto Restart to be enabled for a selection of trip conditions.
Refer to “Hexadecimal Representation of Trips” at the beginning of this chapter for an
explanation of the four-digit code.
INITIAL DELAY 2 Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
Determines the delay for the first restart attempt when the trip is included in TRIGGERS 2
The delay is measured from all error conditions clearing.
ATTEMPT DELAY 2 Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
Determines the delay between restart attempts for a trip included in TRIGGERS 2 . The delay
is measured from all error conditions clearing.
TRIGGERS 2 Range: Word
Allows Auto Restart to be enabled for a selection of trip conditions.
If a trip is included in both TRIGGERS 1 and TRIGGERS 2, then the times associated with
TRIGGERS 1 will take priority.
Refer to “Hexadecimal Representation of Trips” at the beginning of this chapter for an
explanation of the four-digit code.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

PENDING Range: FALSE / TRUE
Indicates that an auto restart will occur after the programmed delay.
RESTARTING Range: FALSE / TRUE
Indicates that an auto restart is occuring.
ATTEMPTS LEFT Range: xxxxx

Indicates the number of attempts left before an external fault reset is required.
TIME LEFT Range: xxxx.x s
When in the timing sub-state, this parameter indicates the time left before an auto restart
attempt will be permitted. When non-zero, this value is unaffected by changes to ATTEMPT
DELAY 1.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

AUTOTUNE
MMI Menu Map This is an automated sequence by which the AUTOTUNE
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Inverter can identify the motor parameters ACTIVE [604] –FALSE
necessary for correct operation in the FALSE – [603] ENABLE –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS Sensorless Vector Fluxing mode. CALC NO LOAD I – [689] MODE –
3 MOTOR CONTROL Refer to Chapter 4: “Operating the

Inverter” - Set-up using the Sensorless
4 AUTOTUNE Vector Fluxing Mode.
AUTOTUNE ENABLE
AUTOTUNE MODE
AUTOTUNE ACTIVE Parameter Descriptions
ENABLE Range: FALSE / TRUE
Determines whether the Autotune sequence is operational or not. The Autotune sequence is
operational when set to TRUE.
MODE Range: Enumerated - see below
If set to USER NO LOAD I, the known value (NO LOAD CALIB) is used from the
CURRENT FEEDBACK block. If set to CALC NO LOAD I, this block will calculate a value
for NO LOAD CALIB and update it in the CURRENT FEEDBACK block.
Enumerated Value : Mode
0 : USER NO LOAD I
1 : CALC NO LOAD I
ACTIVE Range: FALSE / TRUE

This indicates the current state of the Autotune sequence. The Autotune sequence is
operational when displaying TRUE.
The Autotune sequence takes a maximum of 10 seconds to indentify four cirtical parameters:
1. No-load rms line current
2. Per-phase stator resistance
3. Per-phase leakage inductance
4. Per-phase mutual inductance
The value of 1 above is stored in the CURRENT FEEDBACK block. The values for 2, 3 & 4
are stored in the VECTOR FLUXING block. Autotune will overwrite any previous entry made
for these parameters.
Autotune can only be initiated from the “stopped” condition. The function block cannot be
changed whilst the drive is running. When the test is complete, the stack is disabled and the
motor left to coast.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

BRAKE CONTROL
MMI Menu Map This is used to control electro-mechanical BRAKE CONTROL
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
motor brakes in hoist and lift applications. RELEASE [587] – FALSE
HOLD [590] – FALSE
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
50.00 % – [584] ON LOAD –
3 SETPOINT FUNCS 5.0 Hz – [585] ON FREQUENCY –

3.0 Hz – [586] OFF FREQUENCY –
4 BRAKE CONTROL 0.00 s – [588] ON HOLD TIME –
BRAKE ON LOAD 0.00 s – [589] OFF HOLD TIME –
BRAKE ON FREQ
BRAKE OFF FREQ
BRAKE ON HOLD Parameter Descriptions
BRAKE OFF HOLD
BRAKE RELEASE
ON LOAD Range: 0.00 to 150.00 %
BRAKE HOLD Load level at which the external motor brake is applied.
ON FREQUENCY Range: 0.0 to 480.0 Hz
Frequency at which the external motor brake is applied.
OFF FREQUENCY Range: 0.0 to 480.0 Hz
Frequency at which the external motor brake is released.
ON HOLD TIME Range: 0.00 to 60.00 s
Sets the duration of the pulse output on HOLD when RELEASE becomes TRUE.
OFF HOLD TIME Range: 0.00 to 60.00 s
Sets the duration of the pulse output on HOLD when RELEASE becomes FALSE.
RELEASE Range: FALSE / TRUE
Boolean output providing a signal to operate the brake delay
HOLD Range: FALSE / TRUE
Becomes TRUE when the brake is toggled On or Off by the function block, and remains
TRUE for the duration set by OFF HOLD TIME or ON HOLD TIME.
frequency
ON FREQUENCY
OFF FREQUENCY
time
load
ON LOAD
time
RELEASE time
HOLD time
t = ON HOLD TIME t = OFF HOLD TIME

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

COMMS CONTROL
MMI Menu Map This block switches between Remote COMMS CONTROL
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Terminal and Remote Comms COMMS SEQ [295] – FALSE
operating modes. COMMS REF [270] – FALSE
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS COMMS STATUS [272] – 0000
The inverter must be in Remote
COMMS COMMAND [273] – 0000
3 SERIAL LINKS mode for selection to be made -
REMOTE mode is enabled in the FALSE – [300] REMOTE COMMS SEL –
4 COMMS CONTROL LOCAL CONTROL function block TERMINALS/COMMS – [307] REMOTE SEQ MODES –
REMOTE COMMS SEL and selected by the Operator Station. TERMINALS/COMMS – [308] REMOTE REF MODES –
REMOTE SEQ MODES Refer to the outputs of the LOCAL 0.0 s – [309] COMMS TIMEOUT –
REMOTE REF MODES CONTROL function block for the
COMMS TIMEOUT mode in use.
COMMS STATUS
COMMS COMMAND
COMMS SEQ
COMMS REF Parameter Descriptions
REMOTE COMMS SEL Range: FALSE / TRUE
Selects the type of remote communications mode:
0 : FALSE, and in REMOTE mode then control is from the terminals.
1 : TRUE, and in REMOTE mode then control is from the communications.
REMOTE SEQ MODES Range: Enumerated - see below
Selects the type of remote sequencing mode:
0 : TERMINALS/COMMS
1 : TERMINALS ONLY
2 : COMMS ONLY
REMOTE REF MODES Range: Enumerated - see below
Selects the type of remote reference mode:
0 : TERMINALS/COMMS
1 : TERMINALS ONLY
2 : COMMS ONLY
COMMS TIMEOUT Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
Sets the maximum time allowed between refreshing the COMMS COMMAND parameter. The
drive will trip if this time is exceeded. Set the time to 0.00 secs to disable this feature.
COMMS STATUS Range: 0000 to FFFF
Diagnostic showing the 16-bit Status word as seen by the communications.
Refer to Chapter 9: Sequencing Logic.
COMMS COMMAND Range: 0000 to FFFF
Diagnostic showing the 16-bit Command as written by the communications.
Refer to Chapter 9: Sequencing Logic.
COMMS SEQ Range: FALSE / TRUE
Diagnostic indicating if operating in Remote Sequencing Comms Mode
COMMS REF Range: FALSE / TRUE
Diagnostic indicating if operating in Remote Reference Comms Mode.
If FALSE (0), the inverter may be in Local Reference mode or Remote Reference Terminal
mode.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

CURRENT FEEDBACK
MMI Menu Map This function block allows the user to CURRENT FEEDBACK
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
match the inverter’s current rating to the MOTOR CURRENT [ 66] – 0.00 %
motor under control. The inverter needs to MOTOR CURRENT [ 67] – 0.0 A
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS be programmed with the motor full-load I MAGNETISING [ 68] – 0.00 %
and no-load (magnetising) rms line I MAGNETISING [ 69] – 0.0 A
3 MOTOR CONTROL
current values.
I TORQUE [ 70] – 0.00 %
4 CURRENT FEEDBACK From this information, magnetising (flux I TORQUE [ 71] – 0.0 A
FULL LOAD CALIB producing) and torque producing motor LOAD [ 72] – 0.00 %
NO LOAD CALIB current diagnostics can be generated. FIELD [ 73] – 0.00 %
POWER FACTOR **3.4 A – [ 64] FULL LOAD CALIB –
MOTOR CURRENT
**1.9 A – [ 65] NO LOAD CALIB –
MOTOR CURRENT
0.80 – [242] POWER FACTOR –
I MAGNETISING
I MAGNETISING
I TORQUE
I TORQUE
LOAD
FIELD
FULL LOAD CALIB Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 A
Set this to the motor nameplate full-load rms line current. The parameter is internally clamped
within the range of 25% to 100% of the inverter current rating.
NO LOAD CALIB Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 A
Set this to the motor no-load rms line current. This is normally between 30% to 40% of the
motor nameplate full-load rms line current. However for small motors this proportion can be
much higher. If in doubt, this information can be obtained from the motor manufacturer.
Alternatively, the parameter should be set to rms line current drawn from the Inverter when
running the motor under no-load at base frequency.
The value of NO LOAD CALIB is internally clamped in the inverter to be within 10% to 90%
of the FULL LOAD CALIB setting.
POWER FACTOR Range: 0.50 to 0.95
Set this to the motor power factor rating given on the nameplate.
MOTOR CURRENT Range: xxx.xh % (h)
This diagnostic contains the level of rms line current being drawn from the inverter and is seen
as a % of the FULL LOAD CALIB setting.
MOTOR CURRENT Range: xxxx.x A
This diagnostic contains the level of rms line current being drawn from the Inverter.
I MAGNETISING Range: xxx.xh % (h)
This diagnostic contains the level of magnetising (flux producing) rms line current component
being drawn from the inverter and is seen as a % of the FULL LOAD CALIB setting.
I MAGNETISING Range: xxxx.x A
This diagnostic contains the level of magnetising (flux producing) rms line current component
being drawn from the Inverter.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
I TORQUE Range: xxx.xh % (h)

This diagnostic contains the level of torque producing rms line current component being drawn
from the inverter and is seen as a % of the FULL LOAD CALIB setting.
I TORQUE Range:xxxx.x A
This diagnostic contains the level of torque producing rms line current component being drawn
from the Inverter.
LOAD Range: xxx.xh % (h)
This diagnostic is a normalised version of the I TORQUE diagnostic. A value of 100%
indicates the motor is operating at rated load (torque).
FIELD Range: xxx.xh % (h)
This diagnostic is a normalised version of the I MAGNETISING diagnostic. A value of 100%
indicates the motor is operating at rated magnetic flux (field).
The current feedback function block processes motor
line current measurements and provides diagnostics of
line current magnitude, torque producing current and
magnetic field producing current components. The line MOTOR CURRENT
current magnitude (the motor current measured using a
current meter) can be considered to be the vector sum of I TORQUE
the field and torque producing current components.
The function block requires appropriate values for full-
load and no-load motor currents to be entered. Once
done, the function block will provide measurements of:-
I MAGNETISING
rms line current:
I MAGNITUDE (MOTOR CURRENT)
rms field current component:
I MAGNETISING
torque current component:
I TORQUE.
These diagnostics are presented in Amps, and as a percentage of the user set motor full-load
current.
In addition, the field current component is re-scaled to provide a FIELD diagnostic. A value of
100.0% in the field diagnostic indicates that the motor is operating at rated flux. The torque
current component is re-scaled to provide a LOAD diagnostic. A value of 100.0% in the load
diagnostic indicates that the motor is operating at rated torque or full load.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

CURRENT LIMIT
MMI Menu Map This function block allows the user to set CURRENT LIMIT
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
the maximum level of line current or motor LIMITING [370] – FALSE
load at which the inverter is intended to 150.00 % – [365] MOTOR I LIMIT –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS operate. If the measured level of current or -150.00 % – [623] REGEN I LIMIT –
load exceeds the MOTOR I LIMIT value, CURRENT – [366] FEEDBACK SOURCE –
3 MOTOR CONTROL
the inverter attempts to shed motoring
TRUE – [686] REGEN LIM ENABLE –
4 CURRENT LIMIT current or load by reducing its output
frequency (reduce motor speed). Under
MOTOR I LIMIT
extreme conditions, the inverter frequency can be reduced to zero.
REGEN I LIMIT
FEEDBACK SOURCE If the measured level of current or load exceeds the REGEN I LIMIT, the inverter attempts to
REGEN LIM ENABLE shed regenerating current or load by increasing its output frequency. Under extreme conditions,
CURRENT LIMITING the inverter frequency can be increased up to the maximum speed setting. You can disable the
action of REGEN I LIMIT.
MOTOR I LIMIT Range: 0.00 to 150.00 %
This parameter sets the level of motor current, as a % of FULL LOAD CALIB (refer to the
CURRENT FEEDBACK function block) at which the inverter begins to reduce the inverter
output frequency.
REGEN I LIMIT Range: -150.00 to 0.00 %
This parameter sets the level of motor current, as a % of FULL LOAD CALIB (refer to the
CURRENT FEEDBACK function block) at which the inverter begins to increase the inverter
output frequency.
FEEDBACK SOURCE Range: Enumerated - see below
This parameter determines the feedback source (measured value) for the current limit. The
feedback source determines the mode of current limit operation.
Enumerated Value : Feedback Source
0 : CURRENT
1 : LOAD
REGEN LIM ENABLE Range: FALSE / TRUE
This parameter enables or disables REGEN I LIMIT.
LIMITING Range: FALSE / TRUE
This diagnostic indicates whether the current limit is active (altering inverter output frequency)
or inactive.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

CUSTOM SCREEN
MMI Menu Map This function block provides two custom screens for displaying any parameter. It allows you to
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
enter any 16 character name for the parameter and to display and enter in a convenient and
recognisable form.
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
CUSTOM SCREEN 1 CUSTOM SCREEN 2
3 MENUS 0 – [ 74] TAG NO – 0 – [371] TAG NO –
– [324] NAME – – [378] NAME –
4 CUSTOM SCREEN 1
– [323] UNITS – – [377] UNITS –
4 CUSTOM SCREEN 2 XXXXX. – [334] DECIMAL PLACE – XXXXX. – [379] DECIMAL PLACE –
A/B * X + C – [125] FORMULA – A/B * X + C – [676] FORMULA –
TAG NO
100 – [321] COEFFICIENT A – 100 – [375] COEFFICIENT A –
NAME
UNITS 100 – [ 44] COEFFICIENT B – 100 – [673] COEFFICIENT B –
DECIMAL PLACE 0 – [322] COEFFICIENT C – 0 – [376] COEFFICIENT C –
FORMULA 30000 – [101] HIGH LIMIT – 30000 – [674] HIGH LIMIT –
COEFFICIENT A -30000 – [ 53] LOW LIMIT – -30000 – [675] LOW LIMIT –
COEFFICIENT B
COEFFICIENT C
HIGH LIMIT
LOW LIMIT
TAG NO Range: 0 to 787
Enter the tag number of the parameter to be displayed
NAME Range: 16 characters
A 16 character label that is displayed as the parameter name.
UNITS Range: 5 characters
A 5 character label that is displayed as the parameter units.
DECIMAL PLACE Range: Enumerated - see below
Select the position of the decimal point. Note that “_” indicates a character that will not
display on the Operator Station.
Enumerated Value : Decimal Place
0 : XXXXX.
1 : XXXX.X
2 : XXX.XX
3 : XX.XXX
4 : X.XXXX
5 : XXXX._
6 : XXX.X_
7 : XX.XX_
8 : X.XXX_
FORMULA Range: Enumerated - see below
Enumerated Value : Formula
0 : A/B * X + C
1 : A/B * (X+C)
2 : A/(B * X) + C
3 : A/(B * (X+C))

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

COEFFICIENT A Range: -30000 to 30000
Coefficient used as defined by the formula.
COEFFICIENT B Range: 1 to 30000
COEFFICIENT C Range: -30000 to 30000
HIGH LIMIT Range: -30000 to 30000

Use high limit to set a maximum value on the Operator Station. Setting the HIGH LIMIT lower
than or equal to the LOW LIMIT makes the parameter “read-only”.
LOW LIMIT Range: -30000 to 30000
Use low limit to set a minimum value on the Operator Station. Setting the HIGH LIMIT higher
than or equal to the HIGH LIMIT makes the parameter “read-only”.
The custom screen feature may be used to customise the display of any parameter within the
inverter.
For display purposes, the parameter is modified according to the formula chosen. For editing
purposes, the inverse formula is applied to the displayed value to calculate the value to be used.
The coefficients, formulae and units are not applied to enumerated parameters.
Refer to the OPERATOR MENU function block description for details of how to display the
custom screens on the OPERATOR menu.
Character Sets
The table below lists the characters supported by the 605 software in decimal and hexadecimal.
HEX DEC HEX DEC HEX DEC HEX DEC HEX DEC HEX DEC
20 32 0 30 48 @ 40 64 P 50 80 ’ 60 96 p 70 112
! 21 33 1 31 49 A 41 65 Q 51 81 a 61 97 q 71 113
“ 22 34 2 32 50 B 42 66 R 52 82 b 62 98 r 72 114
# 23 35 3 33 51 C 43 67 S 53 83 c 63 99 s 73 115
$ 24 36 4 34 52 D 44 68 T 54 84 d 64 100 t 74 116
% 25 37 5 35 53 E 45 69 U 55 85 e 65 101 u 75 117
& 26 38 6 36 54 F 46 70 V 56 86 f 66 102 v 76 118
‘ 27 39 7 37 55 G 47 71 W 57 87 g 67 103 w 77 119
( 28 40 8 38 56 H 48 72 X 58 88 h 68 104 x 78 120
) 29 41 9 39 57 I 49 73 Y 59 89 i 69 105 y 79 121
* 2A 42 : 3A 58 J 4A 74 Z 5A 90 j 6A 106 z 7A 122
+ 2B 43 ; 3B 59 K 4B 75 [ 5B 91 k 6B 107 { 7B 123
, 2C 44 < 3C 60 L 4C 76 5C 92 l 6C 108 | 7C 124
- 2D 45 = 3D 61 M 4D 77 ] 5D 93 m 6D 109 } 7D 125
. 2E 46 > 3E 62 N 4E 78 ^ 5E 94 n 6E 110
/ 2F 47 ? 3F 63 O 4F 79 _ 5F 95 o 6F 111

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

DEMULTIPLEXER
MMI Menu Map The demultiplexer function block splits the DEMULTIPLEXER
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
input word into 16 individual bits. OUTPUT 0 [657] – FALSE
This may be used to extract the individual OUTPUT 1 [658] – FALSE

2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
trip bits from the ACTIVE TRIPS OUTPUT 2 [659] – FALSE
3 MISCELLANEOUS parameter, for example. OUTPUT 3 [660] – FALSE

OUTPUT 4 [661] – FALSE
4 DEMULTIPLEXER OUTPUT 5 [662] – FALSE
INPUT OUTPUT 6 [663] – FALSE
OUTPUT 0 OUTPUT 7 [664] – FALSE
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 10 0000 – [599] INPUT –
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT 13
OUTPUT 14
OUTPUT 15
INPUT Range: 0000 to FFFF
The input to be split into its component bits.
OUTPUT 0 TO OUTPUT 15 Range: FALSE / TRUE
Each output returns the corresponding bit of the 16 bit input word.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

DIGITAL INPUT
MMI Menu Map The digital input block converts the physical input voltage to TRUE or FALSE control signals.
7
1 SETUP PARAMETERS DIGITAL INPUT 1

7
VALUE [ 31] – FALSE
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
FALSE – [ 30] INVERT –
3 INPUTS & OUTPUTS
DIGITAL INPUT 3
4 DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT 2
5 DIGITAL INPUT 1 FALSE – [ 36] INVERT –
5 DIGITAL INPUT 2
DIGITAL INPUT 5
DIGITAL INPUT 4
5 DIGITAL INPUT 3 VALUE [ 43] – FALSE
5 DIGITAL INPUT 4 FALSE – [ 39] INVERT –
5 DIGITAL INPUT 5 DIGITAL INPUT 7

DIGITAL INPUT 6
VALUE [728] – FALSE
5 DIGITAL INPUT 6 VALUE [726] – FALSE
FALSE – [727] INVERT –
5 DIGITAL INPUT 7
DIN 7 INVERT
DIN 7 VALUE
INVERT Range: FALSE / TRUE
Controls the optional inversion of the VALUE output.
VALUE Range: FALSE / TRUE
The TRUE or FALSE input, (after any inversion).
The Inverter has seven digital inputs. There is a DIGITAL INPUT function block associated
with each of these:
DIGITAL INPUT 1 is associated with terminal 7
The input electronics of the Inverter converts the input signal to a TRUE or FALSE logic value.
The digital input block takes this value and optionally inverts it before providing the VALUE
output.
INVERT
UNPROCESSED
VALUE
INPUT

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

DIGITAL OUTPUT
MMI Menu Map The digital output block converts a logic TRUE or FALSE demand to a physical output signal.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT 2
FALSE – [ 52] VALUE – FALSE – [ 55] VALUE –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
FALSE – [ 51] INVERT – FALSE – [ 54] INVERT –
3 INPUTS & OUTPUTS
4 DIGITAL OUTPUT
5 DIGITAL OUTPUT 1
5 DIGITAL OUTPUT 2
DOUT 2 VALUE
VALUE Range: FALSE / TRUE
DOUT 2 INVERT The TRUE or FALSE output demand.
Controls the optional inversion of the VALUE output.
The inverter has two physical digital outputs. There is a DIGITAL OUTPUT function block
associated with each of these:
DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 is associated with terminal 13
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 is associated with terminal 14
INVERT reverses the output logic.
INVERT
VALUE OUTPUT

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

DYNAMIC BRAKING
MMI Menu Map The dynamic braking function block DYNAMIC BRAKING
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
controls the rate at which energy from a DC LINK VOLTS [ 75] –0.0 V
regenerating motor is dumped into a BRAKING [ 81] –FALSE
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS resistive load. This dumping prevents the TRUE – [ 80] ENABLE –
internal voltage in the 605 inverter from 100 Ohm – [ 77] BRAKE RESISTANCE –
3 MOTOR CONTROL
reaching levels which could damage the
0.1 kW – [ 78] BRAKE POWER –
4 DYNAMIC BRAKING 605 inverter electronics.
25 – [ 79] 1 SEC OVER RATING –
BRAKE ENABLE
BRAKE RESISTANCE
BRAKE POWER
BRAKE 1S RATING
DC LINK VOLTS
BRAKING Parameter Descriptions
Enables operation of the dynamic braking block.
BRAKE RESISTANCE Range:1 to 1000 Ohm
The value of the load resistance.
BRAKE POWER Range: 0.1 to 510.0 kW
The power that the load resistance may continually dissipate.
1 SEC OVER RATING Range: 1 to 40
The power that the load resistance may dissipate for 1 second.
DC LINK VOLTS Range: xxxx.x V
The internal dc voltage tested by the braking block.
BRAKING Range: FALSE / TRUE
A read-only parameter indicating the state of the brake switch.
When enabled, the Dynamic Braking block monitors the internal dc link voltage every milli-
second and sets the state of the brake switch accordingly.
The dynamic braking block provides a control signal that is operated on by the slew rate limits
block. This causes the setpoint to be temporarily frozen whenever the dc link voltage exceeds
the internal comparison level. This allows the stop rate to be automatically tuned to the
characteristics of the load, motor, Inverter and brake resistor.
The dynamic braking block operates even when the motor output is not enabled. This allows the
block to continually monitor the energy dumped into the braking resistor, and the energy
dissipated across the brake switch. With this information the 605 inverter is able to deduce the
loading on the brake resistor. An optional trip may be enabled should the resistor be loaded
beyond its capabilities.
Refer also to Chapter 13: “Application Notes” - Dynamic Braking.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

ENCODER ENCODER
MMI Menu Map The ENCODER block allows Speed SPEED Hz [568] – 0.0 Hz
1 SETUP/DIAGNOSTIC Feedback to be measured. Simple SPEED RPM [569] – 0 n/min
position measuring is also provided, SPEED % [749] – 0.00%
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS but is limited to a 16-bit range. POSITION [748] – 0
3 INPUTS & OUTPUTS QUADRATURE – [565] MODE –
FALSE – [747] RESET –
4 ENCODER
1000 – [566] LINES –
ENCODER MODE FALSE – [567] INVERT –
ENCODER RESET
ENCODER LINES
ENCODER INVERT
ENCODER SUPPLY
ENCODER SPEED
ENCODER SPEED MODE Range: Enumerated - see below
ENCODER SPEED
This must be set to QUADRATURE or CLOCK.
ENCODER POSITION
The CLOCK/DIRECTION option is not supported on this product.
0 : QUADRATURE (using digital inputs 6 & 7)
1 : CLOCK/DIR (using digital inputs 6 & 7)
2 : CLOCK (using digital input 7)
RESET Range: FALSE / TRUE
When TRUE the POSITION output is set (and held) at zero.
LINES Range: 1 to 10000
The number of lines must be set to match the type of encoder being used. Incorrect setting of
this parameter will result in an erroneous speed measurement.
When TRUE, changes the sign of the measured speed and the direction of the position count.
SPEED Hz Range: xxxx.x Hz
Speed feedback in Hz.
SPEED RPM Range: xxxxx n/min
Speed feedback in RPM.
SPEED % Range: xxx.xx %
Speed feedback as a percentage of MAXIMUM SPEED.
POSITION Range: xxxxx
Number of encoder “counts” from when RESET was set to FALSE. The value will increment
or decrement depending on the direction the encoder is rotated. The value will “wrap around”
between 32767 and -32768.
The maximum input frequency is 100kHz into either control terminal 16 or 17.
Maximum Input Frequency = Maximum Speed RPM x Number of Lines

60
Wiring Details for Supported Modes

Control Terminal Control Terminal
16 17
QUADRATURE A B
CLOCK/DIR DIR CLOCK
CLOCK (DIGITAL INPUT 6) CLOCK

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

MMI Menu Map FLUXING FLUXING
This function block allows user LINEAR LAW – [104] V/F SHAPE –
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
parameterisation of the conventional 100.00 % – [105] V/F SCALE –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS (volts/hertz) fluxing strategy of the
* 50.0 Hz – [106] BASE FREQUENCY –
inverter. This is achieved though two
3 MOTOR CONTROL 120 Hz – [113] LIMIT FREQUENCY –
flexible volts to frequency templates.
0.00 % – [107] FIXED BOOST –
4 FLUXING
Starting torque performance can also be
0.00 % – [108] AUTO BOOST –
tailored through the FIXED BOOST and
V/F SHAPE
AUTO BOOST parameters.
V/F SCALE
BASE FREQUENCY
LIMIT FREQUENCY
FIXED BOOST
AUTO BOOST Parameter Descriptions
V/F SHAPE Range: Enumerated - see below
This parameter determines the type of volts to frequency template is used to flux the motor. The
choices of this parameter are:
Enumerated Value : V/F Shape
0 : LINEAR LAW
1 : FAN LAW
V/F SCALE Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
This parameter directly scales the voltage output of the volts to frequency template. This scaling
takes place before any boost or auto boost is added.
BASE FREQUENCY Range: 7.5 to 480.0 Hz
This parameter determines the frequency at which maximum output volts is generated. Below
base frequency, the volts will vary with frequency as determined by the V/F SHAPE parameter.
Above base frequency, the volts will saturate at the maximum value.
Setting the BASE FREQUENCY parameter to a value greater than LIMIT FREQUENCY
parameter, results in the internal value of base frequency used for the volts to frequency
template being clamped at the set value of limit frequency.
LIMIT FREQUENCY Range: Enumerated - see below
Sets the value of the maximum output frequency the Inverter is able to supply to the motor. The
choices of this parameter are:
Enumerated Value : Limit Frequency
0 : 120 Hz
1 : 240 Hz
2 : 480 Hz
FIXED BOOST Range: 0.00 to 25.00 %
This parameter allows for no-load stator resistance voltage drop compensation. This correctly
fluxes the motor (under no-load conditions) at low output frequencies, thereby increasing
available motor torque. Fixed boost can be set in addition to auto boost.
AUTO BOOST Range: 0.00 to 25.00 %
This parameter allows for load dependent stator resistance voltage drop compensation. This
correctly fluxes the motor (under load conditions) at low output frequencies, thereby increasing
available motor torque. Auto boost can be set in addition to fixed boost.
The value of the AUTO BOOST parameter determines level of additional volts supplied to the
motor for 100% load.
Setting the value of auto boost too high can cause the Inverter to enter current limit. If this
occurs, the Inverter will be unable to ramp up in speed. Reducing the value of auto boost will
eliminate this problem.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

AUTO BOOST
BASE FREQUENCY LOAD FILTER
MEASURED LOAD
V/F SHAPE
INVERTER FREQUENCY DEMANDED VOLTS

LINEAR LAW
V/F SCALE BASE VOLTS

FAN LAW
FIXED BOOST
The function block allows the user to parameterise the inverter’s conventional V/F motor
fluxing scheme. Two V/F shapes are available, LINEAR LAW and FAN LAW:
• Linear Law V/F shape should be used in applications requiring constant motor torque
though out the speed range (e.g. machine tools or hoists).
• Fan Law V/F shape provides extra energy savings for fan or pump applications.
For either of these V/F shapes the BASE FREQUENCY, which is the value of inverter output
frequency at which maximum output volts is provided, can be set by the user.
Correct no-load motor fluxing at low inverter output frequencies can be achieved by setting the
FIXED BOOST parameter.
Correct motor fluxing under load conditions is achieved by setting the AUTO BOOST
parameter.
The motor is correctly fluxed when the FIELD diagnostic in the CURRENT FEEDBACK
function block reads 100.0% .

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

FLYCATCHING
MMI Menu Map This block performs a directional speed FLYCATCHING
1 SETUP PARAMETERS search. It allows the Inverter to ACTIVE [576] – FALSE
seamlessly catch a spinning motor SETPOINT [ 28] – 0.00 %
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS before controlling the motor to the FALSE – [570] ENABLE –
desired setpoint. ALWAYS – [571] START MODE –
3 MOTOR CONTROL
This is especially useful for large inertia BIDIRECTIONAL – [572] SEARCH MODE –
4 FLY CATCHING fan loads, where drafts in building air 9.00 % – [573] SEARCH VOLTS –
FLY CATCH ENABLE ducts can cause a fan to `windmill’. 35.00 % – [ 32] SEARCH BOOST –
FLY START MODE 5.0 s – [574] SEARCH TIME –
FLY SEARCH MODE 5.0 Hz – [575] MIN SEARCH SPEED –
FLY SEARCH VOLTS 3.0 s – [709] REFLUX TIME –
FLY SEARCH BOOST
FLY SEARCH TIME
FLY MIN SPEED
FLY REFLUX TIME
FLY CATCH ACTIVE
FLY SETPOINT Parameter Descriptions
Enables flycatching when TRUE.
START MODE Range: Enumerated - see below
The mode of operation for the flycatching sequence software.
Enumerated Value : Start Mode
0 : ALWAYS
1 : TRIP OR POWERUP
2 : TRIP
SEARCH MODE Range: Enumerated - see below
The type of speed search carried out by the flycatching sequence.
Enumerated Value : Search Mode
0 : BIDIRECTIONAL
1 : UNIDIRECTIONAL
SEARCH VOLTS Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
The percentage level of the search volts applied to the motor during the speed search phase of
the flycatching sequence. Increasing this parameter improves the accuracy of the discovered
motor speed but increases the braking influence of the speed search on the rotating motor.
SEARCH BOOST Range: 0.00 to 50.00 %
The level of search boost applied to the motor during the speed search phase of the flycatching
sequence.
SEARCH TIME Range: 0.1 to 60.0 s
The search rate during the speed search phase of the flycatching sequence. Performing the
flycatching speed search too quickly can cause the drive to inaccurately identify the motor
speed. Refluxing at an inaccurate motor speed can cause the drive to trip on overvoltage. If
this occurs, increasing this parameter will reduce the risk of tripping.
MIN SEARCH SPEED Range: 5.0 to 480.0 Hz
The lowest search speed before the speed search phase of the flycatching sequence is
considered to have failed.
REFLUX TIME Range: 0.1 to 20.0 s
The rate of rise of volts from the search level to the working level after a successful speed
search. Refluxing the motor too quickly can cause the drive to trip on either overvoltage or
overcurrent. In either case, increasing this parameter will reduce the risk of tripping.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

A diagnostic output indicating whether the flycatching sequence is active.
SETPOINT Range xxx.xx %
This diagnostic output is the setpoint caught at the end of a successful flycatching sequence.
The flycatching function enables the drive to be restarted smoothly into a spinning motor. It
applies small search voltages to the motor whilst ramping the Inverter frequency from maximum
speed to zero. When the motor load goes from motoring to regenerating, the speed search has
succeeded and is terminated. If the search frequency falls below the minimum search speed, the
speed search has failed and the Inverter will ramp to the speed setpoint from zero.
The flycatching sequence can be triggered by different starting conditions:
ALWAYS: All starts (after controlled or uncontrolled stop, or after a power-up)
TRIP or POWER-UP: After uncontrolled stop, i.e. trip or coast, or after a power-up
TRIP: After uncontrolled stop, i.e. trip or coast
The type of speed sequence may be Bidirectional or Unidirectional:
Bidirectional
Initially, the search is performed in the direction of the speed setpoint. If the drive fails
to identify the motor speed in this direction, a second speed search is performed in the
reverse direction.
Unidirectional
The search is performed only in the direction of the speed setpoint.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

I/O TRIPS
MMI Menu Map This function block is designed to operate I/O TRIPS
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
in conjunction with the Analog and Digital FALSE – [234] EXTERNAL TRIP –
Input function blocks to trip the inverter on FALSE – [235] INPUT 1 BREAK –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS a loss of setpoint input or safety control FALSE – [236] INPUT 2 BREAK –
input.
3 TRIPS
4 I/O TRIPS
EXTERNAL TRIP
INPUT 1 BREAK
INPUT 2 BREAK
EXTERNAL TRIP Range: FALSE / TRUE

A general purpose signal designed to be internally wired to a digital input block. When this
signal goes TRUE this causes an EXTERNAL TRIP to occur, (unless this trip is disabled
within the TRIPS area).
This parameter is not saved in the inverter’s non-volatile memory and thus is reset to the
default setting at power-up.
INPUT 1 BREAK Range: FALSE / TRUE
A general purpose signal designed to be internally wired to the function block ANALOG
INPUT 1, BREAK parameter. When this signal goes TRUE this causes an INPUT 1 BREAK
trip to occur, (unless this trip is disabled within the TRIPS STATUS function block, see
DISABLED TRIPS.
INPUT 2 BREAK Range: FALSE / TRUE
A general purpose signal designed to be internally wired to the function block ANALOG
INPUT 2, BREAK parameter. When this signal goes TRUE this causes an INPUT 2 BREAK
trip to occur (unless this trip is disabled within the TRIPS STATUS function block, see
DISABLED TRIPS.
The I/O TRIPS function block allows trips to be generated by signals on the input terminals of
the inverter. Refer to Chapter 7 for a description of the trips supported by the 605 inverter.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

I*t TRIP
MMI Menu Map This function block is designed to protect I*t TRIP
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
the motor and the inverter from damage that 105.00 % – [237] I*t THRESHOLD –
may be caused by continuous operation 60 s – [238] I*t TIME –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS beyond specification. 150.00 % – [239] I*t UPPER LIMIT –
3 TRIPS
4 I*T TRIP
I*T THRESHOLD
I*T TIME Parameter Descriptions
I*T UPPER LIMIT
I*t THRESHOLD Range: 50.00 to 105.00 %
If the magnitude of the current delivered by the 605 Inverter is greater than this threshold then
the inverter will trip after a time determined by I*t TIME and I*t UPPER LIMIT .
This parameter must be less than the I*t UPPER LIMIT .
I*t TIME Range: 5 to 60 s
The trip delay time for a constant output current equivalent toI*t UPPER LIMIT .
I*t UPPER LIMIT Range: 50.00 to 150.00 %
The output current level used to determine the trip delay. Used in conjunction with I*t TIME .
This parameter must be greater than I*t THRESHOLD .
Area that defines how
Current long the output may
exceed the threshold.
Upper limit
Threshold
Example of current
output that causes
a trip.
I*t TIME Time
The I*t UPPER LIMIT, I*t THRESHOLD and I*t TIME parameters effectively define how
long the output current may exceed the I*t THRESHOLD . For example, if the output current
equals the I*t UPPER LIMIT then the trip will occur after I*t TIME . Alternatively, if the output
current exceeds the I*t THRESHOLD by only half as much as the I*t UPPER LIMIT then the
trip will occur after twice the I*t TIME .
As the output current is constantly monitored by the 605 Inverter the I*t TRIP block constantly
updates the time at which a trip might occur, taking into account not only the present output
level but also the recent history. For an output current that moves around the I*t THRESHOLD
level, the time for which the current is below the level is used to balance the time for which the
current is above the level. This avoids spurious trips while maintaining the monitoring function.
Refer to Chapter 7 for a description of the trips supported by the 605 Inverter.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

INJ BRAKING
MMI Menu Map The injection braking block provides a INJ BRAKING
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
method of stopping spinning induction ACTIVE [583] – FALSE
motors without returning the kinetic energy 0.5 s – [710] DEFLUX TIME –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS of the motor and load back in to the dc link 9.0 Hz – [577] FREQUENCY –
of the inverter. This is achieved by running 100.00 % – [578] I-LIM LEVEL –
3 MOTOR CONTROL
the motor highly inefficiently so that all the
2.0 s – [579] DC PULSE –
4 INJ BRAKING energy stored in the load is dissipated in the
1.0 s – [580] FINAL DC PULSE –
motor. Thus, high inertia loads can be
INJ DEFLUX TIME 3.00 % – [581] DC LEVEL –
stopped without the need for an external
INJ FREQUENCY 600.0 s – [582] TIMEOUT
INJ I-LIM LEVEL
dynamic braking resistor.
100.00 % – [739] BASE VOLTS –
INJ DC PULSE
INJ FINAL DC
INJ DC LEVEL
INJ TIMEOUT
INJ BASE VOLTS
INJ ACTIVE DEFLUX TIME Range: 0.1 to 20.0 s
Determines the time in which the inverter defluxes the motor prior injection braking.
FREQUENCY Range: 1.0 to 480.0 Hz
Determines the maximum frequency applied to the motor for the low frequency injection
braking mode. It is also clamped internally so as never to exceed 50% of base speed value.
I-LIM LEVEL Range: 50.00 to 150.00 %
Determines the level of motor current flowing during low frequency injection braking.
DC PULSE Range: 0.0 to 100.0 s
Determines the duration of the dc pulse applied to the motor when injection braking is
required for motor speeds below 20% of base speed. The actual dc pulse time applied to the
motor is dependent on the ratio of initial motor speed to 20% of base speed.
FINAL DC PULSE Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s
Determines the duration of the final dc holding pulse applied to the motor after either low
frequency injection braking or timed dc pulse.
DC LEVEL Range: 0.00 to 25.00 %
Determines the level of dc pulse applied to the motor during either the timed or final dc pulse.
TIMEOUT Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
Determines the maximum amount of time the sequence is allowed to remain in the low
frequency injection braking state.
BASE VOLTS Range: 0.00 to 115.47 %
Determines the maximum volts at base speed applied to the motor during injection braking.
Indicates the state of the inverter. TRUE when injection braking.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

JOG
MMI Menu Map This block holds all the parameters that JOG
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
concern the Jog functionality on the 10.00 % – [246] SETPOINT –
inverter. 1.0 s – [261] ACCEL RATE –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
1.0 s – [262] DECEL RATE –
3 SEQ & REF
4 JOG
JOG SETPOINT
JOG ACCEL RATE Parameter Descriptions
JOG DECEL RATE
SETPOINT Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
The setpoint is the target reference that the inverter will ramp to. Direction is taken from the
current mode, (LOCAL or REMOTE).
ACCEL RATE Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
The jog mode acceleration rate.
DECEL RATE Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
The jog mode deceleration rate.
The JOG function block is used to configure the action of the 605 inverter when used in jog
mode. The various operating modes are described in more detail in Chapter 4: “Operating the
Inverter” - The Start/Stop Mode Explained.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

LOCAL CONTROL
MMI Menu Map This block allows the available modes of LOCAL CONTROL
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Local and Remote operation to be REMOTE SEQ [297] –TRUE
customised. It also indicates the selected REMOTE REF [257] –TRUE
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS mode. LOCAL/REMOTE – [298] SEQ MODES –
3 SEQ & REF Switching between Local and Remote LOCAL/REMOTE – [265] REF MODES –
modes can only be done using the Operator REMOTE – [299] POWER UP MODE –
4 LOCAL CONTROL Station. Refer to Chapter 5: “The Operator FALSE – [281] SEQ DIRECTION –
SEQ MODES Station” - The L/R Key.
REF MODES
POWER UP MODE
SEQ DIRECTION
REMOTE SEQ SEQ MODES Range: Enumerated - see below
REMOTE REF
Allows the source of sequencing commands to be selected. Local is the Operator Station,
Remote is an external signal. The modes supported are:
Enumerated Value : Seq Mode
0 : LOCAL/REMOTE
1 : LOCAL ONLY
2 : REMOTE ONLY
REF MODES Range: Enumerated - see below
Allows the source of the reference signal to be selected. Local is the Operator Station, Remote is
an external signal. The modes supported are:
Enumerated Value : Ref Mode
0 : LOCAL/REMOTE
1 : LOCAL ONLY
2 : REMOTE ONLY
POWER UP MODE Range: Enumerated - see below
Allows the power-up operating mode of the inverter to be selected. Local is the Operator
Station, Remote is an external signal, Automatic is the same mode as at power-down. The modes
supported are:
Enumerated Value : Power Up Mode
0 : LOCAL
1 : REMOTE
2 : AUTOMATIC
SEQ DIRECTION Range: FALSE / TRUE
The direction of the setpoint is taken from either LOCAL REVERSE or REMOTE REVERSE
in the REFERENCE function block.
• If TRUE, the choice depends on the mode of the sequencing module (Local or Remote).
• If FALSE, the choice depends on the mode of the reference module, (Local or Remote).
REFERENCE Function Block
Local Sequencing LOCAL REVERSE
True (Sequencing)
Remote Sequencing REMOTE REVERSE
SEQ DIRECTION
Local Reference LOCAL REVERSE
False (Reference)
Remote Reference REMOTE REVERSE
REMOTE SEQ Range: FALSE / TRUE

This parameter indicates the present source of the sequencing commands.
REMOTE REF Range: FALSE / TRUE
This parameter indicates the present source of the reference signal.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

LOGIC FUNCTION
MMI Menu Map These generic function blocks can be configured to perform one of a number of simple
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
functions upon a fixed number of inputs.
LOGIC FUNC 1 LOGIC FUNC 2
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
OUTPUT [183] – FALSE OUTPUT [188] – FALSE
3 MISCELLANEOUS FALSE – [180] INPUT A – FALSE – [185] INPUT A –
FALSE – [181] INPUT B – FALSE – [186] INPUT B –
4 LOGIC FUNCTION
FALSE – [182] INPUT C – FALSE – [187] INPUT C –
5 LOGIC FUNC 1 NOT(A) – [184] TYPE – NOT(A) – [189] TYPE –
5 LOGIC FUNC 2
LOGIC FUNC 4
LOGIC FUNC 3
5 LOGIC FUNC 3 OUTPUT [193] – FALSE OUTPUT [198] – FALSE

FALSE – [190] INPUT A – FALSE – [195] INPUT A –
5 LOGIC FUNC 4 FALSE – [196] INPUT B –
FALSE – [191] INPUT B –
5 LOGIC FUNC 5
NOT(A) – [194] TYPE – NOT(A) – [199] TYPE –
5 LOGIC FUNC 6

5 LOGIC FUNC 7
5 LOGIC FUNC 8 FALSE – [200] INPUT A – FALSE – [205] INPUT A –
5 LOGIC FUNC 9
5 LOGIC FUNC 10 NOT(A) – [204] TYPE – NOT(A) – [209] TYPE –
INPUT A
INPUT B LOGIC FUNC 7 LOGIC FUNC 8
INPUT C OUTPUT [213] – FALSE OUTPUT [218] – FALSE
TYPE FALSE – [210] INPUT A – FALSE – [215] INPUT A –
OUTPUT FALSE – [216] INPUT B –

INPUT A Range: FALSE / TRUE
General purpose logic input.
INPUT B Range: FALSE / TRUE
INPUT C Range: FALSE / TRUE

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

The operation to be performed on the three inputs to produce the output value. The operations
that can be selected are:
0 : NOT(A)
1 : AND(A,B,C)
2 : NAND(A,B,C)
3 : OR(A,B,C)
4 : NOR(A,B,C)
5 : XOR(A,B)
6 : 0-1 EDGE(A)
7 : 1-0 EDGE(A)
8 : AND(A,B,!C)
9 : OR(A,B,!C)
10 : S FLIP-FLOP
11 : R FLIP-FLOP
OUTPUT Range: FALSE / TRUE
The result of performing the selected operation on the inputs.
Operation Description
NOT(A) NOT(A) If INPUT A is TRUE the
OUTPUT is FALSE, otherwise
INPUT A OUTPUT
the OUTPUT is TRUE.
INPUT B
INPUT C
AND(A,B,C) AND(A,B,C) If A and B and C are all TRUE

then the OUTPUT is TRUE,
INPUT A
otherwise the OUTPUT is
INPUT B OUTPUT FALSE.
INPUT C
NAND(A,B,C) NAND(A,B,C) If A and B and C are all TRUE

then the OUTPUT is FALSE,
INPUT A
INPUT B OUTPUT TRUE.
INPUT C
OR(A,B,C) OR(A,B,C) If at least one of A or B or C is

TRUE then the OUTPUT is
INPUT A
TRUE, otherwise the OUTPUT
INPUT B OUTPUT is FALSE.
INPUT C

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

NOR(A,B,C) NOR(A,B,C) If at least one of A or B or C is
TRUE then the OUTPUT is
INPUT A
FALSE, otherwise the
INPUT B OUTPUT OUTPUT is TRUE.
INPUT C
XOR(A,B) XOR(A,B) If A and B are the same, (both

TRUE or both FALSE), then
INPUT A
OUTPUT
the output is FALSE, otherwise
INPUT B the output is TRUE.
INPUT C
0-1 EDGE(A)
input A
input C FALSE
output
input C TRUE
t Duration 20ms
Rising Edge Trigger

Input B is not used.
This function outputs a pulse of 20ms duration when INPUT A to the block
becomes TRUE. When INPUT C is TRUE, the output is inverted.
1-0 EDGE(A)
input A
input C FALSE
output
input C TRUE
t Duration 20ms
Falling Edge Trigger

Input B is not used.
This function outputs a pulse of 20ms duration when INPUT A to the block
becomes FALSE. When INPUT C is TRUE, the output is inverted.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

AND(A,B,!C) AND(A,B,!C) Input State
INPUT A A B C Output State
INPUT B OUTPUT
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
INPUT C
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 0
Refer to the Truth Table. 1 0 1 0
FALSE = 0, TRUE = 1. 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
OR(A,B,!C) OR(A,B,!C) Input State

INPUT A A B C Output State
INPUT B OUTPUT
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
INPUT C
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 1
Refer to the Truth Table. 1 0 1 1
FALSE = 0, TRUE = 1. 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1
S FLIP-FLOP S FLIP-FLOP This is a set dominant flip-flop.

INPUT A INPUT A functions as set, and
OUTPUT
INPUT B as reset .
INPUT B
R FLIP-FLOP R FLIP-FLOP This is a reset dominant flip-

INPUT A flop. INPUT A functions as
OUTPUT reset, and INPUT B as set .
INPUT B

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

MINIMUM SPEED
MMI Menu Map The minimum speed block is used to MINIMUM SPEED
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
determine how the inverter will follow a OUTPUT [335] – 0.00 %
reference. There are two modes 0.00 % – [336] INPUT –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
1. Proportional : minimum limit -100.00 % – [337] MINIMUM –
3 SETPOINT FUNCS PROP. W/MIN. – [338] MODE –

2. Linear : between min and max.
4 MINIMUM SPEED
MIN SPEED INPUT

MIN SPEED
MIN SPEED MODE
MIN SPEED OUTPUT
INPUT Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
The input for this block.
MINIMUM Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
This parameter determines the minimum output value from this block
MODE Range: Enumerated - see below
This parameter represents the operating mode of the block. There are two modes:
Enumerated Value : Operating Mode
0 : PROP. W/MIN.
1 : LINEAR
OUTPUT Range: xxx.xx %
The output is determined by the MODE selected, see below.
There are two operating modes for the MINIMUM SPEED block:
Proportional with Minimum

output
In this mode the MINIMUM SPEED block behaves like a
simple clamp. The minimum value has the valid range 100
-100% to 100% and the output is always greater than or
equal to the minimum value. input
Min
-100
0 100%
Linear
In this mode the MINIMUM SPEED block output
first clamps the input to zero then rescales max = 300.00% – (2 x min)
the input such that the output goes linearly
between minimum and 100% for an input
that goes from 0 to 100%. 100
Note the constraints:-

min >= 0 Min
input >= 0 input
max = 100% 0 100% 200%

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

MULTIPLEXER
MMI Menu Map This block collects together 16 boolean MULTIPLEXER
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
input values into a single word. OUTPUT [598] – 0000
This may be used to set and clear individual FALSE – [641] INPUT 0 –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
bits within a word such as the TRIGGERS FALSE – [642] INPUT 1 –
3 MISCELLANEOUS 1 word for the AUTO RESTART function FALSE – [643] INPUT 2 –
block. FALSE – [644] INPUT 3 –
4 MULTIPLEXER FALSE – [645] INPUT 4 –
INPUT 0 FALSE – [646] INPUT 5 –
INPUT 3
FALSE – [649] INPUT 8 –
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 12
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
OUTPUT
INPUT 0 TO INPUT 15 Range: FALSE / TRUE
The boolean inputs to be assembled into a single word.
OUTPUT Range: 0000 to FFFF
The resulting word.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

OPERATOR MENU
MMI Menu Map This function block is used to customise the OPERATOR MENU
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Operator menu, the default menu displayed 1 – [93] STARTUP SCREEN –
at start-up. 255 – [626] OP MENU 2 –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
By entering parameter tag numbers, you 591 – [627] OP MENU 3 –
3 MENUS can assign which parameters will be in the 67 – [628] OP MENU 4 –

menu, and their order of appearance. 72 – [629] OP MENU 5 –
4 OPERATOR MENU 75 – [630] OP MENU 6 –
This function block also assigns the
STARTUP SCREEN 370 – [631] OP MENU 7 –
parameter that will be displayed
OP MENU 2 0 – [632] OP MENU 8 –
OP MENU 3
immediately after the power-up screen.
0 – [633] OP MENU 9 –
OP MENU 4
0 – [634] OP MENU 10 –
OP MENU 5
0 – [635] OP MENU 11 –
OP MENU 6
0 – [636] OP MENU 12 –
OP MENU 7
0 – [637] OP MENU 13 –
OP MENU 8
OP MENU 9 0 – [638] OP MENU 14 –
OP MENU 10 0 – [639] OP MENU 15 –
OP MENU 11
OP MENU 12
OP MENU 13
OP MENU 14 STARTUP SCREEN Range: 0 to 15
OP MENU 15
Selects which of the parameters will be displayed immediately after the Welcome screen. The
range refers to the OPERATOR MENU numbers below. Whichever parameter is selected by the
relevant OPERATOR MENU will be displayed as the Startup screen.
• A value of 0 selects the Welcome screen to be displayed (refer to CONFIGURATION ID
parameter in the OP STATION function block).
• A value of 1 selects the REMOTE SETPOINT or LOCAL SETPOINT parameter to be
displayed.
• A value of 2 to 15 selects the corresponding entry in the Operator menu to be displayed.
OP MENU 2 to 15 Range: See the table below
Selects a parameter screen for the OPERATOR menu. Enter the parameter’s tag number. Each
entry in the menu may be set to the tag number of any visible parameter within the inverter.
There are also four special tag numbers:
• 0 Prevents this entry from displaying in OPERATOR menu
• 1000 Displays the current setpoint (Local, Remote, Jog)
• 1001 Displays the CUSTOM SCREEN 1
• 1002 Displays the CUSTOM SCREEN 2
The Operator menu consists of up to 16 entries, including the Startup screen. OP MENU 1 (not
included in the function block) is fixed to always be the active setpoint or speed demand. The
remaining 14 entries (OP MENU 2 to OP MENU 15 ) may be customised to show any
parameter in the Inverter.
The default (Macro 1) tags for the OPERATOR menu display the following parameters:
255: SPEED DEMAND
591: DRIVE FREQUENCY
67: MOTOR CURRENT
72: LOAD
75: DC LINK VOLTS
370: CURRENT LIMITING
Also, the Startup screen is selected to display OPERATOR MENU 1, which is fixed to display
the SETPOINT parameter.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

OP STATION
MMI Menu Map The operator station block allows the OP STATION
1 MENUS operation of the Operator Station to OP DATABASE [115] –FALSE
VIEW LEVEL
be customised. OP VERSION [230] –0000
LANGUAGE BASIC – [ 3] VIEW LEVEL –
* ENGLISH – [ 1] LANGUAGE –
00F0 – [127] ENABLED KEYS –
or FALSE – [116] AUTO BACKUP –
*AC MOTOR DRIVE – [339] CONFIGURATION ID –
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS Parameter Descriptions

VIEW LEVEL Range: Enumerated - see below
3 MENUS
The menu to be displayed by the Operator Station.
4 OP STATION
Enumerated Value : Viewing Level
VIEW LEVEL
LANGUAGE 0 : OPERATOR
ENABLED KEYS 1 : BASIC
AUTO BACKUP 2 : ADVANCED
CONFIGURATION ID
OP DATABASE LANGUAGE Range: Enumerated - see below
OP VERSION
The display language for the menu.
Enumerated Value : Language
0 : ENGLISH
1 : DEUTSCH
2 : FRANCAIS
3 : ESPANOL
ENABLED KEYS Range: 0000 to FFFF
The following keys on the Operator Station can be enabled or disabled separately. The
combination produces the parameter setting as in the table below.
Parameter Setting RUN L/R JOG DIR
0000 - - - -
0010 - - - ENABLED
0020 - - ENABLED -
0030 - - ENABLED ENABLED
0040 - ENABLED - -
0050 - ENABLED - ENABLED
0060 - ENABLED ENABLED -
0070 - ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED
0080 ENABLED - - -
0090 ENABLED - - ENABLED
00A0 ENABLED - ENABLED -
00B0 ENABLED - ENABLED ENABLED
00C0 ENABLED ENABLED - -
00D0 ENABLED ENABLED - ENABLED
00E0 ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED -
00F0 ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
AUTO BACKUP Range: FALSE / TRUE

When this input is set to TRUE, performing a SAVE TO MEMORY function block operation
also saves the configuration of the inverter to the connected Operator Station.
CONFIGURATION ID Range: 16 characters
This 16 character string is displayed as the top line of the Welcome screen.
OP DATABASE Range: FALSE / TRUE
When TRUE, this diagnostic output indicates that the connected Operator Station contains a
configuration that may be loaded into the inverter.
OP VERSION Range: 0000 to FFFF
Displays the software version of the Operator Station. It is cleared to 0000 if no Operator
Station is connected.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

PASSWORD
MMI Menu Map This function block contains options PASSWORD
1 PASSWORD
associated with password protection for the 0000 – [ 7] ENTER PASSWORD –
Operator Station. 0000 – [ 8] CHANGE PASSWORD –
ENTER PASSWORD
CHANGE PASSWORD FALSE – [361] PROTECT LOCAL SP –
FALSE – [364] PROTECT OP MENU –
or
MMI Menu Map ENTER PASSWORD Range: 0000 to FFFF
1 SETUP PARAMETERS Entering a password equal to the password held in the inverter unlocks the Operator Station.
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
Entering a value that is not equal to the password held in the inverter locks the Operator Station.
When locked, no parameters in the inverter may be modified from the Operator Station (with the
3 MENUS possible exception of the parameters in the OPERATOR menu, see PROTECT OP MENU
below).
4 PASSWORD
CHANGE PASSWORD Range: 0000 to FFFF
ENTER PASSWORD
This parameter is used to initally set and if necessary change the password held in the inverter.
CHANGE PASSWORD
When the password is set to 0000, the Operator Station is always unlocked.
PROTECT LOCAL SP
PROTECT OP MENU PROTECT LOCAL SP Range: FALSE / TRUE
Enables password protection of the local setpoint. When set to TRUE, the local setpoint is read-
only whenever the inverter is password locked. When FALSE, the local setpoint can be adjusted
regardless of the password.
PROTECT OP MENU Range: FALSE / TRUE
Enables password protection of all parameters shown in the OPERATOR menu (except for the
local setpoint entry). When set to TRUE, the parameters are read-only whenever the inverter is
password locked. When FALSE, the parameters can be adjusted regardless of the password.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

PATTERN GEN
MMI Menu Map The pattern generator function block allows PATTERN GEN
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
the user to configure the inverter PWM DRIVE FREQUENCY [591] – 0.0 Hz
(Pulse Width Modulator) operation. VOLTS [592] – 0.0 V
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
BOOST [593] – 0.0 V
3 MOTOR CONTROL TRUE – [ 98] RANDOM PATTERN –

3 kHz – [ 99] FREQ SELECT –
4 PATTERN GEN 2.0 s – [100] DEFLUX DELAY –
RANDOM PATTERN
PATTERN GEN FREQ
DEFLUX DELAY
DRIVE FREQUENCY
VOLTS
BOOST RANDOM PATTERN Range: FALSE / TRUE
This parameter selects between random pattern (quiet motor noise) or the more conventional
fixed carrier PWM strategies. When TRUE, random pattern is enabled.
FREQ SELECT Range: Enumerated - see below
This parameter selects the base switching frequency of the output power stack. The choices of
switching frequency are:
Enumerated Value : Frequency
0 : 3 kHz
1 : 6 kHz
2 : 9 kHz
The higher the switching frequency, the lower the level of motor audible noise. However, this is
only achieved at the expense of increased Inverter losses.
Note: This parameter is internally clamped to 3kHz on 0.75kW, 380/460V units.
DEFLUX DELAY Range: 0.1 to 10.0 s
Sets the minimum allowed delay between disabling and then re-enabling PWM production (i.e.
stopping and starting the drive).
DRIVE FREQUENCY Range: xxxx.x Hz
The inverter output frequency.
VOLTS Range: xxxx.x V
The inverter output volts.
BOOST Range: xxxx.x V
The inverter output boost.
The 605 inverter provides a unique quiet pattern PWM strategy in order to reduce audible motor
noise. The user is able to select between the quite pattern or the more conventional fixed carrier
frequency method. With the quiet pattern strategy selected (random pattern enabled), audible
motor noise is reduced to a dull hiss.
In addition, the user is able to select the PWM carrier frequency. This is the main switching
frequency of the power output stage of the Frequency Inverter. A high setting of carrier
frequency (e.g. 9kHz) reduces audible motor noise but only at the expense of higher inverter
losses and smooth motor rotation at low output frequencies. A low setting of carrier frequency
(e.g. 3kHz), reduces inverter losses but increases audible motor noise.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

PID
MMI Menu Map This function block allows the Inverter to PID
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
be used in applications requiring a trim to PID OUTPUT [320] – 0.00 %
the setpoint, depending on feedback from PID ERROR [766] – 0.00 %
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS an external measurement device. Typically 0.00 % – [310] SETPOINT –
this will be used for process control, i.e. 0.00% – [764] FEEDBACK
3 SETPOINT FUNCS –
pressure or flow.
FALSE – [763] SETPOINT NEGATE –
4 PID FALSE – [765] FEEDBACK NEGATE –
PID SETPOINT FALSE – [311] ENABLE –
PID FEEDBACK FALSE – [312] INTEGRAL DEFEAT –
PID SP NEGATE 1.0 – [313] P GAIN –
PID FB NEGATE
1.00 s – [314] I TIME CONST –
PID ENABLE
0.000 s – [315] D TIME CONST –
PID INTEGRAL OFF
2.000 s – [316] FILTER TC –
PID P GAIN
100.00 % – [317] OUTPUT POS LIMIT –
PID I TIME CONST
PID D TIME CONST -100.00 % – [318] OUTPUT NEG LIMIT –
PID FILTER TC 1.0000 – [319] OUTPUT SCALING –
PID OUT POS LIM
PID OUT NEG LIM
PID OUT SCALING Parameter Descriptions
PID OUTPUT
SETPOINT Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
An input to the PID block.
FEEDBACK Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
An input to the PID block.
SETPOINT NEGATE Range: FALSE / TRUE
Changes the sign of SETPOINT.
FEEDBACK NEGATE Range: FALSE / TRUE
Changes the sign of FEEDBACK.
This parameter globally resets the PID output and integral term when FALSE.
This parameter must be TRUE for the PID to operate.
INTEGRAL DEFEAT Range: FALSE / TRUE
This parameter resets the PID integral term when TRUE.
P GAIN Range: 0.0 to 100.0
This parameter is the true proportional gain of the PID controller. With a P gain of zero, the
PID output would be zero.
I TIME CONST Range: 0.01 to 100.00 s
The integral time constant of the PID controller.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

D TIME CONST Range: 0.000 to 10.000 s
The derivative time constant of the PID controller.
FILTER TC Range: 0.000 to 10.000 s
In order to help attenuate high frequency noise on the PID output, a first order output filter has
been provided. This parameter determines the output filter time constant.
OUTPUT POS LIMIT Range: 0.00 to 105.00 %
This parameter determines the maximum positive excursion (Limit) of the PID output.
OUTPUT NEG LIMIT Range: -105.00 to 0.00 %
This parameter determines the maximum negative excursion (Limit) of the PID output.
OUTPUT SCALING Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000
This parameter represents an overall scaling factor which is applied after the PID positive and
negative limit clamps.
PID OUTPUT Range: xxx.xx %
The output of the PID function.
PID ERROR Range: xxx.xx %
The result of SETPOINT - FEEDBACK, clamped to between ± 100.00%.
P GAIN
PID ERROR
I TIME CONST
SETPOINT NEGATE
D TIME CONST OUTPUT POS LIMIT OUTPUT SCALING
sign change
+100.00%
Kp(1+sTi)(1+sTd)
SETPOINT
sTi(1+sTf) X PID OUTPUT
-100.00%
ENABLE OUTPUT NEG LIMIT
FEEDBACK INTEGRAL DEFEAT
sign change
FEEDBACK NEGATE
For an application that requires closed loop control, the error term may be derived from the
setpoint and feedback using a value function block. This error term is then used by the PID. The
output of the PID may be used to trim the demand setpoint via the SPEED TRIM parameter in
the REFERENCE function block.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

PRESET
MMI Menu Map The 605 inverter has eight Preset function blocks. They are used to select a value from one of
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
eight inputs, depending on the value of another input. A second output is provided to allow the
block to be used as two banks of four inputs.
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
3 SETPOINT FUNCS OUTPUT 1 [356] – 0.00 % OUTPUT 1 [389] – 0.00 %
OUTPUT 2 [372] – 0.00 % OUTPUT 2 [373] – 0.00 %
4 PRESET
INPUT 0 – [355] SELECT INPUT – INPUT 0 – [388] SELECT INPUT –
5 PRESET 1 0.00 % – [347] INPUT 0 – 0.00 % – [380] INPUT 0 –
0.00 % – [348] INPUT 1 – 0.00 % – [381] INPUT 1 –
5 PRESET 2
0.00 % – [349] INPUT 2 – 0.00 % – [382] INPUT 2 –
0.00 % – [351] INPUT 4 – 0.00 % – [384] INPUT 4 –
5 PRESET 4
0.00 % – [352] INPUT 5 0.00 % – [385] INPUT 5
– –

0.00 % – [354] INPUT 7 – 0.00 % – [387] INPUT 7 –
5 PRESET 6
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
5 PRESET 7
OUTPUT 1 [399] – 0.00 % OUTPUT 1 [519] – 0.00 %
5 PRESET 8 OUTPUT 2 [374] – 0.00 % OUTPUT 2 [520] – 0.00 %
PRESET 8 SELECT INPUT 0 – [398] SELECT INPUT – INPUT 0 – [518] SELECT INPUT –
PRESET 8 INPUT 0 0.00 % – [390] INPUT 0 – 0.00 % – [510] INPUT 0 –
PRESET 8 INPUT 3
0.00 % – [393] INPUT 3 – 0.00 % – [513] INPUT 3 –
PRESET 8 INPUT 4
0.00 % – [394] INPUT 4 – 0.00 % – [514] INPUT 4 –
PRESET 8 INPUT 5
0.00 % – [395] INPUT 5 – 0.00 % – [515] INPUT 5 –
PRESET 8 INPUT 6
0.00 % – [396] INPUT 6 – 0.00 % – [516] INPUT 6 –
PRESET 8 INPUT 7
PRESET 8 OUTPUT1 0.00 % – [397] INPUT 7 – 0.00 % – [517] INPUT 7 –
PRESET 8 OUTPUT2
. PRESET 5 PRESET 6
OUTPUT 1 [530] – 0.00 % OUTPUT 1 [541] – 0.00 %
OUTPUT 2 [531] – 0.00 % OUTPUT 2 [542] – 0.00 %
0.00 % – [521] INPUT 0 – 0.00 % – [532] INPUT 0 –
0.00 % – [522] INPUT 1 – 0.00 % – [533] INPUT 1 –
0.00 % – [523] INPUT 2 – 0.00 % – [534] INPUT 2 –
0.00 % – [524] INPUT 3 – 0.00 % – [535] INPUT 3 –
0.00 % – [525] INPUT 4 – 0.00 % – [536] INPUT 4 –
0.00 % – [526] INPUT 5 – 0.00 % – [537] INPUT 5 –
0.00 % – [527] INPUT 6 – 0.00 % – [538] INPUT 6 –
0.00 % – [528] INPUT 7 – 0.00 % – [539] INPUT 7 –
PRESET 7 PRESET 8
OUTPUT 1 [552] – 0.00 % OUTPUT 1 [563] – 0.00 %
OUTPUT 2 [553] – 0.00 % OUTPUT 2 [564] – 0.00 %
0.00 % – [543] INPUT 0 – 0.00 % – [554] INPUT 0 –
0.00 % – [544] INPUT 1 – 0.00 % – [555] INPUT 1 –
0.00 % – [545] INPUT 2 – 0.00 % – [556] INPUT 2 –
0.00 % – [546] INPUT 3 – 0.00 % – [557] INPUT 3 –
0.00 % – [547] INPUT 4 – 0.00 % – [558] INPUT 4 –
0.00 % – [548] INPUT 5 – 0.00 % – [559] INPUT 5 –
0.00 % – [549] INPUT 6 – 0.00 % – [560] INPUT 6 –
0.00 % – [550] INPUT 7 – 0.00 % – [561] INPUT 7 –

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

SELECT INPUT Range: Enumerated - see
below
Determines which of the inputs is routed to OUTPUT 1 . In addition, if SELECT INPUT is in
the range 0 to 3, INPUT 4 to INPUT 7 respectively is routed to OUTPUT 2.
Enumerated Value : Select Input
0 : INPUT 0
1 : INPUT 1
2 : INPUT 2
3 : INPUT 3
4 : INPUT 4
5 : INPUT 5
6 : INPUT 6
7 : INPUT 7
INPUT 0 TO INPUT 7 Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
Inputs to the Preset block.
OUTPUT 1 Range: xxx.xx %
Selected input.
OUTPUT 2 Range: xxx.xx %
Selected input (if SELECT INPUT is in the correct range).
The Preset function block is a de-multiplexer.
OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 return the values at selected inputs set by SELECT INPUT.
OUTPUT 2 returns the value of a different input to OUTPUT 1 , i.e:
if SELECT INPUT = 0 then OUTPUT 1 = INPUT 0, OUTPUT 2 = INPUT 4
if SELECT INPUT = 1 then OUTPUT 1 = INPUT 1, OUTPUT 2 = INPUT 5 etc.
When SELECT INPUT is set to 4, 5, 6 or 7, OUTPUT 2 will return a value of zero.
SELECT INPUT
INPUT 0
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
OUTPUT 1
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
OUTPUT 2
0
0
0
0

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

RAISE/LOWER
MMI Menu Map This function block acts an internal RAISE/LOWER
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
motorised potentiometer (MOP). OUTPUT [325] – 0.00 %
The OUTPUT is preserved during the FALSE – [327] RAISE INPUT –

2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
power-down of the 605 inverter. FALSE – [328] LOWER INPUT –
3 SETPOINT FUNCS 10.0 s – [326] RAMP RATE –

100.00 % – [330] MAX VALUE –
4 RAISE/LOWER -100.00 % – [329] MIN VALUE –
RAISE INPUT 0.00 % – [331] RESET VALUE –
LOWER INPUT FALSE – [332] RESET –
RL RAMP RATE
RL MAX VALUE
RL MIN VALUE Parameter Descriptions
RL RESET VALUE
RAISE INPUT Range: FALSE / TRUE
RL RESET
RAISE/LOWER OUT When TRUE causes OUTPUT to ramp up.
LOWER INPUT Range: FALSE / TRUE
When TRUE causes OUTPUT to ramp down.
RAMP RATE Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
Rate of change of theOUTPUT . Defined as time to change from 0.00% to 100.00% . Note that
the raise and lower rates are always the same.
MAX VALUE Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
The maximum value to whichOUTPUT will ramp up to.
MIN VALUE Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
The minimum value to which OUTPUT will ramp down to.
RESET VALUE Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
The value the OUTPUT is set to when RESET is TRUE.
RESET Range: FALSE / TRUE
When TRUE, forces OUTPUT to track RESET VALUE .
The ramped output. This parameter is persistent, that is, it is saved throughout a power failure.
F
unctional Description
The table below describes how OUTPUT is controlled by the RAISE INPUT, LOWER INPUT
and RESET inputs.
RESET RAISE LOWER Action
INPUT INPUT
TRUE Any Any OUTPUT tracks RESET VALUE
FALSE TRUE FALSE OUTPUT ramps up to MAX VALUE at RAMP RATE
FALSE FALSE TRUE OUTPUT ramps down to MIN VALUE at RAMP RATE
FALSE FALSE FALSE OUTPUT not changed. *
FALSE TRUE TRUE OUTPUT not changed. *
* If OUTPUT is greater than MAX VALUE the OUTPUT will ramp down to MAX VALUE at
RAMP RATE. If OUTPUT is less than MIN VALUE the OUTPUT will ramp up to MIN
VALUE at RAMP RATE.
IMPORTANT: Do not set MIN VALUE to greater than MAX VALUE, as the resulting value of OUTPUT will
be unpredictable.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

REFERENCE
MMI Menu Map This function block holds all the parameters REFERENCE
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
concerning the generation of the setpoint SPEED DEMAND [255] – 0.00 %
reference. SPEED SETPOINT [254] – 0.00 %
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
The generation of reference setpoint is REVERSE [256] – FALSE
3 SEQ & REF described in Chapter 4: “Operating the LOCAL SETPOINT [247] – 0.00 %
Inverter” - Control Philosophy. LOCAL REVERSE [250] – FALSE
4 REFERENCE COMMS SETPOINT [269] – 0.00 %
REMOTE SETPOINT 0.00 % – [245] REMOTE SETPOINT –
SPEED TRIM 0.00 % – [248] SPEED TRIM –
MAX SPEED CLAMP 100.00 % – [252] MAX SPEED CLAMP –
MIN SPEED CLAMP
-100.00 % – [253] MIN SPEED CLAMP –
TRIM IN LOCAL
FALSE – [243] TRIM IN LOCAL –
REMOTE REVERSE
FALSE – [249] REMOTE REVERSE –
SPEED DEMAND
SPEED SETPOINT
REVERSE
LOCAL SETPOINT
LOCAL REVERSE
COMMS SETPOINT REMOTE SETPOINT Range: -300.00 to 300.00 % (h)
This is the target reference that the inverter will ramp to in remote reference mode (not including
trim), direction is taken from REMOTE REVERSE and the sign of REMOTE SETPOINT.
SPEED TRIM Range: -300.00 to 300.00 % (h)
The trim is added to the ramp output in remote mode (or if TRIM IN LOCAL is TRUE) to form
SPEED DEMAND . The trim is typically connected to the output of a PID in a closed loop
system.
MAX SPEED CLAMP Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
Maximum value for SPEED DEMAND.
MIN SPEED CLAMP Range: -100.00 to 0.00 % (h)
Minimum value for SPEED DEMAND.
TRIM IN LOCAL Range: FALSE / TRUE
When TRUE, SPEED TRIM is always added to the ramp output. When FALSE, SPEED TRIM
is added only to Remote mode.
REMOTE REVERSE Range: FALSE / TRUE
Demanded direction when in Remote Reference mode. This is usually connected directly to the
Sequencing Logic.
SPEED DEMAND Range: xxx.xh % (h)
Indicates actual speed demand. This is the input to the frequency controller.
SPEED SETPOINT Range: xxx.xh % (h)
Indicates target speed. This will be equal to either LOCAL SETPOINT, REMOTE SETPOINT,
JOG SETPOINT or COMMS SETPOINT. (Refer to the JOG function block for the JOG
SETPOINT parameter).
REVERSE Range: FALSE / TRUE
Indicates demanded direction. This may not be the actual direction as no account of setpoint sign
is taken.
LOCAL SETPOINT Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
Indicates the Operator Station setpoint. It is always a positive quantity; saved on power down.
Direction is taken from LOCAL REVERSE.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

LOCAL REVERSE Range: FALSE / TRUE
Indicates demanded direction in Local Reference mode, saved on power down.
COMMS SETPOINT Range: -300.00 to 300.00 % (h)
This setpoint is the target reference that the inverter will ramp to in Remote Reference Comms
mode (not including trim). The direction is always positive, i.e. forward.
Remote Reference
SPEED SETPOINT
MAX SPEED CLAMP
sign change
COMMS SETPOINT * SYSTEM
RAMP ++ SPEED DEMAND
REMOTE SETPOINT *
SPEED TRIM
MIN SPEED CLAMP
REMOTE REVERSE * REVERSE
Set only from Comms, tag 269

*
REMOTE SETPOINT if Remote Reference Terminal mode
COMMS SETPOINT if Remote Reference Comms mode
(Mode is selectable in COMMS CONTROL block)
Local Reference
SPEED SETPOINT
MAX SPEED CLAMP
sign change
SYSTEM
LOCAL SETPOINT *
RAMP ++ SPEED DEMAND
0
SPEED TRIM
TRIM IN LOCAL
MIN SPEED CLAMP
LOCAL REVERSE * REVERSE
Set only from the Operator Station

*

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

SEQUENCING LOGIC
MMI Menu Map This function block contains all the SEQUENCING LOGIC
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
parameters relating to the TRIPPED [289] – FALSE
sequencing (start and stop) of the RUNNING [285] – FALSE
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS 605 inverter. JOGGING [302] – FALSE
3 SEQ & REF Before the inverter will respond to STOPPING [303] – FALSE
the RUN FWD, RUN REV or JOG OUTPUT CONTACTOR [286] – FALSE
4 SEQUENCING LOGIC parameters (cause the inverter to SWITCH ON ENABLE [288] – FALSE
RUN FWD run or jog), the parameters DRIVE SWITCHED ON [306] – TRUE
RUN REV ENABLE, /FAST STOP and READY [287] – FALSE
/STOP /COAST STOP need to be set to SYSTEM RESET [305] – TRUE
JOG TRUE. In addition, the inverter MAIN SEQ STATE [301] – NOT READY
DRIVE ENABLE needs to be healthy (HEALTHY is REMOTE REV OUT [296] – FALSE
/FAST STOP TRUE). The inverter will only HEALTHY [274] – FALSE
/COAST STOP respond to RUN FWD, RUN REV FALSE – [291] RUN FWD –
REMOTE REVERSE
and JOG if the inverter is in the FALSE – [292] RUN REV –
REM TRIP RESET
Remote Sequencing mode. FALSE – [293] /STOP –
TRIP RST BY RUN
POWER UP START If RUN FWD and RUN REV are FALSE – [280] JOG –
TRIPPED TRUE, both are ignored and the TRUE – [276] DRIVE ENABLE –
RUNNING inverter will stop. TRUE – [277] /FAST STOP –
JOGGING TRUE – [278] /COAST STOP –
STOPPING
A detailed description of the
FALSE – [294] REMOTE REVERSE –
OUTPUT CONTACTOR sequencer states, as indicated by the
FALSE – [282] REM TRIP RESET –
SWITCH ON ENABLE MAIN SEQ STATE parameter, is
TRUE – [290] TRIP RST BY RUN –
SWITCHED ON described in Chapter 9. A
description of the sequence logic is FALSE – [283] POWER UP START –
READY
SYSTEM RESET described in Chapter 4: “Operating
MAIN SEQ STATE the Inverter” - Selecting Local or Remote Control.
REMOTE REV OUT
HEALTHY
RUN FWD Range: FALSE / TRUE
Setting this parameter to TRUE causes the inverter to run in the forward direction.
RUN REV Range: FALSE / TRUE
Setting this parameter to TRUE causes the inverter to run in the reverse direction.
/STOP (NOT STOP) Range: FALSE / TRUE
Setting this parameter TRUE will latch the RUN FWD or RUN REV commands. Once latched,
they can be reset to FALSE and the inverter will continue to run. Setting /STOP to FALSE
causes the run commands to be un-latched.
JOG Range: FALSE / TRUE
Setting this parameter TRUE causes the inverter to run at the speed set by JOG SETPOINT
(refer to the JOG function block). Once jogging, setting JOG to FALSE causes the inverter to
ramp to zero.
DRIVE ENABLE Range: FALSE / TRUE
This provides a means of electronically inhibiting inverter operation. Whilst running, setting this
parameter to FALSE disables the inverter operation and causes the motor to coast.
/FAST STOP (NOT FAST Range: FALSE / TRUE
STOP)
Whilst running or jogging, setting this parameter to FALSE causes the inverter to ramp to zero.
The rate is set by FAST STOP RATE in the STOP function block. The action of setting /FAST
STOP to TRUE is latched. The inverter cannot be restarted until fast stop is completed.
/COAST STOP (NOT COAST STOP) Range: FALSE / TRUE
Setting this parameter to FALSE disables the inverter operation and causes the motor to coast.
The action of setting this parameter to TRUE is latched. The inverter can not be restarted until
the coast stop is completed.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

REMOTE REVERSE Range: FALSE / TRUE
For remote setpoints, setting this parameter TRUE inverts the demanded direction of motor
rotation.
REM TRIP RESET Range: FALSE / TRUE
On a transition to TRUE, this input clears latched trips.
TRIP RST BY RUN Range: FALSE / TRUE
This allows the rising edge of run command to clear latched trips.
POWER UP START Range: FALSE / TRUE
If TRUE, this allows the inverter to go directly to run mode if in remote and a run command is
present. If FALSE, a low to high transition of the run command is required.
TRIPPED Range: FALSE / TRUE
Indicates that there is a latched trip present.
RUNNING Range: FALSE / TRUE
Indicates that that the inverter is in the enabled state.
JOGGING Range: FALSE / TRUE
Indicates that the inverter is in the JOG mode.
STOPPING Range: FALSE / TRUE
Indicates that the inverter is stopping.
OUTPUT CONTACTOR Range: FALSE / TRUE
Output to be used to drive an external contactor in the motor output. This contactor is normally
closed unless a Trip condition has occurred or the inverter goes into the re-configuration mode.
SWITCH ON ENABLE Range: FALSE / TRUE
Sometimes referred to as READY TO SWITCH ON, this parameter indicates that the inverter
will accept a run command.
SWITCHED ON Range: FALSE / TRUE
Indicates that the inverter’s power stack is operable and the inverter will run if enabled.
READY Range: FALSE / TRUE
Output indicating that the inverter has accepted the run command.
SYSTEM RESET Range: FALSE / TRUE
Output TRUE for a single cycle after the inverter enters either RUN or JOG mode.
MAIN SEQ STATE Range: Enumerated - see below
This parameter indicates the current sequencing state:
Enumerated Value : State
0 : NOT READY
1 : START DISABLED
2 : START ENABLED
3 : SWITCHED ON
4 : ENABLED
5 : F-STOP ACTIVE
6 : TRIP ACTIVE
7 : TRIPPED
REMOTE REV OUT Range: FALSE / TRUE
This parameter indicates the current state of remote direction and RUN REV. Note - this is the
demanded direction, not the actual direction.
HEALTHY Range: FALSE / TRUE
Set FALSE when the inverter trips, and set TRUE when the the run command is removed.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

SETPOINT SCALE
MMI Menu Map This function block simply converts the SETPOINT SCALE
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
way the setpoint is expressed from being a OUTPUT [ 59] – 0.00 %lf
percentage of the MAX SPEED to a 0.00 % – [ 58] INPUT –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS percentage of LIMIT FREQUENCY (refer * 50.0 Hz – [ 57] MAX SPEED –
to the FLUXING function block).
3 MOTOR CONTROL
4 SETPOINT SCALE
SCALE INPUT
MAX SPEED
SCALE OUTPUT
INPUT Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
The setpoint delivered by the re-wired function block portion of the inverter’s application.
MAX SPEED Range: 0.0 to 480.0 Hz
The physical motor speed equivalent to a setpoint demand of 100.00%. Note that the motor
speed in revs per minute, (RPM), is related to the speed in Hz according to the equation:
speed in RPM = (speed in Hz) x 2 x 60
number of motor poles
OUTPUT Range: xxx.xx %lf
Output = max speed x input
limit frequency
The setpoint scale block changes the format in which the setpoint is expressed. The function
blocks on the input side of this block process the setpoint as a percentage of maximum speed.
The function blocks on the output side of this block process the setpoint as a percentage of the
LIMIT FREQUENCY.
MAX SPEED LIMIT FREQUENCY
INPUT X ÷ OUTPUT

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

SKIP FREQUENCIES
MMI Menu Map This function block may be used to prevent SKIP FREQUENCIES
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
the inverter operating at frequencies that OUTPUT [346] – 0.00 %
cause mechanical resonance in the load. OUTPUT HZ [363] – 0.0 Hz
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
INPUT HZ [362] – 0.0 Hz
3 SETPOINT FUNCS 0.00 % – [340] INPUT –

0.0 Hz – [341] BAND 1 –
4 SKIP FREQUENCIES 0.0 Hz – [342] FREQUENCY 1 –
SKIP FREQ INPUT 0.0 Hz – [680] BAND 2 –
SKIP FREQ BAND 1 0.0 Hz – [343] FREQUENCY 2 –
SKIP FREQUENCY 1 0.0 Hz – [681] BAND 3 –
SKIP FREQ BAND 2
0.0 Hz – [344] FREQUENCY 3 –
SKIP FREQUENCY 2
0.0 Hz – [682] BAND 4 –
SKIP FREQ BAND 3
0.0 Hz – [345] FREQUENCY 4 –
SKIP FREQUENCY 3
SKIP FREQ BAND 4
SKIP FREQUENCY 4
SKIP FREQ OUTPUT
SKIP FREQ OUTPUT Parameter Descriptions
SKIP FREQ INPUT
INPUT Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
The value of the block input in %.
BAND 1 Range: 0.0 to 480.0 Hz
The width of each skip band in Hz.
FREQUENCY 1 Range: 0.0 to 480.0 Hz
This parameter contains the centre frequency of each skip band in Hz.
Diagnostic on the output of the function block in %
OUTPUT HZ Range: xxxx.x Hz
Diagnostic on the output of the function block in Hz
INPUT HZ Range: xxxx.x Hz
Diagnostic on the input of the function block in Hz

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Four programmable skip frequencies are available to avoid resonances within the mechanical
system. Enter the value of frequency that causes the resonance using the “FREQUENCY”
parameter and then programme the width of the skip band using its “BAND” parameter. The
inverter will then avoid sustained operation within the forbidden band as shown in the diagram.
The skip frequencies are symmetrical and thus work in forward and reverse.
Note: Setting the FREQUENCY to 0 disables the corresponding band.

Setting the BAND to 0 causes the value of BAND 1 to be used for this band.
The behaviour of this function block is illustrated below.
Drive
Frequency
Skip band
Skip Frequency Setpoint
Drive
Frequency
Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Setpoint
Drive
Frequency
Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Setpoint

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

SLEW RATE LIMIT
MMI Menu Map This function block prevents over-current SLEW RATE LIMIT
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
and over-voltage faults occurring due to a TRUE – [ 60] ENABLE –
rapidly changing setpoint. 500.0 Hz/s – [ 62] ACCEL LIMIT –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
500.0 Hz/s – [ 61] DECEL LIMIT –
3 MOTOR CONTROL
4 SLEW RATE LIMIT
SLEW ENABLE
SLEW ACCEL LIMIT
SLEW DECEL LIMIT
When this parameter is FALSE, this function block is disabled and the setpoint is unaffected by
this function block.
ACCEL LIMIT Range: 12.0 to 1200.0 Hz/s
The maximum rate at which the setpoint may accelerate away from zero.
DECEL LIMIT Range: 12.0 to 1200.0 Hz/s
The maximum rate at which the setpoint may decelerate towards zero.
The slew rate limits block obtains the setpoint from the output of the application, correctly
scaled by the setpoint scale block. The rate of change limits are then applied and the setpoint is
then passed on for future processing by the current limit block.
When the braking block determines that the internal dc link voltage is too high it issues a Hold
signal. This causes the slew rate limits block to hold the setpoint at its current value. This
typically lasts for only 1ms, time for the excess energy to be dumped into the braking resistor.
HOLD SIGNAL
ACCEL LIMIT
SETPOINT
DECEL LIMIT

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

SLIP COMP
MMI Menu Map The slip compensation function block SLIP COMP
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
allows the Inverter to maintain motor SLIP ACTIVE [762] –FALSE
speed in the presence of load FALSE – [ 82] ENABLE –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS disturbances. ** 1400 n/min – [ 83] NAMEPLATE RPM –
4 – [ 84] MOTOR POLES –
3 MOTOR CONTROL
** 150.0 n/min – [ 85] MOTORING LIMIT –
4 SLIP COMP ** 150.0 n/min – [ 86] REGEN LIMIT –
SLIP ENABLE
NAMEPLATE RPM
MOTOR POLES
SLIP MOTOR LIMIT Parameter Descriptions
SLIP REGEN LIMIT
SLIP ACTIVE
For the slip compensation to be operational this must be TRUE.
NAMEPLATE RPM Range: 0 to 28800 n/min
This is the rated speed of the motor at rated load.
MOTOR POLES Range: Enumerated - see
below
The number of motor poles. The values that this parameter may take are:
Enumerated Value : Number of poles
0:2
1:4
2:6
3:8
4 : 10
5 : 12
MOTORING LIMIT Range: 0.0 to 600.0 n/min
The maximum trim that will be produced by the slip compensation block when the motor is
driving the load (motoring).
REGEN LIMIT Range: 0.0 to 600.0 n/min
The maximum trim that will be produced by the slip compensation block when the motor is
being driven by the load, (regenerating).
SLIP ACTIVE Range: FALSE / TRUE
Indicates when Slip Compensation is being applied.
Based on the rated speed, the no load speed and the rated load of the motor, the slip
compensation block adjusts the demand frequency to compensate for any speed slippage
resulting from the load.
Torque
No Load Speed
(synchronous speed)
Rated
Torque
Rated Speed
Speed

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

STABILISATION
MMI Menu Map Enabling this function alleviates the STABILISATION
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
problem of unstable running in induction TRUE – [128] ENABLE –
motors. This can be experienced at
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS approximately half full speed, and under
low load conditions.
3 MOTOR CONTROL
4 STABILISATION
STB ENABLE
Enables (or disables) the stabilisation function.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

STALL TRIP
MMI Menu Map The function block protects the motor from STALL TRIP
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
damage that may be caused by continuous 100.00 % – [240] STALL LIMIT –
operation beyond specification. 600.0 s – [241] STALL TIME –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
3 TRIPS
4 STALL TRIP
STALL LIMIT Parameter Descriptions

STALL TIME
STALL LIMIT Range: 50.00 to 150.00 %
The load limit beyond which the stall trip monitoring becomes active.
STALL TIME Range: 0.1 to 3000.0 s
The time after which a stall condition will cause a trip.
If the estimated load exceeds the STALL LIMIT for a time greater than STALL TIME then the
stall trip will become active. The timer is reset whenever the estimated load is less than the
STALL LIMIT.
Refer to Chapter 7 for a description of the trips supported by the 605 inverter.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

STOP
MMI Menu Map This function block holds all the parameters STOP
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
concerning the stopping method of the RAMPED – [279] RUN STOP MODE –
inverter. 10.0 s – [263] STOP RATE –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
The stopping methods of the inverter are 0.10 % – [266] STOP ZERO SPEED –
3 SEQ & REF described in more detail in Chapter 4: 0.500 s – [284] STOP DELAY –
“Operating the Inverter” - Starting and RAMPED – [304] FAST STOP MODE –
4 STOP Stopping Methods.. 30.0 s – [275] FAST STOP LIMIT –
RUN STOP MODE 0.1 s – [264] FAST STOP RATE –
STOP RATE 1200 Hz/s – [126] FINAL STOP RATE –
STOP ZERO SPEED
STOP DELAY
FAST STOP MODE
FAST STOP LIMIT
FAST STOP RATE RUN STOP MODE Range: Enumerated - see below
FINAL STOP RATE
Selects stopping mode that the controller will use once the run command has been removed. The
choices are:
Enumerated Value : Stopping Mode
0 : RAMPED
1 : COAST
2 : DC INJECTION
When RAMPED is selected, the inverter will decelerate using the system ramp deceleration
time, provided it is non zero. When COAST is selected, the motor will free-wheel. When DC
INJECTION is selected, the motor is stopped by applying dc current.
STOP RATE Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
Rate at which the demand is ramped to zero after the ramp has been quenched.
STOP ZERO SPEED Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Threshold for zero speed detection used by stop sequences.
STOP DELAY Range: 0.000 to 30.000 s
Sets the time at which the inverter holds zero speed before quenching after a normal stop or a
jog stop. This may be particularly useful if a mechanical brake requires time to operate at zero
speed, or for jogging a machine to position.
FAST STOP MODE Range: Enumerated - see below
Selects stopping mode used during a fast stop, two options ramped or coast.
Enumerated Value : Stopping Mode
0 : RAMPED
1 : COAST
FAST STOP LIMIT Range: 0.0 to 3000.0 s
Maximum time that the inverter will try to Fast Stop, before quenching.
FAST STOP RATE Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
Rate at which the SPEED DEMAND is ramped to zero (see REFERENCE function block)
FINAL STOP RATE Range: 12 to 4800 Hz/s
Rate at which any internally generated setpoint trims are removed. For example, the trim due to
the slip compensation block.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

SYSTEM PORT (P3)
MMI Menu Map The unisolated RS232 programming port SYSTEM PORT (P3)
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
allows for connection to the Operator 0 – [102] GROUP ID (GID) –
Station, or to a personal computer for drive 0 – [103] UNIT ID (UID) –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS configuration and storage of parameters.
The parameters below are used to identify
3 SERIAL LINKS
the inverter to the controlling software.
4 SYSTEM PORT (P3) The port uses the standard EI BISYNCH ASCII protocol.
GROUP ID (GID)
UNIT ID (UID)
GROUP ID (GID) Range: 0 to 9
The SSD Drives protocol group identity address.
UNIT ID (UID) Range: 0 to 15

The SSD Drives protocol unit identity address
The unit will always respond to GID = 0 and UID = 0 on the system port, as this is the
“broadcast” address used by the Operator Station.
Note: The Technology Box option uses a different port and address. It does not respond to the
“broadcast” address.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

SYSTEM RAMP
MMI Menu Map This function block forms part of the SYSTEM RAMP
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
reference generation. It provides the facility RAMPING [698] – FALSE
to control the rate at which the inverter will LINEAR – [244] RAMP TYPE –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS respond to a changing setpoint demand. 10.0 s – [258] ACCEL RATE –
3 SEQ & REF 10.0 s – [259] DECEL RATE –

10.0 s – [267] SYMETRIC RATE –
4 SYSTEM RAMP FALSE – [268] SYMETRIC MODE –
RAMP TYPE FALSE – [260] RAMP HOLD –
RAMP ACCEL RATE TRUE – [691] SRAMP CONTINUOUS –
RAMP DECEL RATE 10.00 % – [692] SRAMP ACCEL –
RAMP SYM RATE
10.00 % – [693] SRAMP DECEL –
RAMP SYM MODE
10.00 % – [694] SRAMP JERK 1 –
RAMP HOLD
10.00 % – [695] SRAMP JERK 2 –
SRAMP CONTINUOUS
10.00 % – [696] SRAMP JERK 3 –
SRAMP ACCEL
SRAMP DECEL 10.00 % – [697] SRAMP JERK 4 –
SRAMP JERK 1
SRAMP JERK 2
SRAMP JERK 3 Parameter Descriptions
SRAMP JERK 4
RAMPING RAMP TYPE Range: Enumerated - see below
Select the ramp type:
Enumerated Value : Ramp Type
0 : LINEAR
1:S
ACCEL RATE Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
The time that the inverter will take to ramp the setpoint, from 0.00% to 100.00%.
DECEL RATE Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
The time that the inverter will take to ramp from the setpoint, from 100.00% to 0.00%.
SYMETRIC RATE Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
The time that the inverter will take to ramp from 0.00% to 100.00% and from 100.00% to 0.00%
when SYMETRIC MODE is TRUE.
SYMETRIC MODE Range: FALSE / TRUE
Select whether to use the ACCEL RATE and DECEL RATE pair of ramp rates, or to use the
SYMETRIC RATE parameter to define the ramp rate for the inverter.
RAMP HOLD Range: FALSE / TRUE
When TRUE the output of the ramp is held at its last value.
SRAMP CONTINUOUS Range: FALSE / TRUE
When TRUE and the S ramp is selected, forces a smooth transition if the speed setpoint is
changed when ramping. The curve is controlled by the SRAMP ACCEL and SRAMP JERK 1 to
SRAMP JERK 4 parameters. When FALSE, there is an immediate transition from the old curve
to the the new curve.
SRAMP ACCEL Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Sets the acceleration rate in units of percent per second², i.e. if the full speed of the machine is
1.25m/s then the acceleration will be:
1.25 x 75.00% = 0.9375m/s²
SRAMP DECEL Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
This functions in the same way as SRAMP ACCEL above.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

SRAMP JERK 1 Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Rate of change of acceleration for the first segment of the curve in units per second³, i.e. if the
full speed of the machine is 1.25m/s then the acceleration will be:
1.25 x 50.00% = 0.625m/s³
Rate of change of acceleration in units of percent per second³ for segment 2.
RAMPING Range: FALSE / TRUE
Set TRUE when ramping.
Chapter 4: “Operating the Inverter” - Starting and Stopping Methods, describes the use of the
system ramp.
The ramp output takes the form shown below.
S-Ramp
% 60
Acceleration Deceleration
50
40
Jerk 1
30
20 Jerk 4
10 Jerk 2 Jerk 3
-10
Time (secs)
-20
Jerk Acceleration Velocity

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

TEC OPTION TEC OPTION
MMI Menu Map
This function block is used to configure the FAULT [756] – NONE
1 SETUP PARAMETERS inputs and outputs of the various Technology VERSION [757] – 0000
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
Option boards that can be fitted.
OUTPUT 1 [758] – 0000
The Technology Option board provides a OUTPUT 2 [759] – 0000
3 SERIAL LINKS
communications interface for external control NONE – [750] TYPE –
4 TEC OPTION of the Inverter. 0 – [751] INPUT 1 –
0 – [752] INPUT 2 –
TEC OPTION TYPE If a Technology Option board is present when
0 – [753] INPUT 3 –
TEC OPTION IN 1 defaults are loaded, the TYPE parameter is
0 – [754] INPUT 4 –
TEC OPTION IN 2 automatically set. The parameter names
TEC OPTION IN 3 change when the selection for the TYPE 0 – [755] INPUT 5 –
TEC OPTION IN 4 parameter matches the Technology Option
TEC OPTION IN 5
board fitted.
TEC OPTION FAULT
TEC OPTION VER Refer to the appropriate Technology Manual supplied with the option for further details.
TEC OPTION OUT 1
TEC OPTION OUT 2
Selects the type of Technology Option card.
Enumerated Value : Technology Option
0 : NONE
1 : RS485
2 : PROFIBUS DP
3 : LINK
4 : DEVICENET
5 : CANOPEN
6 : TYPE 6
7 : TYPE 7
INPUT 1 to INPUT 5 Range: -32768 to 32767
The use of these input parameters depends on the type of Technology Option card fitted.
Refer to the Technology Manual.
FAULT Range: Enumerated - see below
The fault state of the Technology Option card.
Enumerated Value : Fault State
0 : NONE
1 : PARAMETER
2 : TYPE MISMATCH
3 : SELF TEST
4 : HARDWARE
5 : MISSING
VERSION Range: 0000 to FFFF
The version of the Technology Option card. If no option is fitted then the version is reset to
zero.
OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 Range: 0000 to FFFF
The use of these output parameters depends on the Type of Technology Option card fitted.
Refer to the Technology Manual.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

TRIPS HISTORY
MMI Menu Map This function block records the last ten trips TRIPS HISTORY
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
that caused the inverter to stop. TRIP 1 (NEWEST) [500] – NO TRIP
To do this, it stores the value of the FIRST TRIP 2 [501] – NO TRIP

2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
TRIP parameter, tag number 6, taken from TRIP 3 [502] – NO TRIP
3 TRIPS the TRIPS STATUS function block. TRIP 4 [503] – NO TRIP

TRIP 5 [504] – NO TRIP
4 TRIPS HISTORY TRIP 6 [505] – NO TRIP
TRIP 1 (NEWEST) TRIP 7 [506] – NO TRIP
TRIP 2 TRIP 8 [507] – NO TRIP
TRIP 3 TRIP 9 [508] – NO TRIP
TRIP 4
TRIP 10 (OLDEST) [509] – NO TRIP
TRIP 5
TRIP 6
TRIP 7
TRIP 8
TRIP 9
TRIP 10 (OLDEST) TRIP 1 (NEWEST) Range: Enumerated
Records the most recent trip that caused the inverter to stop. The values that this (and the
parameters below) may take are the same as tag number 6, FIRST TRIP, detailed in the TRIPS
STATUS function block.
TRIP 2 Range: As above
Records the second most recent trip that caused the Inverter to stop.
Records the third most recent trip that caused the Inverter to stop.
Records the fourth most recent trip that caused the Inverter to stop.
Records the fifth most recent trip that caused the Inverter to stop.
Records the sixth most recent trip that caused the Inverter to stop.
Records the seventh most recent trip that caused the Inverter to stop.
Records the eighth most recent trip that caused the Inverter to stop.
Records the ninth most recent trip that caused the Inverter to stop.
TRIP 10 (OLDEST) Range: As above
Records the tenth most recent trip that caused the Inverter to stop.
This function block provides a view of the ten most recent trips that caused the inverter to stop.
Every time a new trip occurs this is entered as TRIP 1 (NEWEST) and the other recorded trips
are moved down. If more than ten trips have occurred since the inverter was configured then
only the ten most recent trips will be available for inspection.
These parameters are preserved through a power failure.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

TRIPS STATUS
MMI Menu Map The 605 inverter supports advanced and TRIPS STATUS
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
flexible trip logic to support monitoring of ACTIVE TRIPS [ 4] – 0000
the inverter itself, the motor and the load. WARNINGS [ 5] – 0000
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS This function block provides a view into FIRST TRIP [ 6] – NO TRIP
the current trip condition(s) and allows 0600 – [231] DISABLED TRIPS –
3 TRIPS
some trips to be disabled.
4 TRIPS STATUS
DISABLED TRIPS
ACTIVE TRIPS
TRIP WARNINGS Parameter Descriptions
FIRST TRIP
DISABLED TRIPS Range: 0000 to FFFF
Indicates which trips have been disabled. Not all trips may be disabled, the DISABLED TRIPS
or mask is ignored for trips that cannot be disabled. See below for which trips may be disabled and
how this parameter is formed.
MMI Menu Map
ACTIVE TRIPS Range: 0000 to FFFF
1 TRIPS STATUS
Indicates which trips are currently active. This parameter is a coded representation of the trip
DISABLED TRIPS
status. See below for a description of how this parameter is formed.
ACTIVE TRIPS
TRIP WARNINGS WARNINGS Range: 0000 to FFFF
FIRST TRIP
Indicates which conditions are likely to cause a trip. This parameter is a coded representation of
the warning status. See below for a description of how this parameter is formed.
FIRST TRIP Range: Enumerated - see below
From when a trip occurs until that trip is reset, this parameter indicates the trip source. When
several trips have occurred, this parameter indicates the first one that was detected.
Enumerated Value : First Trip
0 : NO TRIP
1 : LINK OVERVOLTS
2 : LINK UNDERVOLT
3 : OVERCURRENT
4 : HEATSINK TEMP
5 : EXTERNAL TRIP
6 : INPUT 1 BREAK
7 : INPUT 2 BREAK
8 : MOTOR STALLED
9 : I*T TRIP
10 : BRAKE RESISTOR
11 : BRAKE SWITCH
12 : OP STATION
13 : LOST COMMS

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

The table below shows the possible parameter values for FIRST TRIP, and the TRIPS
HISTORY function block. Also shown is whether or not the trip may be disabled.
Trip name Enumerated value May be Disabled

NO TRIP 0 N/A
LINK OVERVOLTS 1 No
LINK UNDERVOLTS 2 No
OVERCURRENT 3 No
HEATSINK TEMP 4 No
EXTERNAL TRIP 5 Yes
INPUT 1 BREAK 6 Yes
INPUT 2 BREAK 7 Yes
MOTOR STALLED 8 Yes
I*T TRIP 9 No
BRAKE RESISTOR 10 Yes
BRAKE SWITCH 11 Yes
OP STATION 12 Yes
LOST COMMS 13 Yes
Hexadecimal Representation of Trips

The ACTIVE TRIPS, WARNINGS and DISABLED TRIPS parameters use a four digit
hexadecimal number to identify individual trips. Each trip has a unique corresponding number.
Refer to “Hexadecimal Representation of Trips” at the beginning of this Chapter.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

UNDERLAP COMP
MMI Menu Map The underlap compensation function block UNDERLAP COMP
1 SETUP PARAMETERS ensures sinusoidal motor current at low TRUE – [600] ENABLE –
motor speeds.
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
This significantly reduces `cogging’
3 MOTOR CONTROL (rough/pulsating motor rotation) at low speeds.
Underlap compensation is especially desirable
4 UNDERLAP COMP in lift or hoist applications.
ULC ENABLE
Enables underlap compensation when set to TRUE.
Underlap is the bridge switching delay required for correct operation of the inverter power
electronic output stage. The delay causes errors in the inverter output voltage leading to non-
sinusiodal motor currents at low motor speeds. The result is motor cogging, and a loss of motor
torque at low speeds.
Underlap compensation removes underlap errors, and provides consistent motor operation
regardless of motor speed.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

VALUE FUNCTION
MMI Menu Map The value function blocks can be configured to perform one of a number of functions upon a
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
fixed number of inputs.
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS VALUE FUNC 1 VALUE FUNC 2

OUTPUT [133] – 0.00 % OUTPUT [138] –0.00 %
3 MISCELLANEOUS 0.00 % – [130] INPUT A – 0.00 % – [135] INPUT A –
0.00 % – [131] INPUT B – 0.00 % – [136] INPUT B –
4 VALUE FUNCTIONS
0.00 % – [132] INPUT C – 0.00 % – [137] INPUT C –
5 VALUE FUNC 1 IF(C) -A – [134] TYPE – IF(C) -A – [139] TYPE –
5 VALUE FUNC 2
VALUE FUNC 3 VALUE FUNC 4
5 VALUE FUNC 3 OUTPUT [143] – 0.00 % OUTPUT [148] –0.00 %
0.00 % – [140] INPUT A – 0.00 % – [145] INPUT A –
5 VALUE FUNC 4
0.00 % – [141] INPUT B – 0.00 % – [146] INPUT B –
5 VALUE FUNC 5 0.00 % – [142] INPUT C – 0.00 % – [147] INPUT C –
IF(C) -A – [144] TYPE – IF(C) -A – [149] TYPE –
5 VALUE FUNC 6
5 VALUE FUNC 7 VALUE FUNC 5 VALUE FUNC 6

OUTPUT [153] – 0.00 % OUTPUT [158] –0.00 %
5 VALUE FUNC 8
0.00 % – [150] INPUT A – 0.00 % – [155] INPUT A –
5 VALUE FUNC 9 0.00 % – [151] INPUT B – 0.00 % – [156] INPUT B –
0.00 % – [152] INPUT C – 0.00 % – [157] INPUT C –
5 VALUE FUNC 10
INPUT A
INPUT B VALUE FUNC 7 VALUE FUNC 8
INPUT C
OUTPUT [163] – 0.00 % OUTPUT [168] –0.00 %
TYPE
0.00 % – [160] INPUT A – 0.00 % – [165] INPUT A –
OUTPUT
0.00 % – [161] INPUT B – 0.00 % – [166] INPUT B –
0.00 % – [162] INPUT C – 0.00 % – [167] INPUT C –

OUTPUT [173] – 0.00 % OUTPUT [178] –0.00 %
0.00 % – [170] INPUT A – 0.00 % – [175] INPUT A –
0.00 % – [171] INPUT B – 0.00 % – [176] INPUT B –
0.00 % – [172] INPUT C – 0.00 % – [177] INPUT C –
If inputs and outputs are time values, divide the time in seconds by a factor of ten, i.e.
11.3 seconds = 1.13%.
Conversely, outputs are multiplied by a factor of ten to obtain their value in seconds.
Boolean inputs or outputs are FALSE if zero, and TRUE if non-zero.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

INPUT A Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
General purpose input.
INPUT B Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
INPUT C Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
TYPE Range: Enumerated - see
below
The operation to be performed on the three inputs to produce the output value.
0 : IF(C) -A
1 : ABS(A+B+C)
2 : SWITCH(A,B)
3 : (A*B)/C
4 : A+B+C
5 : A-B-C
6 : B<=A<=C
7 : A>B+/-C
8 : A>=B
9 : ABS(A)>B+/-C
10 : ABS(A)>=B
11 : A(1+B)
12 : IF(C) HOLD(A)
13 : BINARY DECODE
14 : ON DELAY
15 : OFF DELAY
16 : TIMER
17 : MINIMUM PULSE
18 : PULSE TRAIN
19 : WINDOW
20 : UP/DWN COUNTER
21 : (A*B)/C ROUND
22 : WINDOW NO HYST
The result of performing the selected operation on the inputs.
F
unctional Description
OUTPUT is generated from the inputs according to the operation type selected. The output is
always limited to be within the range -300.00% to +300.00%.
IF(C) -A If INPUT C is not zero the OUTPUT is minus INPUT A, otherwise the
OUTPUT is the same as INPUT A.
ABS(A+B+C) The OUTPUT is set to the absolute value of INPUT A + INPUT B + INPUT
C.
SWITCH(A,B) INPUT A If INPUT C is zero the
OUTPUT
INPUT B
OUTPUT is set to INPUT A,
otherwise the output is set to
INPUT C
INPUT B
(A*B)/C The OUTPUT is set to (INPUT A * INPUT B) / (INPUT C). The algorithm
compensates for the remainder term.
A+B+C The OUTPUT is set to (INPUT A + INPUT B + INPUT C).

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

A-B-C The OUTPUT is set to (INPUT A - INPUT B - INPUT C).
B <= A <= C The OUTPUT is set to the value
INPUT A OUTPUT
of INPUT A, limited to between
INPUT B a maximum value of INPUT C
INPUT C and a minimum value of INPUT
B. If INPUT B is greater than
INPUT C the output is
undefined.
A>B+/-C INPUT A The OUTPUT is TRUE if
OUTPUT
INPUT A is greater than INPUT
INPUT B
B + INPUT C. The OUTPUT is
INPUT C FALSE if INPUT A is less than
INPUT B - INPUT C.
Otherwise the OUTPUT is unchanged. In this way the block acts as a simple
comparator with a comparison level of INPUT B and a hysteresis band equal
to +/- INPUT C.
A>=B INPUT A The OUTPUT is TRUE if
OUTPUT
INPUT A is greater than or
INPUT B
equal to INPUT B, otherwise
the OUTPUT is FALSE.
ABS(A)> |INPUT A|
The OUTPUT is TRUE if the
ABS(B)+/-C OUTPUT magnitude of INPUT A is
|INPUT B|
greater than or equal to the
INPUT C magnitude of INPUT B -
INPUT C.
The OUTPUT is FALSE if the magnitude of INPUT A is less than the
magnitude of INPUT B - INPUT C. Otherwise the OUTPUT is unchanged.
In this way the block acts as a magnitude comparator with a comparison
level of INPUT B and a hysteresis band equal to +/- INPUT C.
ABS(A)> |INPUT A| The OUTPUT is TRUE if the
=ABS(B) OUTPUT magnitude of INPUT A is
|INPUT B|
greater than or equal to the
magnitude of INPUT B,
FALSE.
A(1+B) The OUTPUT is set to INPUT A + ( INPUT A * INPUT B / 100.00 ).
IF(C) HOLD A If INPUT C is zero, the OUTPUT is set to INPUT A, otherwise the
OUTPUT is unchanged.
On powering up the drive, the output will be pre-loaded with the last saved
value of input B.
BINARY The OUTPUT is set according to which of the INPUTs are non-zero.
DECODE
INPUT C INPUT B INPUT A OUTPUT
0 0 0 0.00
0 0 ≠0 0.01
0 ≠0 0 0.02
0 ≠0 ≠0 0.03
≠0 0 0 0.04
≠0 0 ≠0 0.05
≠0 ≠0 0 0.06
≠0 ≠0 ≠0 0.07
In the above table, ≠0 indicates that the corresponding input is not zero.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

ON DELAY
input A
input C FALSE
output
input C TRUE
t Target time (input B)
A programmable delay between receiving and outputting a Boolean TRUE

signal.
INPUT A becoming TRUE starts the delay timer. INPUT B sets the duration
of the delay. At the end of the duration, OUTPUT becomes TRUE unless
INPUT A has reverted to FALSE. Setting INPUT C to TRUE (≠0) inverts
the output.
OFF DELAY
input A
input C FALSE
output
input C TRUE
t Target time (input B)
A programmable delay between receiving and outputting a Boolean FALSE

signal.
INPUT A becoming FALSE starts the delay timer. INPUT B sets the
duration of the delay. Setting INPUT C to TRUE (≠0) inverts the output. At
the end of the duration, OUTPUT becomes FALSE unless INPUT A has
reverted to TRUE.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

TIMER
input A
input B
output
Times the period elapsed from when INPUT A is set TRUE and held TRUE,
to when INPUT B becomes TRUE.
OUTPUT is the duration of the timer, starting from zero. If INPUT B is
TRUE, the value for OUTPUT is held until INPUT B is released. If on
release INPUT A is still TRUE, the timer will continue from the held value.
Setting INPUT A and INPUT B to FALSE resets the timer.
INPUT C is not used.
MINIMUM
PULSE
input A
input C FALSE
output
input B input C TRUE

t
Duration (input B)
Creates an output pulse of adjustable minimum time when INPUT A is

TRUE. (INPUT A is assumed to be a sequence of TRUE pulses and FALSE
off periods.)
INPUT B sets the length of the minimum pulse required. INPUT C inverts
the output when TRUE. The duration of the pulse is at least the period set by
INPUT B.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

PULSE TRAIN
input_a
output
ON time (input b)
OFF time (input_c)
Creates a pulsed TRUE/FALSE output of programmable frequency.

INPUT A enables the pulse train when TRUE, disables when FALSE.
INPUT B sets the length of the on part of the pulse. INPUT C sets the length
of the off part of the pulse.
WINDOW
input C window width
input A
input B threshold
input C +ve
output
input C -ve
This function outputs TRUE when INPUT A is within a programmable

range, and FALSE otherwise.
INPUT B sets the threshold of the window to be monitored. INPUT C
defines the range of the window around the threshold. When the value of
INPUT A is inside the window, the window expands by 1.00% to avoid
flutter on output if noisy, i.e. if INPUT B = 5 and INPUT C = 4 then the
range is 3 to 7, expanded to 2.5 to 7.5 when the value of INPUTA is inside
the window.
If INPUT C is set to zero, the output will only be TRUE if INPUT A is
exactly equal to INPUT B (this is fulfilled in the default condition when
inputs A, B & C are all zero)
If INPUT C is set to a negative value, its absolute value defines the window
range, and the output is inverted.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

UP/DOWN
COUNTER
input A
input B
output
0
INPUT A provides a rising edge trigger to increment the output count by

one.
INPUT B provides a rising edge trigger to decrement the output count by
one.
INPUT C holds the output at zero.
The output starts at zero. The output is limited at ±30000 (±300.00%).
(A*B)/C ROUND The OUTPUT is set to (INPUT A * INPUT B) / (INPUT C). This is the
same as (A*B)/C (enumerated value 3) except that the result is rounded.
WINDOW This is the same as WINDOW (enumerated value 19) except that there is no
NO HYST hysterisis when inside the `window’. Thus, from the diagram given in
WINDOW, if INPUT B = 5 and INPUT C = 4 then the range is 3 to 7.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

VECTOR FLUXING
MMI Menu Map This function block allows the user to both VECTOR FLUXING
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
enable the sensorless vector fluxing mode SUPPLY VOLTAGE [596] – 0.0 V
and enter details of the motor to be FALSE – [118] ENABLE –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS controlled. Once enabled, vector fluxing ** DELTA – [124] MOTOR CONNECTION –
automatically replaces the conventional V ** 1.00 Ohm – [119] STATOR RES –
3 MOTOR CONTROL
to F fluxing and enables slip
** 10.0 mH – [120] LEAKAGE INDUC –
4 VECTOR FLUXING compensation.
** 1000.0 mH – [121] MUTUAL INDUC –
VECTOR ENABLE Refer to Chapter 4: “Operating the
MOTOR CONNECTION Inverter” - Setting-up the Inverter,
STATOR RES for a description of the vector fluxing of
LEAKAGE INDUC the 605 inverter.
MUTUAL INDUC
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
This parameter enables sensorless vector inverter operation.
MOTOR CONNECTION Range: Enumerated - see below
This parameter is used to indicate how the motor is connected to the inverter. The choice for this
parameter is:
Enumerated Value : Motor Connection
0 : DELTA
1 : STAR
STATOR RES Range: 0.00 to 100.00 Ohm
This parameter is used to program the value of the motor per-phase stator resistance.
LEAKAGE INDUC Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 mH
This parameter is used to program the value of the motor per-phase stator leakage inductance.
MUTUAL INDUC Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 mH
This parameter is used to program the value of the motor per-phase stator mutual (magnetising)
inductance.
SUPPLY VOLTAGE Range: xxxx.x V
This parameter indicates the line to line rms supply voltage to the inverter.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

VOLTAGE CONTROL
MMI Menu Map This is used to control voltage in two VOLTAGE CONTROL
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
different modes. NONE [595] VOLTAGE MODE –
A benefit of using this function block is ** 230.0 V – [122] MOTOR VOLTS –

2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
that it can reduce the possiblity of nuisance 100.00 % – [112] BASE VOLTS –
3 MOTOR CONTROL tripping due to fluctuations in stator

current.
4 VOLTAGE CONTROL
VOLTAGE MODE
MOTOR VOLTS
BASE VOLTS
VOLTAGE MODE Range: Enumerated - see
below
Set to NONE, no attempt is made to control the PWM modulation depth for variations in dc
link voltage.
Set to FIXED, the inverter’s output volts are maintained, regardless of variations in the dc link
voltage. The inverter’s product code sets the default value for demanded maximum output
voltage (see MOTOR VOLTS below).
Set to AUTOMATIC, the voltage is controlled as above, but the output voltage is allowed to
rise smoothly as dc link volts vary. This allows the motor to be overfluxed during deceleration,
thereby increasing braking performance.
Enumerated Value : Voltage Mode
0 : NONE
1 : FIXED
2 : AUTOMATIC
MOTOR VOLTS Range: 198.0 to 550.0 V
This is the maximum motor output voltage. This parameter is used in conjunction with the
VOLTAGE MODE parameter above when set to FIXED.
BASE VOLTS Range: 0.00 to 115.47 %
This parameter directly scales the output of the voltage control function block, thus allowing
further scaling of the inverter output volts if required.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

ZERO SPEED
MMI Menu Map This function block detects when the speed ZERO SPEED
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
is at or close to zero. LEVEL and BAND AT ZERO SPEED [360] – FALSE
are user-definable. 0.00 % – [358] INPUT –
2 FUNCTION BLOCKS
0.50 % – [357] LEVEL –
3 SEQ & REF 0.00 % – [359] BAND –
4 ZERO SPEED
ZERO SPEED IN
ZERO SPEED LEVEL
ZERO SPEED BAND
AT ZERO SPEED Parameter Descriptions
INPUT Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
Speed input.
LEVEL Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Sets the level, below which is considered to be zero.
BAND Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
Creates a window both sides of the level set above.
AT ZERO SPEED Range: FALSE / TRUE
TRUE when at zero, as defined by the LEVEL and BAND parameters.
Example where BAND = 0.2%

input
0.7%
BAND
(LEVEL) 0.5% window
0.3%
true zero
AT ZERO SPEED

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Motor-Specific Parameters
When copying an application from the Operator Station to another 605 Inverter, the following
motor-specific parameters need not be written to - refer to Chapter 5: “The Operator Station” -
Copying an Application.
Tag
FLY SEARCH BOOST 32
FULL LOAD CALIB 64
NO LOAD CALIB 65
NAMEPLATE RPM 83
MOTOR POLES 84
SLIP MOTOR LIMIT 85
SLIP REGEN LIMIT 86
DEFLUX DELAY 100
BASE FREQUENCY 106
FIXED BOOST 107
AUTO BOOST 108
STATOR RES 119
LEAKAGE INDUC 120
MUTUAL INDUC 121
MOTOR VOLTS 122
VECTOR FILTER TC 123
MOTOR CONNECTION 124
POWER FACTOR 242
ENCODER LINES 566
FLY SEARCH VOLTS 573
FLY SEARCH TIME 574
INJ FREQUENCY 577
INJ DC PULSE 579
INJ FINAL DC 580
INJ DC LEVEL 581
DEFLUX TIME 710
INJ BASE VOLTS 739

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Trips and Fault Finding 7-1

TRIPS AND FAULT FINDING
7
Trips
What Happens when a Trip Occurs
When a trip occurs, the Inverter’s power stage is immediately disabled causing the motor and
load to coast to a stop. The trip is latched until action is taken to reset it. This ensures that trips
due to transient conditions are captured and the Inverter is disabled, even when the original
cause of the trip is no longer present
Inverter Indications
If a trip condition is detected the unit displays and performs the following actions.
1. The HEALTH LED flashes indicating a Trip condition has occurred. (Investigate, find and
remove the cause of the trip.)
1. The programming block SEQUENCING LOGIC::TRIPPED signal is set to TRUE.
DEFAULT The DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 (HEALTH) digital output changes between TRUE/FALSE,
depending on the output logic.
Operator Station Indications (when connected)

If a trip condition is detected the MMI displays and performs the following actions.
1. The HEALTH LED on the Operator Station flashes indicating a Trip condition has
occurred and a trip message is displayed stating the cause of the trip.
2. The programming block SEQUENCING LOGIC::TRIPPED signal is set to TRUE.
The DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 (HEALTH) digital output changes between TRUE/FALSE,
depending on the output logic.
3. The trip message(s) must be acknowledged by pressing the E key. Refer to Chapter 5: “The
Operator Station” - Message Displays.
Resetting a Trip Condition

All trips must be reset before the Inverter can be re-enabled. A trip can only be reset once the
trip condition is no longer active, i.e. a trip due to a heatsink over-temperature will not reset
until the temperature is below the trip level.
Note: More than one trip can be active at any time. For example, it is possible for both the
HEATSINK TEMP and the LINK OVERVOLTS trips to be active. Alternatively it is possible
for the Inverter to trip due to an OVERCURRENT error and then for the HEATSINK TEMP
trip to become active after the Inverter has stopped (this may occur due to the thermal
time constant of the heatsink).
Reset the trip(s) using the remote trip reset input, or by pressing the STOP/RESET key on the
DEFAULT
Operator Station.
Success is indicated by the HEALTH LED (on the unit or MMI) ceasing to flash and returning
to a healthy “ON” state. The programming block SEQUENCING LOGIC::TRIPPED output is
reset to FALSE.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
7-2 Trips and Fault Finding

Using the Operator Station to Manage Trips
Trip Messages
If the Inverter trips, then the display immediately shows a message indicating the reason for the
trip. The possible trip messages are given in the table below.
Trip Message and Meaning Possible Reason for Trip

LINK UNDERVOLTS
The Inverter internal dc link voltage is The supply voltage is too low
too low The supply has been lost
A supply phase is missing
LINK OVERVOLT
The Inverter internal dc link voltage is The supply voltage is too high
too high Trying to decelerate a large inertia load too quickly
The brake resistor is open circuit
OVERCURRENT
The motor current being drawn from the Trying to accelerate a large inertia load too quickly
Inverter is too high Trying to decelerate a large inertia load too quickly
Application of shock load to motor
Short circuit between motor phases
Short circuit between motor phase and earth
Motor output cables too long or too many parallel
motors connected to the Inverter
Fixed or auto boost levels are set too high
HEATSINK TEMP
The Inverter heatsink temperature is too The ambient air temperature is too high
high Poor ventilation or spacing between Inverters
EXTERNAL TRIP
User trip caused via control terminals +24V not present on external trip (e.g. terminal 10,
Macro 1).
INPUT 1 BREAK
A signal break has been detected on Analog input is incorrectly configured for 4-20mA
analog input 1 (terminal 2) operation
Break in external control wiring
INPUT 2 BREAK
A signal break has been detected on Analog input is incorrectly configured for 4-20mA
analog input 2 (terminal 4) operation
Break in external control wiring
MOTOR STALLED
The motor has stalled (not rotating) Motor loading too great
Current limit level is set too low
Stall trip duration is set too low
Fixed or auto boost levels are set too high
I*t TRIP
The motor current drawn from the Motor loading is too great
Inverter has exceeded the user set I*t I*t threshold level is set too low
levels
I*t upper limit level is set too low
I*t time duration is set to low
BRAKE RESISTOR
External dynamic braking resistor has Trying to decelerate a large inertia load too quickly or
been overloaded too often

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Trips and Fault Finding 7-3

Trip Message and Meaning Possible Reason for Trip
BRAKE SWITCH
Internal dynamic braking switch has Trying to decelerate a large inertia load too quickly or
been overloaded too often
OP STATION
Operator Station has been disconnected Operator Station accidentally disconnected from
from Inverter whilst Inverter is running in Inverter
local control
LOST COMMS
COMMS TIMEOUT parameter set too short
(refer to COMMS CONTROL, menu at level 4)
Table 7-1 Trip Messages
Automatic Trip Reset

Using the Operator Station, the Inverter can be configured to automatically attempt to reset a
trip when an attempt is made to start driving the motor, or after a preset time once the trip
condition has occurred. The following function blocks (MMI menus) are used to enable
automatic trip resets.
Auto Restart (Auto-Reset)
Sequencing Logic
Setting Trip Conditions

The following function blocks (MMI menus) are used to set trip conditions:
I/O Trips
I*t Trip
Stall Trip
Trips Status
Viewing Trip Conditions

The following function blocks (MMI menus) can be viewed to investigate trip conditions:
Sequencing Logic
Trips History
Trips Status
Checksum Fail
When the Inverter powers-up, non-volatile memory is checked to ensure that it has not been
corrupted. In the rare event of corruption being detected, the Inverter will not function. This
may occur when replacing the control board with an unprogrammed control board.
Inverter Indications
DEFAULT The failure is indicated by the HEALTH and RUN LEDs showing SHORT FLASH, .
Referring to Chapter 4: “Operating the Inverter” - Reading the Status LEDs, you will note that
this also indicates Re-configuration mode, but this mode (and hence the indication) is not
available to the Inverter unless controlled by an MMI or Comms link.
Because you are controlling the Inverter locally (no MMI or Comms link etc.), the unit must be
returned to SSD Drives for reprogramming, refer to Chapter 8: “Routine Maintenance and
Repair” for address details. However, if you have access to an Operator Station or suitable PC
programming tool, the unit can be reset.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
7-4 Trips and Fault Finding

Operator Station Indications (when connected)
The MMI displays the message opposite.
Acknowledge the message by pressing the E key. This
* CHECKSUM
1 FAIL*
action automatically loads and saves Macro 1 default 1
DEFAULTS LOADED
parameters and the ENGLISH 50Hz Product Code.
HEALTH LOCAL
If your unit was using a different Product Code or macro, SEQ REF
you must reload the Product Code of your choice, reload
the macro of your choice, and perform a Parameter Save (SAVE/COMMAND menu) in that
order.
If data will not save correctly, the Operator Station will display a failure message. In this case,
the Inverter has developed a fault and must be returned to Eurotherm Drives. Refer to Chapter 8:
“Routine Maintenance and Repair" for address details.
Fault Finding
Problem Possible Cause Remedy

Inverter will not power-up Fuse blown Check supply details, replace
with correct fuse.
Check Product Code against
Model No.
Faulty cabling Check all connections are
correct and secure.
Check cable continuity
Inverter fuse keeps blowing Faulty cabling or connections Check for problem and rectify
wrong before replacing with correct
fuse
Faulty Inverter Contact Eurotherm Drives
Cannot obtain HEALTH state Incorrect or no supply Check supply details
available
Motor will not run at switch on Motor jammed Stop the Inverter and clear the
jam
Motor runs and stops Motor becomes jammed Stop the Inverter and clear the
jam
Motor runs at full speed only Reversed tachogenerator or Check tachogenerator

open circuit tachogenerator connections
Open circuit speed reference Check terminal
potentiometer
Table 7-2 Fault Finding

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Routine Maintenance and Repair 8-1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
8
Routine Maintenance
Periodically inspect the Inverter for build-up of dust or obstructions that may affect ventilation
of the unit. Remove this using dry air.
Repair
There are no user-serviceable components.
IMPORTANT: MAKE NO ATTEMPT TO REPAIR THE UNIT - RETURN IT TO SSD DRIVES.
Saving Your Application Data

Although the Inverter retains saved settings during power-down, it would be wise for you to
keep your Operator Station. If your last SAVE TO OP function was made on this unit before the
fault occurred, then the Operator Station will still hold your application data. You can transfer
this back into the repaired unit, if necessary. You may, depending upon your knowledge of the
fault, attempt the back-up of your application data now, refer to Chapter 5: “The Operator
Station” - Copying an Application.
If the fault clearly lies within the Operator Station, then return it for repair.
Returning the Unit to SSD Drives

Please have the following information available:
• The model and serial number - see the unit’s rating label
• Details of the fault
Contact your nearest SSD Drives Service Centre to arrange return of the item.
You will be given a Returned Material Authorisation. Use this as a reference on all paperwork
you return with the faulty item. Pack and despatch the item in the original packing materials; or
at least an antistatic enclosure. Do not allow packaging chips to enter the unit.
Disposal
This product contains materials which are consignable waste under the Special Waste
Regulations 1996 which complies with the EC Hazardous Waste Directive - Directive
91/689/EEC.
We recommend you dispose of the appropriate materials in accordance with the valid
environmental control laws. The following table shows which materials can be recycled and
which have to be disposed of in a special way.
Material Recycle Disposal
metal yes no
plastics material yes no
printed circuit board no yes
The printed circuit board should be disposed of in one of two ways:

1. High temperature incineration (minimum temperature 1200°C) by an incinerator authorised
under parts A or B of the Environmental Protection Act
2. Disposal in an engineered land fill site that is licensed to take aluminium electrolytic
capacitors. Do not dispose of in a land fill site set aside for domestic waste.
Packaging
During transport our products are protected by suitable packaging. This is entirely
environmentally compatible and should be taken for central disposal as secondary raw material.
+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
8-2 Routine Maintenance and Repair

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Sequencing Logic 9-1

SEQUENCING LOGIC STATES
9
Principle State Machine

The Inverter’s reaction to commands is defined by a state machine. This determines which
commands provide the demanded action, and in which sequence.
Main Sequencing States

The main sequencing state of the unit is indicated by an enumerated value given by the
parameter MAIN SEQ STATE under SEQUENCING LOGIC menu at level 4.
Enumerated Main Seq State Standard Name Description
Value
0 NOT READY Not Ready To Switch On Power up initialisation, or
configuration mode. No
command will be accepted
1 START DISABLED Switch On Disabled The Inverter will not accept a
switch on command
2 START ENABLED Ready To Switch On The Inverter will accept a switch
on command
3 SWITCHED ON Switched On The Inverter’s stack is enabled
4 ENABLED Enabled The Inverter is enabled and
operational
5 F-STOP ACTIVE Fast-Stop Active Fast stop is active
6 TRIP ACTIVE Trip Active The Inverter is processing a trip
event
7 TRIPPED Tripped The Inverter is tripped awaiting
trip reset
Table 9-1 Enumerated Values for the SEQUENCING LOGIC Function Block
State Outputs of the SEQUENCING LOGIC Function Block

The following table shows the states of individual parameters for the SEQUENCING LOGIC
function block required to produce the condition of the MAIN SEQ STATE parameter.
NOT START START SWITCHED ENABLED F-STOP TRIP TRIPPED

READY DISABLED ENABLED ON ACTIVE ACTIVE
Tripped FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE
Running FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE
Jogging FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE Note 1 FALSE FALSE FALSE
Stopping FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE Note 2 TRUE FALSE FALSE
Output FALSE Depends Depends TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE
Contactor on on
previous previous
state state
Switch On FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE
Enable
Switched FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE
On
Ready FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE
Healthy TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE
O/P Note 3
Table 9-2 Parameter States for the MAIN SEQ STATE Parameter

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
9-2 Sequencing Logic

Note: 1. Jogging is set TRUE once the jog cycle has started, and remains TRUE until the
jog cycle has finished which is when either the stop delay has finished or
another mode is demanded.
2. Stopping is set TRUE during the stopping cycles commanded by either RUN
going low, JOG going low or if Fast Stop is active.
3. Once Run and Jog are both FALSE, HEALTHY O/P will be set TRUE.
Transition of States
The transition matrix describes what causes the transition from one state to another, for example
see no. 5 below: the transition from “Ready To Switch On” to “Trip Active” is triggered by
“TRIP” going TRUE.
Refer to the following table and state diagram.
Current State Next State Cause (FALSE to TRUE)
1 Power Up Not Ready To Switch On Reset OR initialise
2 Not Ready To Switch On Switch On Disabled Initialise complete AND NOT re-
configuration mode
3 Switch On Disabled Trip Active Trip
4 Switch On Disabled Ready To Switch On NOT Run AND NOT Jog AND /Fast-Stop
AND /Coast-Stop
5 Ready To Switch On Trip Active Trip
6 Ready To Switch On Switch On Disabled NOT /Coast-Stop OR NOT /Fast-Stop
7 Ready To Switch On Switched On Run OR Jog
8 Switched On Trip Active Trip
9 Switched On Switch On Disabled NOT /Coast-Stop OR NOT /Fast-Stop
10 Switched On Ready To Switch On NOT Run AND NOT Jog
11 Switched On Enabled Inverter Enable
12 Enabled Trip Active Trip
13 Enabled Switch On Disabled NOT /Coast Stop
14 Enabled Fast Stop Active NOT /Fast Stop
15 Enabled Switched On NOT Inverter Enable
16 Enabled Ready To Switch On NOT Run AND NOT Jog

AND stop sequence complete
17 Fast Stop Active Trip Active Trip
18 Fast Stop Active Switch On Disabled Fast Stop timer expired OR Fast Stop Mode
= Coast Stop OR Inverter at zero setpoint
19 Trip Active Tripped Stack quenched
20 Tripped Switch On Disabled NOT Trip AND Trip Reset 0->1 transition
Table 9-3 Transition Matrix

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

State Diagram
1 3,5,8,12,17
Not Ready To Switch Trip Active

On #1 #7
2 19
Tripped
#8
20
9
6
3
Switch On Disabled
#2
4
10
Ready To Switch On 5
#3
8
Switched On
#4
11
Run Jog
Ramp to zero
12
Delay
Enabled
#5
15 16 13 14
17
Fast Stop Active
Program Stop #6
18

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Communications Command
When sequencing is in the Remote Comms mode, the sequencing of the Inverter is controlled by
writing to the hidden parameter COMMS COMMAND (Tag 271). This parameter can only be
written to using a communications interface. The output parameter (Tag 273) COMMS
COMMAND of the COMMS CONTROL function block is provided as a diagnostic.
The COMMS COMMAND parameter is a 16-bit word based on standard fieldbus drive profiles.
Some bits are not implemented in this release (see “Supported” column of the table below).
Bit Name Description Supported Required Value

0 Switch On OFF1 Operational √
1 (Not) Disable Voltage OFF2 Coast Stop √
2 (Not) Quick Stop OFF3 Fast Stop √
3 Enable Operation √
4 Enable Ramp Output =0 to set ramp output to zero 1
5 Enable Ramp =0 to hold ramp 1
6 Enable Ramp Input =0 to set ramp input to zero 1
7 Reset Fault Reset on 0 to 1 transition √
8 0
9 0
10 Remote =1 to control remotely 1
11 0
12 0
13 0
14 0
15 0
Switch On
Replaces the RUN FWD, RUN REV and /STOP parameters of the SEQUENCING LOGIC
function block. When Set (=1) is the same as :
RUN FWD = TRUE
RUN REV = FALSE
/STOP = FALSE
When Cleared (= 0) is the same as :

RUN FWD = FALSE
RUN REV = FALSE
/STOP = FALSE
(Not) Disable Voltage

Replaces the /COAST STOP parameter of the SEQUENCING LOCIC function block.
When Set (=1) is the same as:
/COAST STOP = TRUE

/COAST STOP = FALSE

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

(Not) Quick Stop
Replaces the /FAST STOP parameter on the SEQUENCING LOGIC function block.
/FAST STOP = TRUE

/FAST STOP = FALSE
Enable Operation
Replaces the DRIVE ENABLE parameter on the SEQUENCING LOGIC function block.
DRIVE ENABLE = TRUE

DRIVE ENABLE = FALSE
Enable Ramp Output, Enable Ramp, Enable Ramp Input

Not implemented. The state of these bits must be set (=1) to allow this feature to be added in the
future.
Reset Fault
Replaces the REM TRIP RESET parameter on the SEQUENCING LOCIC function block.
REM TRIP RESET = TRUE

REM TRIP RESET = FALSE
Remote
Not implemented. It is intended to allow the PLC to toggle between local and remote. The state
of this must be set (=1) to allow this feature to be added in the future.
Example Commands
047F hexadecimal to RUN

047E hexadecimal to STOP

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Communications Status
The COMMS STATUS parameter (Tag 272) in the COMMS CONTROL function block
monitors the sequencing of the Inverter. It is a 16-bit word based on standard fieldbus drive
profiles. Some bits are not implemented in the initial release and are set to 0 (see “Supported”
column of the table below).
Bit Name Description Supported
0 Ready To Switch On √
1 Switched On Ready for operation (refer control bit 0) √
2 Operation Enabled (refer control bit 3) √
3 Fault Tripped √
4 (Not) Voltage Disabled OFF 2 Command pending √
5 (Not) Quick Stop OFF 3 Command pending √
6 Switch On Disable Switch On Inhibited √
7 Warning
8 SP / PV in Range
9 Remote = 1 if Drive will accept Command Word √
10 Setpoint Reached
11 Internal Limit Active
12
13
14
15
Ready To Switch On
Same as the SWITCH ON ENABLE output parameter of the SEQUENCING LOGIC function
block.
Switched On
Same as the SWITCHED ON output parameter of the SEQUENCING LOGIC function block.
Operation Enabled
Same as the RUNNING output parameter of the SEQUENCING LOGIC function block.
Fault
Same as the TRIPPED output parameter of the SEQUENCING LOGIC function block.
(Not) Voltage Disabled

If in REMOTE COMMS mode, this is the same as Bit 1 of the COMMS COMMAND
parameter. Otherwise it is the same as the /COAST STOP input parameter of the
SEQUENCING LOGIC function block.
(Not) Quick Stop

If in REMOTE COMMS mode, this is the same as Bit 2 of the COMMS COMMAND
parameter. Otherwise it is the same as the /FAST STOP input parameter of the SEQUENCING
LOGIC function block.
Switch On Disable
Set (=1) only when in START DISABLED state.
Remote
This bit is set (= 1) if the Inverter is in Remote mode AND the parameter REMOTE COMMS
SEL of the COMMS CONTROL function block is Set (= 1).

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Parameter Specification Table 10-1

PARAMETER SPECIFICATION TABLE
0
1
The headings for the Tag No. table are described below.
Tag A numeric identification of the parameter. It is used to identify the source and
destinations of internal links.
Name The parameter name as it appears on the MMI.
Block The menu page and function block under which the parameter is stored.
Type INT A numeric value that may be positive or negative. INT types may
have decimal places
BOOL A Boolean (bit) representing FALSE or TRUE
ENUM An enumerated value representing a selection
STRING An ASCII string
TAG A value representing a choice of TAG
D_TAG A value representing a choice of Destination tag as an internal
link
S_TAG A value representing a choice of Source tag as an internal link
WORD 16 Bit hexadecimal number
Range This varies with parameter type:
INT The upper and lower limits of the parameter, indicating the
parameter’s true, internally-held, number of decimal (a reduced
number of digits may be shown by the Operator Station).
BOOL 0 = FALSE, 1 = TRUE
ENUM A list of possible selections for that parameter
STRING Specified number of characters
TAG The tag number of any parameter
D_TAG The tag number of an input parameter
S_TAG The tag number of an input or output parameter.
(May be set to a negative value indicating a feedback link).
WORD 0000 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
ID Serial Communications Mnemonic:
Refer to Chapter 14: “Serial Communications”
Notes You can record your application’s settings here.
Output parameters are not saved in non-volatile memory.
1. This input parameter is not saved in non-volatile memory.
2. This parameter is automatically saved in non-volatile memory.
3. This parameter forms part of the motor configuration.
4. This parameter is not adjustable from the operator station.
5. This parameter cannot be the destination of a link.
6. This parameter cannot be the source of a link.
7. This parameter can only be written to when the Inverter is stopped.
8. This parameter can only be written to when the Inverter is in configuration
mode.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
10-2 Parameter Specification Table
Specification Table: Tag Number Order
Tag (MMI) Name Block Type Range ID Notes

1 LANGUAGE MENUS ENUM 0 : ENGLISH 01
1 : DEUTSCH
2 : FRANCAIS
3 : ESPANOL
3 VIEW LEVEL MENUS ENUM 0 : OPERATOR 03
1 : BASIC
2 : ADVANCED
4 ACTIVE TRIPS TRIPS STATUS WORD 04 Output
5 TRIP WARNINGS TRIPS STATUS WORD 05 Output
6 FIRST TRIP TRIPS STATUS ENUM 0 : NO TRIP 06 Output
1 : LINK OVERVOLTS
2 : LINK UNDERVOLT
3 : OVERCURRENT
4 : HEATSINK TEMP
5 : EXTERNAL TRIP
6 : INPUT 1 BREAK
7 : INPUT 2 BREAK
8 : MOTOR STALLED
9 : I*T TRIP
10 : BRAKE RESISTOR
11 : BRAKE SWITCH
12 : OP STATION
13 : LOST COMMS
7 ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD WORD 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 07 1, 5
8 CHANGE PASSWORD PASSWORD WORD 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 08 5
12 AIN 1 BREAK ENBL ANALOG INPUT 1 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 0c
13 AIN 1 TYPE ANALOG INPUT 1 ENUM 0 : 0..+10 V 0d 7
1 : +2..+10 V
2 : 0..+5 V
3 : +1..+5 V
4 : -10..+10 V
5 : 0..20 mA
6 : 4..20 mA
7 : 20..4 mA
8 : 20..0 mA
14 AIN 1 SCALE ANALOG INPUT 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 0e
15 AIN 1 OFFSET ANALOG INPUT 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 0f
16 AIN 1 VALUE ANALOG INPUT 1 INT xxx.xx % 0g Output
17 AIN 1 BREAK VAL ANALOG INPUT 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 0h
18 AIN 1 BREAK ANALOG INPUT 1 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 0i Output
21 AIN 2 BREAK ENBL ANALOG INPUT 2 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 0l
22 AIN 2 TYPE ANALOG INPUT 2 ENUM Same as tag 13 0m 7
23 AIN 2 SCALE ANALOG INPUT 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 0n
24 AIN 2 OFFSET ANALOG INPUT 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 0o
25 AIN 2 VALUE ANALOG INPUT 2 INT xxx.xx % 0p Output
26 AIN 2 BREAK VAL ANALOG INPUT 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 0q
27 AIN 2 BREAK ANALOG INPUT 2 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 0r Output
28 FLY SETPOINT FLY CATCHING INT xxx.xx % 0s Output
30 DIN 1 INVERT DIGITAL INPUT 1 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 0u
31 DIN 1 VALUE DIGITAL INPUT 1 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 0v Output
32 FLY SEARCH BOOST FLY CATCHING INT 0.00 to 50.00 % 0w
33 DIN 2 INVERT DIGITAL INPUT 2 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 0x
34 DIN 2 VALUE DIGITAL INPUT 2 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 0y Output
36 DIN 3 INVERT DIGITAL INPUT 3 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 10
37 DIN 3 VALUE DIGITAL INPUT 3 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 11 Output

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

44 COEFFICIENT B CUSTOM SCREEN 1 INT 1 to 30000 18
45 AOUT 1 VALUE ANALOG OUTPUT 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 19
46 AOUT 1 SCALE ANALOG OUTPUT 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 1a
47 AOUT 1 OFFSET ANALOG OUTPUT 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 1b
48 AOUT 1 ABS ANALOG OUTPUT 1 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 1c
49 AOUT 1 TYPE ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ENUM 0 : 0..+10 V 1d 7
1 : 0..20 mA
2 : 4..20 mA
51 DOUT 1 INVERT DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 1f
52 DOUT 1 VALUE DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 1g
53 LOW LIMIT CUSTOM SCREEN 1 INT -30000 to 30000 1h
54 DOUT 2 INVERT DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 1i
55 DOUT 2 VALUE DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 1j
57 MAX SPEED SETPOINT SCALE INT 0.0 to 480.0 Hz 1l 7
58 SCALE INPUT SETPOINT SCALE INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 1m
59 SCALE OUTPUT SETPOINT SCALE INT xxx.xx %lf 1n Output
60 SLEW ENABLE SLEW RATE LIMIT BOOL FALSE / TRUE 1o
61 SLEW DECEL LIMIT SLEW RATE LIMIT INT 12.0 to 1200.0 Hz/s 1p
62 SLEW ACCEL LIMIT SLEW RATE LIMIT INT 12.0 to 1200.0 Hz/s 1q
64 FULL LOAD CALIB CURRENT FEEDBACK INT 0.0 to 1000.0 A 1s 3, 7
65 NO LOAD CALIB CURRENT FEEDBACK INT 0.0 to 1000.0 A 1t 3, 7
66 MOTOR CURRENT CURRENT FEEDBACK INT xxx.xh % (h) 1u Output
67 MOTOR CURRENT CURRENT FEEDBACK INT xxxx.x A 1v Output
68 I MAGNETISING CURRENT FEEDBACK INT xxx.xh % (h) 1w Output
69 I MAGNETISING CURRENT FEEDBACK INT xxxx.x A 1x Output
70 I TORQUE CURRENT FEEDBACK INT xxx.xh % (h) 1y Output
71 I TORQUE CURRENT FEEDBACK INT xxxx.x A 1z Output
72 LOAD CURRENT FEEDBACK INT xxx.xh % (h) 20 Output
73 FIELD CURRENT FEEDBACK INT xxx.xh % (h) 21 Output
74 TAG NO CUSTOM SCREEN 1 TAG 0 to 777 22 5
75 DC LINK VOLTS DYNAMIC BRAKING INT xxxx.x V 23 Output
77 BRAKE RESISTANCE DYNAMIC BRAKING INT 1 to 1000 Ohm 25 7
78 BRAKE POWER DYNAMIC BRAKING INT 0.1 to 510.0 kW 26 7
79 BRAKE 1S RATING DYNAMIC BRAKING INT 1 to 40 27 7
80 BRAKE ENABLE DYNAMIC BRAKING BOOL FALSE / TRUE 28
81 BRAKING DYNAMIC BRAKING BOOL FALSE / TRUE 29 Output
82 SLIP ENABLE SLIP COMP BOOL FALSE / TRUE 2a 7
83 NAMEPLATE RPM SLIP COMP INT 0 to 15000 n/min 2b 3, 7
84 MOTOR POLES SLIP COMP ENUM 0:2 2c 3, 7
1:4
2:6
3:8
4 : 10
5 : 12
85 SLIP MOTOR LIMIT SLIP COMP INT 0.0 to 600.0 n/min 2d 3
86 SLIP REGEN LIMIT SLIP COMP INT 0.0 to 600.0 n/min 2e 3
89 A DIN 1 INVERT ANALOG DIGIN 1 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 2h
90 A DIN 1 VALUE ANALOG DIGIN 1 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 2i Output
91 A DIN 1 LEVEL ANALOG DIGIN 1 INT 0.00 to 100.00 % 2j
92 A DIN 1 HYST ANALOG DIGIN 1 INT 0.00 to 50.00 % 2k
93 STARTUP SCREEN OPERATOR MENU INT 0 to 15 2l
94 A DIN 2 INVERT ANALOG DIGIN 2 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 2m
95 A DIN 2 VALUE ANALOG DIGIN 2 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 2n Output

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

96 A DIN 2 LEVEL ANALOG DIGIN 2 INT 0.00 to 100.00 % 2o
97 A DIN 2 HYST ANALOG DIGIN 2 INT 0.00 to 50.00 % 2p
98 RANDOM PATTERN PATTERN GEN BOOL FALSE / TRUE 2q 7
99 PATTERN GEN FREQ PATTERN GEN ENUM 0 : 3 kHz 2r 7
1 : 6 kHz
2 : 9 kHz
100 DEFLUX DELAY PATTERN GEN INT 0.1 to 10.0 s 2s 3
101 HIGH LIMIT CUSTOM SCREEN 1 INT -30000 to 30000 2t
102 GROUP ID (GID) SYSTEM PORT (P3) INT 0 to 9 2u
103 UNIT ID (UID) SYSTEM PORT (P3) INT 0 to 15 2v
104 V/F SHAPE FLUXING ENUM 0 : LINEAR LAW 2w 7
1 : FAN LAW
105 V/F SCALE FLUXING INT 0.00 to 100.00 % 2x 7
106 BASE FREQUENCY FLUXING INT 7.5 to 480.0 Hz 2y
107 FIXED BOOST FLUXING INT 0.00 to 25.00 % 2z 3
108 AUTO BOOST FLUXING INT 0.00 to 25.00 % 30 3
112 BASE VOLTS VOLTAGE CONTROL INT 0.00 to 115.47 % 34
113 LIMIT FREQUENCY FLUXING ENUM 0 : 120 Hz 35 7
1 : 240 Hz
2 : 480 Hz
115 OP DATABASE OP STATION BOOL FALSE / TRUE 37 Output
116 AUTO BACKUP OP STATION BOOL FALSE / TRUE 38
118 VECTOR ENABLE VECTOR FLUXING BOOL FALSE / TRUE 3a 7
119 STATOR RES VECTOR FLUXING INT 0.00 to 100.00 Ohm 3b 3, 7
120 LEAKAGE INDUC VECTOR FLUXING INT 0.0 to 1000.0 mH 3c 3, 7
121 MUTUAL INDUC VECTOR FLUXING INT 0.0 to 1000.0 mH 3d 3, 7
122 MOTOR VOLTS VOLTAGE CONTROL INT 198.0 to 550.0 V 3e 3
124 MOTOR VECTOR FLUXING ENUM 0 : DELTA 3g 3, 7
CONNECTION 1 : STAR
125 FORMULA CUSTOM SCREEN 1 ENUM 0 : A/B * X + C 3h
1 : A/B * (X+C)
2 : A/(B * X) + C
3 : A/(B * (X+C))
126 FINAL STOP RATE STOP INT 12 to 4800 Hz/s 3i
127 ENABLED KEYS OP STATION WORD 3j
128 STB ENABLE STABILISATION BOOL FALSE / TRUE 3k
130 INPUT A VALUE FUNC 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 3m
131 INPUT B VALUE FUNC 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 3n
132 INPUT C VALUE FUNC 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 3o
133 OUTPUT VALUE FUNC 1 INT xxx.xx % 3p Output

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

134 TYPE VALUE FUNC 1 ENUM 0 : IF(C) -A 3q
1 : ABS(A+B+C)
2 : SWITCH(A,B)
3 : (A*B)/C
4 : A+B+C
5 : A-B-C
6 : B<=A<=C
7 : A>B+/-C
8 : A>=B
9 : ABS(A)>B+/-C
10 : ABS(A)>=B
11 : A(1+B)
12 : IF(C) HOLD(A)
13 : BINARY DECODE
14 : ON DELAY
15 : OFF DELAY
16 : TIMER
17 : MINIMUM PULSE
18 : PULSE TRAIN
19 : WINDOW
20 : UP/DWN COUNTER
21 : (A*B)/C ROUND
22 : WINDOW NO HYST
135 INPUT A VALUE FUNC 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 3r
136 INPUT B VALUE FUNC 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 3s
137 INPUT C VALUE FUNC 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 3t
138 OUTPUT VALUE FUNC 2 INT xxx.xx % 3u Output
139 TYPE VALUE FUNC 2 ENUM Same as tag 134 3v
140 INPUT A VALUE FUNC 3 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 3w
141 INPUT B VALUE FUNC 3 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 3x
142 INPUT C VALUE FUNC 3 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 3y
143 OUTPUT VALUE FUNC 3 INT xxx.xx % 3z Output
144 TYPE VALUE FUNC 3 ENUM Same as tag 134 40
145 INPUT A VALUE FUNC 4 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 41
146 INPUT B VALUE FUNC 4 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 42
147 INPUT C VALUE FUNC 4 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 43
148 OUTPUT VALUE FUNC 4 INT xxx.xx % 44 Output
149 TYPE VALUE FUNC 4 ENUM Same as tag 134 45
150 INPUT A VALUE FUNC 5 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 46
151 INPUT B VALUE FUNC 5 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 47
152 INPUT C VALUE FUNC 5 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 48
153 OUTPUT VALUE FUNC 5 INT xxx.xx % 49 Output
154 TYPE VALUE FUNC 5 ENUM Same as tag 134 4a
155 INPUT A VALUE FUNC 6 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4b
156 INPUT B VALUE FUNC 6 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4c
157 INPUT C VALUE FUNC 6 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4d
158 OUTPUT VALUE FUNC 6 INT xxx.xx % 4e Output
159 TYPE VALUE FUNC 6 ENUM Same as tag 134 4f
160 INPUT A VALUE FUNC 7 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4g
161 INPUT B VALUE FUNC 7 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4h
162 INPUT C VALUE FUNC 7 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4i
163 OUTPUT VALUE FUNC 7 INT xxx.xx % 4j Output
164 TYPE VALUE FUNC 7 ENUM Same as tag 134 4k
165 INPUT A VALUE FUNC 8 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4l
166 INPUT B VALUE FUNC 8 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4m
167 INPUT C VALUE FUNC 8 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4n
168 OUTPUT VALUE FUNC 8 INT xxx.xx % 4o Output
169 TYPE VALUE FUNC 8 ENUM Same as tag 134 4p
170 INPUT A VALUE FUNC 9 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4q

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

171 INPUT B VALUE FUNC 9 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4r
172 INPUT C VALUE FUNC 9 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4s
173 OUTPUT VALUE FUNC 9 INT xxx.xx % 4t Output
174 TYPE VALUE FUNC 9 ENUM Same as tag 134 4u
175 INPUT A VALUE FUNC 10 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4v
176 INPUT B VALUE FUNC 10 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4w
177 INPUT C VALUE FUNC 10 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 4x
178 OUTPUT VALUE FUNC 10 INT xxx.xx % 4y Output
179 TYPE VALUE FUNC 10 ENUM Same as tag 134 4z
180 INPUT A LOGIC FUNC 1 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 50
181 INPUT B LOGIC FUNC 1 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 51
182 INPUT C LOGIC FUNC 1 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 52
183 OUTPUT LOGIC FUNC 1 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 53 Output
184 TYPE LOGIC FUNC 1 ENUM 0 : NOT(A) 54
1 : AND(A,B,C)
2 : NAND(A,B,C)
3 : OR(A,B,C)
4 : NOR(A,B,C)
5 : XOR(A,B)
6 : 0-1 EDGE(A)
7 : 1-0 EDGE(A)
8 : AND(A,B,!C)
9 : OR(A,B,!C)
10 : S FLIP-FLOP
11 : R FLIP-FLOP
189 TYPE LOGIC FUNC 2 ENUM Same as tag 184 59
190 INPUT A LOGIC FUNC 3 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5a
191 INPUT B LOGIC FUNC 3 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5b
192 INPUT C LOGIC FUNC 3 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5c
193 OUTPUT LOGIC FUNC 3 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5d Output
194 TYPE LOGIC FUNC 3 ENUM Same as tag 184 5e
195 INPUT A LOGIC FUNC 4 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5f
196 INPUT B LOGIC FUNC 4 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5g
197 INPUT C LOGIC FUNC 4 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5h
198 OUTPUT LOGIC FUNC 4 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5i Output
199 TYPE LOGIC FUNC 4 ENUM Same as tag 184 5j
200 INPUT A LOGIC FUNC 5 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5k
201 INPUT B LOGIC FUNC 5 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5l
202 INPUT C LOGIC FUNC 5 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5m
203 OUTPUT LOGIC FUNC 5 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5n Output
204 TYPE LOGIC FUNC 5 ENUM Same as tag 184 5o
205 INPUT A LOGIC FUNC 6 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5p
206 INPUT B LOGIC FUNC 6 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5q
207 INPUT C LOGIC FUNC 6 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5r
208 OUTPUT LOGIC FUNC 6 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5s Output
209 TYPE LOGIC FUNC 6 ENUM Same as tag 184 5t
210 INPUT A LOGIC FUNC 7 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5u
211 INPUT B LOGIC FUNC 7 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5v
212 INPUT C LOGIC FUNC 7 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5w
213 OUTPUT LOGIC FUNC 7 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5x Output
214 TYPE LOGIC FUNC 7 ENUM Same as tag 184 5y
215 INPUT A LOGIC FUNC 8 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 5z

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

226 INPUT B LOGIC FUNC 10 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 6a
227 INPUT C LOGIC FUNC 10 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 6b
228 OUTPUT LOGIC FUNC 10 BOOL FALSE / TRUE 6c Output
229 TYPE LOGIC FUNC 10 ENUM Same as tag 184 6d
230 OP VERSION OP STATION WORD 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 6e Output
231 DISABLED TRIPS TRIPS STATUS WORD 6f
234 EXTERNAL TRIP I/O TRIPS BOOL FALSE / TRUE 6i 1
235 INPUT 1 BREAK I/O TRIPS BOOL FALSE / TRUE 6j 1
236 INPUT 2 BREAK I/O TRIPS BOOL FALSE / TRUE 6k 1
237 I*T THRESHOLD I*T TRIP INT 50.00 to 105.00 % 6l
238 I*T TIME I*T TRIP INT 5 to 60 s 6m
239 I*T UPPER LIMIT I*T TRIP INT 50.00 to 150.00 % 6n
240 STALL LIMIT STALL TRIP INT 50.00 to 150.00 % 6o
241 STALL TIME STALL TRIP INT 0.1 to 3000.0 s 6p
242 POWER FACTOR CURRENT FEEDBACK INT 0.50 to 0.95 6q 3, 7
243 TRIM IN LOCAL REFERENCE BOOL FALSE / TRUE 6r
244 RAMP TYPE SYSTEM RAMP ENUM 0 : LINEAR 6s
1:S
245 REMOTE SETPOINT REFERENCE INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 6t
246 JOG SETPOINT JOG INT 0.00 to 100.00 % 6u
247 LOCAL SETPOINT REFERENCE INT 0.00 to 100.00 % 6v Output, 2
248 SPEED TRIM REFERENCE INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 6w
249 REMOTE REVERSE REFERENCE BOOL FALSE / TRUE 6x
250 LOCAL REVERSE REFERENCE BOOL FALSE / TRUE 6y Output, 2
252 MAX SPEED CLAMP REFERENCE INT 0.00 to 100.00 % 70
253 MIN SPEED CLAMP REFERENCE INT -100.00 to 0.00 % 71
254 SPEED SETPOINT REFERENCE INT xxx.xh % (h) 72 Output
255 SPEED DEMAND REFERENCE INT xxx.xh % (h) 73 Output
256 REVERSE REFERENCE BOOL FALSE / TRUE 74 Output
257 REMOTE REF LOCAL CONTROL BOOL FALSE / TRUE 75 Output
258 RAMP ACCEL RATE SYSTEM RAMP INT 0.0 to 600.0 s 76
259 RAMP DECEL RATE SYSTEM RAMP INT 0.0 to 600.0 s 77
260 RAMP HOLD SYSTEM RAMP BOOL FALSE / TRUE 78
261 JOG ACCEL RATE JOG INT 0.0 to 600.0 s 79
262 JOG DECEL RATE JOG INT 0.0 to 600.0 s 7a
263 STOP RATE STOP INT 0.0 to 600.0 s 7b
264 FAST STOP RATE STOP INT 0.0 to 600.0 s 7c
265 REF MODES LOCAL CONTROL ENUM 0 : LOCAL/REMOTE 7d 7
1 : LOCAL ONLY
2 : REMOTE ONLY
266 STOP ZERO SPEED STOP INT 0.00 to 100.00 % 7e
267 RAMP SYM RATE SYSTEM RAMP INT 0.0 to 600.0 s 7f
268 RAMP SYM MODE SYSTEM RAMP BOOL FALSE / TRUE 7g

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

269 COMMS SETPOINT REFERENCE INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 7h 1, 4, 5
270 COMMS REF COMMS CONTROL BOOL FALSE / TRUE 7i Output
272 COMMS STATUS COMMS CONTROL WORD 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 7k Output
273 COMMS COMMAND COMMS CONTROL WORD 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 7l Output
274 HEALTHY SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 7m Output
275 FAST STOP LIMIT STOP INT 0.0 to 3000.0 s 7n
276 DRIVE ENABLE SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 7o
277 /FAST STOP SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 7p
278 /COAST STOP SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 7q
279 RUN STOP MODE STOP ENUM 0 : RAMPED 7r 7
1 : COAST
2 : DC INJECTION
280 JOG SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 7s 1
281 SEQ DIRECTION LOCAL CONTROL BOOL FALSE / TRUE 7t 7
282 REM TRIP RESET SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 7u 1
283 POWER UP START SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 7v
284 STOP DELAY STOP INT 0.000 to 30.000 s 7w
285 RUNNING SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 7x Output
286 OUTPUT CONTACTOR SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 7y Output
287 READY SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 7z Output
288 SWITCH ON ENABLE SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 80 Output
289 TRIPPED SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 81 Output
290 TRIP RST BY RUN SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 82
291 RUN FWD SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 83 1
292 RUN REV SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 84 1
293 /STOP SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 85 1
294 REMOTE REVERSE SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 86
295 COMMS SEQ COMMS CONTROL BOOL FALSE / TRUE 87 Output
296 REMOTE REV OUT SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 88 Output
297 REMOTE SEQ LOCAL CONTROL BOOL FALSE / TRUE 89 Output
298 SEQ MODES LOCAL CONTROL ENUM Same as tag 265 8a 7
299 POWER UP MODE LOCAL CONTROL ENUM 0 : LOCAL 8b
1 : REMOTE
2 : AUTOMATIC
300 REMOTE COMMS SEL COMMS CONTROL BOOL FALSE / TRUE 8c 7
301 MAIN SEQ STATE SEQUENCING LOGIC ENUM 0 : NOT READY 8d Output
1 : START DISABLED
2 : START ENABLED
3 : SWITCHED ON
4 : ENABLED
5 : F-STOP ACTIVE
6 : TRIP ACTIVE
7 : TRIPPED
302 JOGGING SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 8e Output
303 STOPPING SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 8f Output
304 FAST STOP MODE STOP ENUM 0 : RAMPED 8g 7
1 : COAST
305 SYSTEM RESET SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 8h Output
306 SWITCHED ON SEQUENCING LOGIC BOOL FALSE / TRUE 8i Output
307 REMOTE SEQ MODES COMMS CONTROL ENUM 0 : TERMINALS/COMMS 8j 7
1 : TERMINALS ONLY
2 : COMMS ONLY
308 REMOTE REF MODES COMMS CONTROL ENUM Same as tag 307 8k 7
309 COMMS TIMEOUT COMMS CONTROL INT 0.0 to 600.0 s 8l
310 PID SETPOINT PID INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 8m
311 PID ENABLE PID BOOL FALSE / TRUE 8n
312 PID INTEGRAL OFF PID BOOL FALSE / TRUE 8o

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

313 PID P GAIN PID INT 0.0 to 100.0 8p
314 PID I TIME CONST PID INT 0.01 to 100.00 s 8q
315 PID D TIME CONST PID INT 0.000 to 10.000 s 8r
316 PID FILTER TC PID INT 0.000 to 10.000 s 8s
317 PID OUT POS LIM PID INT 0.00 to 105.00 % 8t
318 PID OUT NEG LIM PID INT -105.00 to 0.00 % 8u
319 PID OUT SCALING PID INT -3.0000 to 3.0000 % 8v
320 PID OUTPUT PID INT xxx.xx % 8w Output
321 COEFFICIENT A CUSTOM SCREEN 1 INT -30000 to 30000 8x
322 COEFFICIENT C CUSTOM SCREEN 1 INT -30000 to 30000 8y
323 UNITS CUSTOM SCREEN 1 STRING 5 characters 8z 5
324 NAME CUSTOM SCREEN 1 STRING 16 characters 90 5
325 RAISE/LOWER OUT RAISE/LOWER INT xxx.xx % 91 Output, 2
326 RL RAMP RATE RAISE/LOWER INT 0.0 to 600.0 s 92
327 RAISE INPUT RAISE/LOWER BOOL FALSE / TRUE 93
328 LOWER INPUT RAISE/LOWER BOOL FALSE / TRUE 94
329 RL MIN VALUE RAISE/LOWER INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 95
330 RL MAX VALUE RAISE/LOWER INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 96
331 RL RESET VALUE RAISE/LOWER INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 97
332 RL RESET RAISE/LOWER BOOL FALSE / TRUE 98
334 DECIMAL PLACE CUSTOM SCREEN 1 ENUM 0 : XXXXX. 9a
1 : XXXX.X
2 : XXX.XX
3 : XX.XXX
4 : X.XXXX
5 : XXXX._
6 : XXX.X_
7 : XX.XX_
8 : X.XXX_
335 MIN SPEED OUTPUT MINIMUM SPEED INT xxx.xx % 9b Output
336 MIN SPEED INPUT MINIMUM SPEED INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 9c
337 MIN SPEED MINIMUM SPEED INT -100.00 to 100.00 % 9d
338 MIN SPEED MODE MINIMUM SPEED ENUM 0 : PROP. W/MIN. 9e
1 : LINEAR
339 CONFIGURATION ID OP STATION STRING 16 characters 9f 5
340 SKIP FREQ INPUT SKIP FREQUENCIES INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 9g
341 SKIP FREQ BAND 1 SKIP FREQUENCIES INT 0.0 to 480.0 Hz 9h
342 SKIP FREQUENCY 1 SKIP FREQUENCIES INT 0.0 to 480.0 Hz 9i
343 SKIP FREQUENCY 2 SKIP FREQUENCIES INT 0.0 to 480.0 Hz 9j
344 SKIP FREQUENCY 3 SKIP FREQUENCIES INT 0.0 to 480.0 Hz 9k
345 SKIP FREQUENCY 4 SKIP FREQUENCIES INT 0.0 to 480.0 Hz 9l
346 SKIP FREQ OUTPUT SKIP FREQUENCIES INT xxx.xx % 9m Output
347 PRESET 1 INPUT 0 PRESET 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 9n
348 PRESET 1 INPUT 1 PRESET 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 9o
349 PRESET 1 INPUT 2 PRESET 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 9p
350 PRESET 1 INPUT 3 PRESET 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 9q
351 PRESET 1 INPUT 4 PRESET 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 9r
352 PRESET 1 INPUT 5 PRESET 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 9s
353 PRESET 1 INPUT 6 PRESET 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 9t
354 PRESET 1 INPUT 7 PRESET 1 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 9u

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

355 PRESET 1 SELECT PRESET 1 ENUM 0 : INPUT 0 9v
1 : INPUT 1
2 : INPUT 2
3 : INPUT 3
4 : INPUT 4
5 : INPUT 5
6 : INPUT 6
7 : INPUT 7
356 PRESET 1 OUTPUT1 PRESET 1 INT xxx.xx % 9w Output
357 ZERO SPEED LEVEL ZERO SPEED INT 0.00 to 100.00 % 9x
358 ZERO SPEED IN ZERO SPEED INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 9y
359 ZERO SPEED BAND ZERO SPEED INT -300.00 to 300.00 % 9z
360 AT ZERO SPEED ZERO SPEED BOOL FALSE / TRUE a0 Output
361 PROTECT LOCAL SP PASSWORD BOOL FALSE / TRUE a1
362 SKIP FREQ INPUT SKIP FREQUENCIES INT xxxx.x Hz a2 Output
363 SKIP FREQ OUTPUT SKIP FREQUENCIES INT xxxx.x Hz a3 Output
364 PROTECT OP MENU PASSWORD BOOL FALSE / TRUE a4
365 MOTOR I LIMIT CURRENT LIMIT INT 0.00 to 150.00 % a5
366 FEEDBACK SOURCE CURRENT LIMIT ENUM 0 : CURRENT a6 7
1 : LOAD
370 CURRENT LIMITING CURRENT LIMIT BOOL FALSE / TRUE aa Output
371 TAG NO CUSTOM SCREEN 2 TAG 0 to 777 ab 5
372 PRESET 1 OUTPUT2 PRESET 1 INT xxx.xx % ac Output
373 PRESET 2 OUTPUT2 PRESET 2 INT xxx.xx % ad Output
374 PRESET 3 OUTPUT2 PRESET 3 INT xxx.xx % ae Output
375 COEFFICIENT A CUSTOM SCREEN 2 INT -30000 to 30000 af
376 COEFFICIENT C CUSTOM SCREEN 2 INT -30000 to 30000 ag
377 UNITS CUSTOM SCREEN 2 STRING 5 characters ah 5
378 NAME CUSTOM SCREEN 2 STRING 16 characters ai 5
379 DECIMAL PLACE CUSTOM SCREEN 2 ENUM Same as tag 334 aj
380 PRESET 2 INPUT 0 PRESET 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ak
381 PRESET 2 INPUT 1 PRESET 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % al
382 PRESET 2 INPUT 2 PRESET 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % am
383 PRESET 2 INPUT 3 PRESET 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % an
384 PRESET 2 INPUT 4 PRESET 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ao
385 PRESET 2 INPUT 5 PRESET 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ap
386 PRESET 2 INPUT 6 PRESET 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % aq
387 PRESET 2 INPUT 7 PRESET 2 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ar
388 PRESET 2 SELECT PRESET 2 ENUM Same as tag 355 as
389 PRESET 2 OUTPUT1 PRESET 2 INT xxx.xx % at Output
390 PRESET 3 INPUT 0 PRESET 3 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % au
391 PRESET 3 INPUT 1 PRESET 3 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % av
392 PRESET 3 INPUT 2 PRESET 3 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % aw
393 PRESET 3 INPUT 3 PRESET 3 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ax
394 PRESET 3 INPUT 4 PRESET 3 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ay
395 PRESET 3 INPUT 5 PRESET 3 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % az
396 PRESET 3 INPUT 6 PRESET 3 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % b0
397 PRESET 3 INPUT 7 PRESET 3 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % b1
398 PRESET 3 SELECT PRESET 3 ENUM Same as tag 355 b2
399 PRESET 3 OUTPUT1 PRESET 3 INT xxx.xx % b3 Output
400 SOURCE 1 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 b4 5, 8
401 DESTINATION 1 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 b5 5, 8

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

406 SOURCE 4 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 ba 5, 8
407 DESTINATION 4 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 bb 5, 8
408 SOURCE 5 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 bc 5, 8
409 DESTINATION 5 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 bd 5, 8
410 SOURCE 6 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 be 5, 8
411 DESTINATION 6 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 bf 5, 8
412 SOURCE 7 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 bg 5, 8
413 DESTINATION 7 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 bh 5, 8
414 SOURCE 8 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 bi 5, 8
415 DESTINATION 8 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 bj 5, 8
416 SOURCE 9 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 bk 5, 8
417 DESTINATION 9 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 bl 5, 8
418 SOURCE 10 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 bm 5, 8
419 DESTINATION 10 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 bn 5, 8
420 SOURCE 11 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 bo 5, 8
421 DESTINATION 11 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 bp 5, 8
422 SOURCE 12 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 bq 5, 8
423 DESTINATION 12 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 br 5, 8
424 SOURCE 13 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 bs 5, 8
425 DESTINATION 13 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 bt 5, 8
426 SOURCE 14 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 bu 5, 8
427 DESTINATION 14 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 bv 5, 8
428 SOURCE 15 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 bw 5, 8
429 DESTINATION 15 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 bx 5, 8
430 SOURCE 16 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 by 5, 8
431 DESTINATION 16 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 bz 5, 8
432 SOURCE 17 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 c0 5, 8
433 DESTINATION 17 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 c1 5, 8
442 SOURCE 22 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 ca 5, 8
443 DESTINATION 22 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 cb 5, 8
444 SOURCE 23 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 cc 5, 8
445 DESTINATION 23 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 cd 5, 8
446 SOURCE 24 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 ce 5, 8
447 DESTINATION 24 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 cf 5, 8
448 SOURCE 25 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 cg 5, 8
449 DESTINATION 25 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 ch 5, 8
450 SOURCE 26 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 ci 5, 8
451 DESTINATION 26 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 cj 5, 8
452 SOURCE 27 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 ck 5, 8
453 DESTINATION 27 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 cl 5, 8
454 SOURCE 28 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 cm 5, 8
455 DESTINATION 28 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 cn 5, 8
456 SOURCE 29 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 co 5, 8
457 DESTINATION 29 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 cp 5, 8

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

458 SOURCE 30 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 cq 5, 8
459 DESTINATION 30 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 cr 5, 8
460 SOURCE 31 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 cs 5, 8
461 DESTINATION 31 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 ct 5, 8
462 SOURCE 32 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 cu 5, 8
463 DESTINATION 32 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 cv 5, 8
464 SOURCE 33 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 cw 5, 8
465 DESTINATION 33 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 cx 5, 8
466 SOURCE 34 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 cy 5, 8
467 DESTINATION 34 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 cz 5, 8
468 SOURCE 35 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 d0 5, 8
469 DESTINATION 35 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 d1 5, 8
478 SOURCE 40 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 da 5, 8
479 DESTINATION 40 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 db 5, 8
480 SOURCE 41 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 dc 5, 8
481 DESTINATION 41 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 dd 5, 8
482 SOURCE 42 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 de 5, 8
483 DESTINATION 42 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 df 5, 8
484 SOURCE 43 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 dg 5, 8
485 DESTINATION 43 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 dh 5, 8
486 SOURCE 44 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 di 5, 8
487 DESTINATION 44 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 dj 5, 8
488 SOURCE 45 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 dk 5, 8
489 DESTINATION 45 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 dl 5, 8
490 SOURCE 46 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 dm 5, 8
491 DESTINATION 46 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 dn 5, 8
492 SOURCE 47 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 do 5, 8
493 DESTINATION 47 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 dp 5, 8
494 SOURCE 48 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 dq 5, 8
495 DESTINATION 48 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 dr 5, 8
496 SOURCE 49 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 ds 5, 8
497 DESTINATION 49 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 dt 5, 8
498 SOURCE 50 LINKS S_TAG -787 to 787 du 5, 8
499 DESTINATION 50 LINKS D_TAG 0 to 787 dv 5, 8
500 TRIP 1 (NEWEST) TRIPS HISTORY ENUM Same as tag 6 dw Output, 2
501 TRIP 2 TRIPS HISTORY ENUM Same as tag 6 dx Output, 2
502 TRIP 3 TRIPS HISTORY ENUM Same as tag 6 dy Output, 2
503 TRIP 4 TRIPS HISTORY ENUM Same as tag 6 dz Output, 2
504 TRIP 5 TRIPS HISTORY ENUM Same as tag 6 e0 Output, 2
509 TRIP 10 (OLDEST) TRIPS HISTORY ENUM Same as tag 6 e5 Output, 2
510 PRESET 4 INPUT 0 PRESET 4 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % e6

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

514 PRESET 4 INPUT 4 PRESET 4 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ea
515 PRESET 4 INPUT 5 PRESET 4 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % eb
516 PRESET 4 INPUT 6 PRESET 4 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ec
517 PRESET 4 INPUT 7 PRESET 4 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ed
518 PRESET 4 SELECT PRESET 4 ENUM Same as tag 355 ee
519 PRESET 4 OUTPUT1 PRESET 4 INT xxx.xx % ef Output
520 PRESET 4 OUTPUT2 PRESET 4 INT xxx.xx % eg Output
521 PRESET 5 INPUT 0 PRESET 5 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % eh
522 PRESET 5 INPUT 1 PRESET 5 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ei
523 PRESET 5 INPUT 2 PRESET 5 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ej
524 PRESET 5 INPUT 3 PRESET 5 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ek
525 PRESET 5 INPUT 4 PRESET 5 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % el
526 PRESET 5 INPUT 5 PRESET 5 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % em
527 PRESET 5 INPUT 6 PRESET 5 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % en
528 PRESET 5 INPUT 7 PRESET 5 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % eo
529 PRESET 5 SELECT PRESET 5 ENUM Same as tag 355 ep
530 PRESET 5 OUTPUT1 PRESET 5 INT xxx.xx % eq Output
531 PRESET 5 OUTPUT2 PRESET 5 INT xxx.xx % er Output
532 PRESET 6 INPUT 0 PRESET 6 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % es
533 PRESET 6 INPUT 1 PRESET 6 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % et
534 PRESET 6 INPUT 2 PRESET 6 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % eu
535 PRESET 6 INPUT 3 PRESET 6 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ev
536 PRESET 6 INPUT 4 PRESET 6 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ew
537 PRESET 6 INPUT 5 PRESET 6 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ex
538 PRESET 6 INPUT 6 PRESET 6 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ey
539 PRESET 6 INPUT 7 PRESET 6 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ez
540 PRESET 6 SELECT PRESET 6 ENUM Same as tag 355 f0
541 PRESET 6 OUTPUT1 PRESET 6 INT xxx.xx % f1 Output
542 PRESET 6 OUTPUT2 PRESET 6 INT xxx.xx % f2 Output
543 PRESET 7 INPUT 0 PRESET 7 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % f3
550 PRESET 7 INPUT 7 PRESET 7 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % fa
551 PRESET 7 SELECT PRESET 7 ENUM Same as tag 355 fb
552 PRESET 7 OUTPUT1 PRESET 7 INT xxx.xx % fc Output
553 PRESET 7 OUTPUT2 PRESET 7 INT xxx.xx % fd Output
554 PRESET 8 INPUT 0 PRESET 8 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % fe
555 PRESET 8 INPUT 1 PRESET 8 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % ff
556 PRESET 8 INPUT 2 PRESET 8 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % fg
557 PRESET 8 INPUT 3 PRESET 8 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % fh
558 PRESET 8 INPUT 4 PRESET 8 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % fi
559 PRESET 8 INPUT 5 PRESET 8 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % fj
560 PRESET 8 INPUT 6 PRESET 8 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % fk
561 PRESET 8 INPUT 7 PRESET 8 INT -300.00 to 300.00 % fl
562 PRESET 8 SELECT PRESET 8 ENUM Same as tag 355 fm
563 PRESET 8 OUTPUT1 PRESET 8 INT xxx.xx % fn Output

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

564 PRESET 8 OUTPUT2 PRESET 8 INT xxx.xx % fo Output
565 ENCODER MODE ENCODER ENUM 0 : QUADRATURE fp
1 : CLOCK/DIR
2 : CLOCK
566 ENCODER LINES ENCODER INT 1 to 10000 fq 3
567 ENCODER INVERT ENCODER BOOL FALSE / TRUE fr
568 ENCODER SPEED ENCODER INT xxxx.x Hz fs Output
569 ENCODER SPEED ENCODER INT xxxxx n/min ft Output
570 FLY CATCH ENABLE FLY CATCHING BOOL FALSE / TRUE fu
571 FLY START MODE FLY CATCHING ENUM 0 : ALWAYS fv
1 : TRIP OR POWERUP
2 : TRIP
572 FLY SEARCH MODE FLY CATCHING ENUM 0 : BIDIRECTIONAL fw
1 : UNIDIRECTIONAL
573 FLY SEARCH VOLTS FLY CATCHING INT 0.00 to 100.00 % fx
574 FLY SEARCH TIME FLY CATCHING INT 0.1 to 60.0 s fy
575 FLY MIN SPEED FLY CATCHING INT 5.0 to 480.0 Hz fz
576 FLY CATCH ACTIVE FLY CATCHING BOOL FALSE / TRUE g0 Output
577 INJ FREQUENCY INJ BRAKING INT 1.0 to 480.0 Hz g1
578 INJ I-LIM LEVEL INJ BRAKING INT 50.00 to 150.00 % g2
579 INJ DC PULSE INJ BRAKING INT 0.0 to 100.0 s g3
580 INJ FINAL DC INJ BRAKING INT 0.0 to 10.0 s g4
581 INJ DC LEVEL INJ BRAKING INT 0.00 to 25.00 % g5
582 INJ TIMEOUT INJ BRAKING INT 0.0 to 600.0 s g6
583 INJ ACTIVE INJ BRAKING BOOL FALSE / TRUE g7 Output
584 BRAKE ON LOAD BRAKE CONTROL INT 0.00 to 150.00 % g8
585 BRAKE ON FREQ BRAKE CONTROL INT 0.0 to 480.0 Hz g9
586 BRAKE OFF FREQ BRAKE CONTROL INT 0.0 to 480.0 Hz ga
587 BRAKE RELEASE BRAKE CONTROL BOOL FALSE / TRUE gb Output
588 BRAKE ON HOLD BRAKE CONTROL INT 0.00 to 60.00 s gc
589 BRAKE OFF HOLD BRAKE CONTROL INT 0.00 to 60.00 s gd
590 BRAKE HOLD BRAKE CONTROL BOOL FALSE / TRUE ge Output
591 DRIVE FREQUENCY PATTERN GEN INT xxxx.x Hz gf Output
592 VOLTS PATTERN GEN INT xxxx.x V gg Output
593 BOOST PATTERN GEN INT xxxx.x V gh Output
595 VOLTAGE MODE VOLTAGE CONTROL ENUM 0 : NONE gj 7
1 : FIXED
2 : AUTOMATIC
596 SUPPLY VOLTAGE VECTOR FLUXING INT xxxx.x V gk Output
598 OUTPUT MULTIPLEXER WORD 0x0000 to 0xFFFF gm Output
599 INPUT DEMULTIPLEXER WORD 0x0000 to 0xFFFF gn
600 ULC ENABLE UNDERLAP COMP BOOL FALSE / TRUE go
603 AUTOTUNE ENABLE AUTOTUNE BOOL FALSE / TRUE gr
604 AUTOTUNE ACTIVE AUTOTUNE BOOL FALSE / TRUE gs Output
608 AR PENDING AUTO RESTART BOOL FALSE / TRUE gw Output
609 AR TRIGGERS 1 AUTO RESTART WORD gx
610 AR INITIAL DLY 1 AUTO RESTART INT 0.0 to 600.0 s gy
611 AR ENABLE AUTO RESTART BOOL FALSE / TRUE gz
612 AR ATTEMPTS AUTO RESTART INT 1 to 10 h0
613 AR ATTEMPT DLY 1 AUTO RESTART INT 0.0 to 600.0 s h1
614 AR ATTEMPTS LEFT AUTO RESTART INT xxxxx h2 Output
615 AR TIME LEFT AUTO RESTART INT xxxx.x s h3 Output
616 AR RESTARTING AUTO RESTART BOOL FALSE / TRUE h4 Output
623 REGEN I LIMIT CURRENT LIMIT INT -150.00 to 0.00 % hb

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

626 OP MENU 2 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 he 5
627 OP MENU 3 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 hf 5
628 OP MENU 4 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 hg 5
629 OP MENU 5 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 hh 5
630 OP MENU 6 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 hi 5
631 OP MENU 7 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 hj 5
632 OP MENU 8 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 hk 5
633 OP MENU 9 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 hl 5
634 OP MENU 10 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 hm 5
635 OP MENU 11 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 hn 5
636 OP MENU 12 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 ho 5
637 OP MENU 13 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 hp 5
638 OP MENU 14 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 hq 5
639 OP MENU 15 OPERATOR MENU TAG 0 to 1002 hr 5
641 INPUT 0 MULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE ht
642 INPUT 1 MULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE hu
643 INPUT 2 MULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE hv
644 INPUT 3 MULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE hw
645 INPUT 4 MULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE hx
646 INPUT 5 MULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE hy
647 INPUT 6 MULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE hz
648 INPUT 7 MULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE i0
657 OUTPUT 0 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE i9 Output
658 OUTPUT 1 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE ia Output
659 OUTPUT 2 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE ib Output
660 OUTPUT 3 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE ic Output
661 OUTPUT 4 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE id Output
662 OUTPUT 5 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE ie Output
663 OUTPUT 6 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE if Output
664 OUTPUT 7 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE ig Output
665 OUTPUT 8 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE ih Output
666 OUTPUT 9 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE ii Output
667 OUTPUT 10 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE ij Output
668 OUTPUT 11 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE ik Output
669 OUTPUT 12 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE il Output
670 OUTPUT 13 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE im Output
671 OUTPUT 14 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE in Output
672 OUTPUT 15 DEMULTIPLEXER BOOL FALSE / TRUE io Output
673 COEFFICIENT B CUSTOM SCREEN 2 INT 1 to 30000 ip
674 HIGH LIMIT CUSTOM SCREEN 2 INT -30000 to 30000 iq
675 LOW LIMIT CUSTOM SCREEN 2 INT -30000 to 30000 ir
676 FORMULA CUSTOM SCREEN 2 ENUM Same as tag 125 is
677 AR TRIGGERS 2 AUTO RESTART WORD it
678 AR INITIAL DLY 2 AUTO RESTART INT 0.0 to 600.0 s iu
679 AR ATTEMPT DLY 2 AUTO RESTART INT 0.0 to 600.0 s iv

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

680 SKIP FREQ BAND 2 SKIP FREQUENCIES INT 0.0 to 480.0 Hz iw
681 SKIP FREQ BAND 3 SKIP FREQUENCIES INT 0.0 to 480.0 Hz ix
682 SKIP FREQ BAND 4 SKIP FREQUENCIES INT 0.0 to 480.0 Hz iy
686 REGEN LIM ENABLE CURRENT LIMIT BOOL FALSE / TRUE j2 7
689 AUTOTUNE MODE AUTOTUNE ENUM 0 : USER NO LOAD I j5 7
1 : CALC NO LOAD I
691 SRAMP CONTINUOUS SYSTEM RAMP BOOL FALSE / TRUE j7
692 SRAMP ACCEL SYSTEM RAMP INT 0.00 to 100.00 % j8
693 SRAMP DECEL SYSTEM RAMP INT 0.00 to 100.00 % j9
694 SRAMP JERK 1 SYSTEM RAMP INT 0.00 to 100.00 % ja
695 SRAMP JERK 2 SYSTEM RAMP INT 0.00 to 100.00 % jb
696 SRAMP JERK 3 SYSTEM RAMP INT 0.00 to 100.00 % jc
697 SRAMP JERK 4 SYSTEM RAMP INT 0.00 to 100.00 % jd
698 RAMPING SYSTEM RAMP BOOL FALSE / TRUE je Output
709 FLY REFLUX TIME FLY CATCHING INT 0.1 to 20.0 s jp
710 INJ DEFLUX TIME INJ BRAKING INT 0.1 to 20.0 s jq
725 DIN 6 INVERT DIGITAL INPUT 6 BOOL FALSE / TRUE k5
726 DIN 6 VALUE DIGITAL INPUT 6 BOOL FALSE / TRUE k6 Output
727 DIN 7 INVERT DIGITAL INPUT 7 BOOL FALSE / TRUE k7
728 DIN 7 VALUE DIGITAL INPUT 7 BOOL FALSE / TRUE k8 Output
739 INJ BASE VOLTS INJ BRAKING INT 0.00 to 115.47 % kj 3
747 ENCODER RESET ENCODER BOOL FALSE / TRUE kr
748 ENCODER POSITION ENCODER INT xxxxx ks Output, 2
749 ENCODER SPEED ENCODER INT xxx.xx% kt Output
750 TEC OPTION TYPE TEC OPTION ENUM 0 : NONE ku
1 : RS485
2 : PROFIBUS DP
3 : LINK
4 : DEVICENET
5 : CANOPEN
6 : TYPE 6
7 : TYPE 7
751 TEC OPTION IN 1 TEC OPTION INT -32768 to 32767 kv
752 TEC OPTION IN 2 TEC OPTION INT -32768 to 32767 kw
753 TEC OPTION IN 3 TEC OPTION INT -32768 to 32767 kx
754 TEC OPTION IN 4 TEC OPTION INT -32768 to 32767 ky
755 TEC OPTION IN 5 TEC OPTION INT -32768 to 32767 kz
756 TEC OPTION FAULT TEC OPTION ENUM 0 : NONE l0 Output
1 : PARAMETER
2 : TYPE MISMATCH
3 : SELF TEST
4 : HARDWARE
5 : MISSING
757 TEC OPTION VER TEC OPTION WORD 0000 to FFFF l1 Output
758 TEC OPTION OUT 1 TEC OPTION WORD 0000 to FFFF l2 Output
759 TEC OPTION OUT 2 TEC OPTION WORD 0000 to FFFF l3 Output
762 SLIP ACTIVE SLIP COMP BOOL FALSE / TRUE l6 Output
763 PID SP NEGATE PID BOOL FALSE / TRUE l7
764 PID FEEDBACK PID INT -300.00 to 300.00% l8
765 PID FB NEGATE PID BOOL FALSE / TRUE l9
766 PID ERROR PID INT xxx.xx% la Output

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Product-Related Default Values
All examples given in this book are based on a UK, 230V, 50Hz, 0.75kW inverter. The
parameters shown below have values that can vary with build/configuration.
Language Dependant Defaults

These parameters (marked with “*” in function block descriptions and macro diagrams) are set
to a value depending on the Language portion of the Product Code.
Note: A “tag” is the unique number that identifes a parameter where information is stored.The
concept of tags and parameters is explained in Chapter 5: “The Operator Station”.
Tag English (UK) German (GR) French (FR) Spanish (SP)

LANGUAGE 1 ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS ESPANOL
MAX SPEED 57 50.0Hz 50.0Hz 50.0Hz 50.0Hz
BASE FREQUENCY 106 50.0Hz 50.0Hz 50.0Hz 50.0Hz
CONFIGURATION ID 339 AC MOTOR DRIVE AC MOTOR DRIVE CONV FREQUENCE VARIADOR ALTERNA
Tag American (US) P 50Hz (P5) P 60Hz (P6)

LANGUAGE 1 ENGLISH { 0} { 0}
MAX SPEED 57 60.0Hz 50.0Hz 60.0Hz
BASE FREQUENCY 106 60.0Hz 50.0Hz 60.0Hz
CONFIGURATION ID 339 AC MOTOR DRIVE AC MOTOR DRIVE AC MOTOR DRIVE
AC Supply Voltage and Power Rating Dependant

Defaults
These parameters (marked with “**” in function block descriptions and macro diagrams) are set
to a value depending on the overall “power-build” of the Inverter indicated by the Product
Code.
Tag 0.75kW 1.5kW 2.2kW 4.0kW 0.75kW 1.5kW 2.2kW 4.0kW

230V 230V 230V 230V 400V 400V 400V 400V
FULL LOAD CALIB 64 3.4A 6.2A 8.3A 15.0A 2.0A 3.6A 4.8A 8.4A
NO LOAD CALIB 65 1.9A 3.6A 4.5A 7.9A 1.1A 2.1A 2.7A 4.7A
STATOR RES 119 12.60 5.51 4.12 1.62 12.60 5.51 12.40 5.47
LEAKAGE INDUC 120 56.9 30.4 14.9 10.6 56.9 30.4 69.1 42.4
MUTUAL INDUC 121 626.0 333.7 257.2 142.5 626.0 333.7 783.9 446.2
MOTOR VOLTS 122 230.0V 230.0V 230.0V 230.0V 400.0V 400.0V 400.0V 400.0V
MOTOR CONNECTION 124 DELTA DELTA DELTA DELTA STAR STAR DELTA DELTA

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Technical Specifications 11-1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1
Environmental Details
Operating Temperature 0°C to 45°C (0°C to 40°C with top cover fitted)
Operating temperature is defined as the ambient temperature to the immediate surround of the
Inverter, when the Inverter and other equipment adjacent to it is operating at worst case
conditions.
Storage Temperature -25°C to +55°C
Shipping Temperature -25°C to +70 °C
Product Enclosure Rating Wall Mounted IP40 - top cover surface (Europe)
(top cover must be fitted) IP20 - remainder of surfaces (Europe)
UL (c-UL) Type 1 (North America/Canada)
Cubicle Mounted IP20
(without top cover)
Altitude If >1000 metres above sea level, derate Motor Power rating by 1% per 100 metres
Humidity Maximum 85% relative humidity at 40°C non-condensing
Atmosphere Non flammable, non corrosive and dust free
Climatic Conditions Class 3k3, as defined by prEN50178 (1995)
Vibration Test Fc of EN60068-2-6
19Hz<=f<=57Hz sinusoidal 0.075mm amplitude
57Hz<=f<=150Hz sinusoidal 1g
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of three mutually perpendicular axis
Safety
Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category III
Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2
Europe When fitted inside a cubicle, or when wall-mounted and the top cover is firmly screwed in
position, this product conforms with the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC with amendment
93/68/EEC, Article 13 and Annex III using prEN50178 (1995) to show compliance.
North America/Canada Without the top cover fitted, complies with the requirements of UL508C as an open-type drive.
When the top cover is fitted, complies with the requirements of UL508C as Type 1 Enclosed (for
direct wall mounting applications) when specified with Product Code Block VI designation xx20
or xx21 only.
EMC Compliance
All models European Community Directive 89/336/EEC
All models EN50082-1 (1992) and prEN50082-2 (1992) for immunity
If fitted with internal EN50081-1 (1992) and EN50081-2 (1994) when mounted inside a cubicle
or external filters EN50081-1 (1992) and EN50081-2 (1994) for Conducted Emissions when wall-mounted
EN50081-2 (1994) for Radiated Emissions when wall-mounted
External AC Supply (RFI) Filters

Used on the 605 Type A unit only without an internal ac supply EMC filter, on cable runs in
excess of 25 metres.
605 Voltage No. of Motor Input Supply Details Internal External AC Maximum Switching
Type (V) Phases Power earth referenced supply: AC Supply Supply EMC Motor Frequency
(kW) • TN for 1 phase only EMC Filter Filter Part No. Cable (kHz)
• IT/TN for 3 phase Fitted Length
(metres)
A 220-240 1 0.75 220-240V ±10%, 50-60Hz ±5% NO CO389969 60 3&6
A 220-240 3 0.75 220-240V ±10%, 50-60Hz ±5% NO CO388971 55 3&6
A 220-240 1 1.5 220-240V ±10%, 50-60Hz ±5% NO CO388970 150 3&6
A 220-240 3 1.5 220-240V ±10%, 50-60Hz ±5% NO CO388971 55 3&6

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
11-2 Technical Specifications
Cabling Requirements for EMC Compliance

605 Power Supply Motor Cable External AC Brake Resistor Signal/Control
Type Cable Supply EMC Cable Cable
Filter to Inverter
Cable
Cable Type A&B Unscreened Screened/ Screened/ Screened/ Screened
(for EMC Compliance) armoured armoured armoured
Segregation A&B From all From all other wiring (noisy) From all other
other wiring wiring (sensitive)
(clean)
Length Limitations A Unlimited 25 metres 25 metres 25 metres
With Internal AC Supply B 50 metres 25 metres 25 metres
EMC Filter
Length Limitations A Unlimited Refer to 0.3 metres 25 metres 25 metres
With External AC “External AC
Supply EMC Filter Supply (RFI)
Filters” table
Screen to Earth A&B Both ends Both ends Both ends Inverter end only
Connection
Fuse Rating and Recommended Wire Sizes

Local wiring regulations always take precedence.
* European wire sizes are based on EN60204-1 (1993) for PVC single-core cable bunched or
in trunking given a 70ºC maximum conductor temperature under normal conditions in a 45ºC
ambient.
North American wire sizes are based on NEC/NFPA-70 for ampacities of thermoplastic-
insulated (60ºC) copper conductors assuming not more than three current-carrying conductors in
raceway or cable, based on ambient temperature of 30ºC. The wire sizes allow for an ampacity
of 125% of the rated input and output amperes for motor branch-circuit conductors as specified
in NEC/NFPA-70.
Output Input
605 Voltage No. of Motor Output * European North Input Input Fuse * European North
Type (V) Phases Power Current Wire Size American Current Rating (A) Wire Size American
(kW) (A) (45ºC) Wire Size (A) (45ºC) Wire Size
(mm²) (AWG) (mm²) (AWG)
A 220-240 1 0.75 4.0 0.75 14 8.0 10.0 1.5 14

A 220-240 3 0.75 4.0 0.75 14 5.0 10.0 1.5 14
A 220-240 1 1.5 7.0 1.0 14 15.0 20.0 4.0 12
A 220-240 3 1.5 7.0 1.0 14 9.0 10.0 1.5 14
B 220-240 1 2.2 10.5 1.5 14 23.0 25.0 6.0 10
B 220-240 3 2.2 10.5 1.5 14 12.0 15.0 2.5 14
(16.0 for
Europe)
B 220-240 3 3.7 16.5 2.5 10 16.0 20.0 4.0 12
B 380-460 3 0.75 2.5 0.75 14 3.0 10.0 1.5 14
B 380-460 3 1.5 4.5 0.75 14 6.0 10.0 1.5 14
B 380-460 3 2.2 5.5 0.75 14 8.0 10.0 1.5 14
B 380-460 3 3.7 9.5 1.5 14 11.0 15.0 2.5 14
(16.0 for
Europe)

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Terminal Block Wire Sizes
Wire sizes should be chosen with respect to the operating conditions and your local National
Electrical Safety Installation Requirements.
Power Terminals 10 AWG (5.3mm²) maximum acceptance for aperture
Control Terminals 16 AWG (1.3mm²) maximum acceptance for aperture
For information:
12 AWG (3.3mm²), 14 AWG (2.1mm²), 18 AWG (0.8mm²), 20 AWG (0.5mm²) 22 AWG (0.3mm²)
Earthing/Safety Details
Earthing Permanent earthing is mandatory on all units.
• Use a copper protective earth conductor 10mm² minimum cross-section, or install a second
conductor in parallel with the protective conductor to a separate protective earth terminal
• The conductor itself must meet local requirements for a protective earth conductor
Input Supply Details Units with internal or single phase external filters are only suitable for use on earth referenced
(TN) and (IT) supplies (TN). 3 phase external filters are suitable for IT and TN supplies.
Units without filters are suitable for earth (TN) or non-earth referenced (IT) supplies.
Prospective Short 5kA maximum
Circuit Current (PSCC)
Earth Leakage Current >10mA (all models)
Power Details
Motor power, output current and input current must not be exceeded under steady state
operating conditions.
605 Voltage No. of Motor Output Output Input Input Fuse Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic
Type (V) Phases Power Current Overload Supply Current Rating Brake Brake Brake
(kW) (A) Motoring Details (A) (A) Switch Switch Switch
see table Current Duty R min Ω
above (A)
A 220-240 1 0.75 4.0 8.0 10.0 4 100

A 220-240 3 0.75 4.0 5.0 10.0 4 100
A 220-240 1 1.5 7.0 220-240V 15.0 20.0 4 100
A 220-240 3 1.5 7.0 ±10% 9.0 10.0 4 100
B 220-240 1 2.2 10.5 150% 45-65Hz 23.0 25.0 10 30% 56
B 220-240 3 2.2 10.5 for 12.0 15.0 10 max. 56
B 220-240 3 3.7 16.5 60 16.0 20.0 15 22
B 380-460 3 0.75 2.5 seconds 3.0 10.0 10 56
B 380-460 3 1.5 4.5 380-460V 6.0 10.0 10 56
B 380-460 3 2.2 5.5 ±10% 8.0 10.0 10 56
B 380-460 3 3.7 9.5 45-65Hz 11.0 15.0 10 56

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Control Terminals
Terminal No. Name Range Description
1 0VREF 0V 0V reference for analogue i/o
2 AIN1 0-10V, ±10V, Configurable analogue input
0-20mA, 4-20mA Default function = Speed Setpoint
3 10VREF 10V 10V reference for analogue i/o
Load 5mA maximum
4 AIN2 0-10V, ±10V, Configurable analogue input
0-20mA, 4-20mA Default function = Speed Trim
5 AOUT 0-10V, Configurable analogue output
0-20mA, 4-20mA Default function = Ramp Output
6 24V 24V 24V supply for digital inputs
Load 100mA maximum
7 DIN1 0-24V Configurable digital input
Default function = Run
0V = Stop, 24V = Run
Default function = Reset
Momentary 24V = Reset
Default function = Direction
24V = Reverse, 0V = Forward
Default function = External Trip
24V = No Trip, 0V = Trip
Default function = Jog
24V = Jog, 0V = Stop
12 0V 0V 0V reference for digital i/o
13 DOUT1 0-24V Configurable digital output
pull up current source Default function = Health
On (+24V) = Healthy, Off (0V) = Not Healthy
14 DOUT2 0-24V Configurable digital output
pull up current source On (+24V) = Running, Off (0V) = Not Running
15 0V 0V 0V reference for digital i/o
16 DIN6/ENCA 0-24V Configurable digital input (Encoder Channel A)
Default function = unconfigured
17 DIN7/ENCB 0-24V Configurable digital input (Encoder Channel B)
Default function = unconfigured
18 24V 24V 24V supply for digital inputs
Load 180mA maximum

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Analog Inputs/Outputs
Inputs Output
Range 0-10V, ±10V, 0-20mA or 4-20mA set by I/O 0-10V, 0-20mA or 4-20mA set by I/O
configuration switch. configuration switch.
Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your
Application” - ANALOG INPUT for switch Application” - ANALOG OUTPUT for switch setting
setting details. details.
Impedance Voltage range = 94kΩ Voltage range = 100Ω
Current range = 220Ω Current range = 100Ω
Resolution 10 bits (1 in 1024) 8 bits (1 in 256)
Sample Rate 20ms
Digital Inputs
Digital inputs 6 & 7 are also uses as Encoder inputs, channel A & B respectively.
The use of digital inputs 6 & 7 is restricted by the MODE parameter, refer to Chapter 6:
“Programming Your Application”, ENCODER.
Range -30V dc minimum 24V dc nominal +30V dc maximum
Threshold 6V dc minimum 12V dc typical 18V dc maximum
Input Impedance 4.7kΩ
Sample Rate 20ms
Encoder Inputs Maximum input frequency for encoder input 100kHz
Channel A & B
Digital Outputs
Type Pull up current source
Rating Maximum current 50mA, 30V dc maximum
Sample Rate 20ms
Power Loss Estimates Switching Frequencies

605 Voltage (V) No. of Motor Max Power 605 Voltage (V) No. of Motor Switching
Type Phases Power Loss Type Phases Power Freq (Hz)
(kW) (W) (kW)
A 220-240 1 0.75 52 A 220-240 1 0.75 3, 6, 9

A 220-240 3 0.75 46 A 220-240 3 0.75 3, 6, 9
A 220-240 1 1.5 97 A 220-240 1 1.5 3, 6, 9
A 220-240 3 1.5 81 A 220-240 3 1.5 3, 6, 9
B 220-240 1 2.2 143 B 220-240 1 2.2 3, 6, 9
B 220-240 3 2.2 123 B 220-240 3 2.2 3, 6, 9
B 220-240 3 3.7 174 B 220-240 3 3.7 3, 6, 9
B 380-460 3 0.75 46 B 380-460 3 0.75 3
B 380-460 3 1.5 77 B 380-460 3 1.5 3, 6, 9
B 380-460 3 2.2 106 B 380-460 3 2.2 3, 6, 9
B 380-460 3 3.7 175 B 380-460 3 3.7 3, 6, 9

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Supply Harmonic Analysis

Assumptions: 5000A short circuit supply capability:
h= 2
∑ Qh2 %
THD(V) x 100 = h = 40
Q 1n
where Q1n is the rated rms value of the fundamental voltage of the supply transformer.
The results conform to stage 1, stage 2 and stage 3 of the Engineering Recommendation
G.5/3 September 1976, Classification ‘C’: Limits for Harmonics in the UK Electricity
Industry.
Inverter Type Three Phase Single Phase
605 Type B B B B A A B B A A B
Motor Power 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 0.75 1.5 2.2
(kW)
Fundamental 400 400 400 400 230 230 230 230 230 230 230
Voltage (V)
Typical Motor 73% 80% 81% 82% 73% 80% 81% 82% 73% 80% 81%
Efficiency
Harmonic No. RMS Current (A)
1 1.7 3.0 4.2 7.1 3.0 5.6 7.5 12.0 5.2 9.2 12.9
3 5.0 8.6 11.9
5 1.6 2.8 3.7 6.2 2.7 4.7 6.2 9.3 4.5 7.5 10.1
7 1.5 2.6 3.3 5.3 2.4 4.0 5.0 7.0 3.9 6.1 7.7
9 3.2 4.6 5.3
11 1.3 2.1 2.3 3.3 1.6 2.2 2.5 2.6 2.5 3.1 3.0
13 1.1 1.8 1.8 2.3 1.2 1.4 1.4 1.1 1.8 1.7 1.2
15 1.1 0.7 0.1
17 0.8 1.2 0.8 0.8 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.7 0.6 0.1 0.5
19 0.7 0.9 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.7 0.2 0.3 0.6
21 0.1 0.4 0.5
23 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.2
25 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.1
27 0.2 0.1 0.2
29 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.2
31 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.1
33 0.0 0.1 0.1
35 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
37 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.0 0.1
39 0.1 0.1 0.1
Total RMS 3 6 7 11 5 9 12 17 10 16 23
Current (A)
THD (V) % 0.6 0.9 1.4 1.6 0.6 1.4 1.7 2.5 1.5 2.0 2.7

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Certification for the Inverter 12-1

CERTIFICATION FOR THE INVERTER
2
1
Requirements for EMC Compliance

All Variable Speed Drives (VSDs) potentially produce electrical emissions which are radiated
into the environment and conducted back into the ac supply. VSDs are inherently immune to
any additional external electrical noise. The following information is provided to maximise the
Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) of VSDs and systems in their intended operating
environment, by minimising their emissions and maximising their immunity.
Minimising Radiated Emissions

EN55011 radiated emission measurements are made between 30MHz and 1GHz in the far field
at a distance of 10 to 30 metres. Limits lower than 30MHz or in close proximity are not
specified. Emissions from individual components tend to be additive.
• Use a screened/armoured cable between VSD/cubicle and motor containing the motor
protective earth (PE) connection. It should have a 360° screen termination. Earth screen at
both ends connecting to the motor frame and cubicle (or gland box if wall mounted).
Maintain the screen integrity using 360° terminations.
Note: Some hazardous area installations may preclude direct earthing at both ends of the
screen, in this case earth one end via a 1µF 50Vac capacitor, and the other as normal.
• Keep unshielded cable as short as possible inside the cubicle.
• Always maintain the integrity of the shield.
• If the cable is interrupted to insert contactors etc., re-connect the screen using the shortest
possible route.
• Keep the length of screen stripped-back as short as possible when making screen
connections.
• Ideally use 360° screen terminations using cable glands or Ù’ clips on power sceen rails.
If a shielded cable is not available, lay unshielded motor cables in a metal conduit which will act
as a shield. The conduit must be continuous with a direct electrical contact to the VSD and
motor housing. If links are necessary, use braid with a minimum cross sectional area of 10mm2.
Note: Some motor gland boxes and conduit glands are made of plastic, if this is the case, then
braid must be connected between the screen and the chassis. In addition at the motor
end, ensure that the screen is electrically connected to the motor frame since some
terminal boxes are insulated from the frame by gasket/paint.
Earthing Requirements
IMPORTANT: Protective earthing always takes precedence over EMC earthing.
Protective Earth (PE) Connections

Note: In accordance with the installation requirements of EN60204, only one protective earth
conductor is permitted at each protective earth terminal contacting point.
Local wiring regulations may require the protective earth connection of the motor to be
connected locally, i.e. not as specified in these instructions. This will not cause shielding
problems because of the relatively high RF impedance of the local earth connection.
EMC Earth Connections

For compliance with EMC requirements, we recommend that the “0V/signal ground” is
separately earthed. When a number of units are used in a system, these terminals should be
connected together at a single, local earthing point.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
12-2 Certification for the Inverter

Control and signal cables for the encoder, all analog inputs, and communications require
screening with the screen connected only at the VSD end. However, if high frequency noise is
still a problem, earth screen at the non VSD end via a 0.1µF capacitor.
Note: Connect the screen (at the VSD end) to the VSD protective point, and not to the control
board terminals.
Cabling Requirements
Note: Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” for additional Cabling Requirements.
Planning Cable Runs

• Use the shortest possible motor cable lengths.
• Use a single length of cable to a star junction point to feed multiple motors.
• Keep electrically noisy and sensitive cables apart.
• Keep electrically noisy and sensitive parallel cable runs to a minimum. Separate parallel
cable runs by at least 0.25 metres. For runs longer than 10 metres, separation should be
increased proportionally. For example if the parallel runs were 50m, then the separation
would be (50/10) x 0.25m = 1.25m.
• Sensitive cables should cross noisy cables at 90°.
• Never run sensitive cables close or parallel to the motor, dc link and braking chopper circuit
for any distance.
• Never run supply, dc link or motor cables in the same bundle as the signal/control and
feedback cables, even if they are screened.
• Ensure EMC filter input and output cables are separately routed and do not couple across
the filter.
Increasing Motor Cable Length

Because cable capacitance and hence conducted emissions increase with motor cable length,
conformance to EMC limits is only guaranteed with the specified internal ac supply EMC filter
option using a maximum cable length as specified in Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications”.
This maximum cable length can be improved using the specified external ac EMC output filter.
Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” - External AC Supply EMC Filters. Note that
the external filter cannot be used with an internal filter.
Screened/armoured cable has significant capacitance between the conductors and screen which
increases linearly with cable length (typically 200pF/m but varies with cable type and current
rating).
Long cable lengths may have the following undesirable effects:
• Tripping on òvercurrent’ as the cable capacitance is charged and discharged at the
switching frequency.
• Producing increased conducted emissions which degrade the performance of the
internal/external ac supply EMC filter due to saturation.
• Causing RCDs (Residual Current Devices) to trip due to increased high frequency earth
current.
• Producing increased heating inside the internal/external ac supply EMC filter from the
increased conducted emissions.
These effects can be overcome by adding motor chokes or an EMC motor output filter at the
output of the VSD.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

EMC Installation Options
The unit, when installed for Class A or Class B operation, will be compliant with EN55011
(1991) / EN55022 91994) for radiated emissions, as described below.
Screening & Earthing (wall mounted, Class A)

IMPORTANT: This unit must be fitted with the top cover and gland box.
The unit is installed for Class A operation when wall mounted using the internal or specified
external ac supply EMC filter and having complied with all cabling requirements.
Note: The installation requirements of local safety standards must be achieved regarding the
safety of electrical equipment for machines.
• A single-star point earthing policy as shown in Error! Reference source not found. is
recommended.
• The protective earth connection (PE) to the motor must be run inside the screened cable
between the motor and VSD and be connected to the protective earth terminal in the gland
box, or on the VSD.
• The internal/external ac supply EMC filter must be permanently earthed. Refer to Chapter
11: “Technical Specifications” - Earthing/Safety Details.
• The signal/control cables should be screened.
Note: Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” for details on Cabling Requirements.
Screening & Earthing (cubicle mounted, Class B)

Note: The installation requirements of local safety standards must be achieved regarding the
safety of electrical equipment for machines.
The unit is installed for Class B operation when mounted inside a cubicle having 10dB
attenuation between 30 and 100MHz (typically the attenuation provided by a metal cabinet with
no aperture of dimension greater than 0.15m), using the internal or specified external ac supply
EMC filter and having met all cabling requirements.
Note: Radiated magnetic and electric fields inside the cubicle may be high and any components
fitted inside must be sufficiently immune.
The VSD, external ac supply EMC filter and associated equipment are mounted onto a
conducting, metal mounting panel. Do not use cubicle constructions that use insulating
mounting panels or undefined mounting structures. Cables between the VSD and motor must be
screened or armoured and terminated at the entrance to the cubicle.
Single VSD - Single Motor
Apply a single point earthing strategy for a single VSD mounted in a cubicle as shown below.
The protective earth connection (PE) to the motor must be run inside the screened cable between
the motor and VSD and be connected to the motor protective earth terminal on the VSD.
605
AC Supply motor cable screen
External
AC PE Motor
Supply
EMC
Filter
PE PE
As short as possible (0.3 metres maximum)
Two cables for permanent earthing
Figure 12-1 EMC and Safety Earthing Cabling

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Single VSD - Multiple Motors
Note: Refer to Chapter 13: “Application Notes” - Using Multiple Motors on a Single Inverter.
IMPORTANT: If connecting multiple motors to a single VSD, use a star junction point for motor cable
connections. Use a metal box with entry and exit cable glands to maintain shield
integrity. Refer to Chapter 13: “Using Multiple Motors on a Single Inverter”.
Star Point Earthing
to motor to motor to motor U-clip used to terminate screen

connection to the back panel
screened screened
Back Panel
VSD VSD VSD f PLC

f f f
PE PE PE Metal Work Earth
PE 0A 0D PE 0A 0D PE 0A 0D PE 0D
Doors Back Metal

Panel Work
24V Control
Analogue Clean Earth Digital Clean Earth
unscreened signals
Dirty Earth
Signal/Control Screen
STAR POINT
0A = 0 Volts Analogue 110V
0D = 0 Volts Digital Control
PE = Protective Earth all screened signals not
f = External Filter going directly to a VSD
VSD = Variable Speed Drive
PLC = Programmable Logic Controller
Incoming Safety Earth (PE)
Figure 12-2 Star Point Earthing
A star-point earthing policy separates `noisy’ and `clean’ earths. Four separate earth busbars
(three are insulated from the mounting panel) connect to a single earth point (star point) near the
incoming safety earth from the main supply. Flexible, large cross-section cable is used to ensure
a low HF impedance. Busbars are arranged so that connection to the single earth point is as
short as possible.
1 Clean Earth Busbar (insulated from the mounting panel)

Used as a reference point for all signal and control cabling. This may be further subdivided into
an analogue and a digital reference busbar, each separately connected to the star earthing point.
The digital reference is also used for any 24V control.
2 Dirty Earth Busbar (insulated from the mounting panel)

Used for all power earths, i.e. protective earth connection. It is also used as a reference for any
110 or 220V control used, and for the control transformer screen.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

3 Metal Work Earth Busbar
The back panel is used as this earth busbar, and should provide earthing points for all parts of
the cubicle including panels and doors. This busbar is also used for power screened cables
which terminate near to (10cm) or directly into a VSD - such as motor cables, braking choppers
and their resistors, or between VSDs - refer to the appropriate product manual to identify these.
Use U-clips to clamp the screened cables to the back panel to ensure optimim HF connection.
4 Signal/Control Screen Earth Busbar (insulated from the mounting panel)

Used for signal/control screened cables which do not go directly to the VSD. Place this busbar
as close as possible to the point of cable entry. Ù’ clamp the screened cables to the busbars to
ensure an optimum HF connection.
Sensitive Equipment
The proximity of the source and victim circuit has a large effect on radiated coupling. The
electromagnetic fields produced by VSDs falls off rapidly with distance from the
cabling/cubicle. Remember that the radiated fields from EMC compliant drive systems are
measured at least 10m from the equipment, over the band 30-1000MHz. Any equipment placed
closer than this will see larger magnitude fields, especially when very close to the Inverter.
Do not place magnetic/electric field sensitive equipment within 0.25 metres of the following
parts of the VSD system:
• Variable Speed Drive (VSD)
• EMC motor output filters
• Input or output chokes/transformers
• The cable between VSD and motor (even when screened/armoured)
• Connections to external braking chopper and resistor (even when screened/armoured)
• AC/DC brushed motors (due to commutation)
• DC link connections (even when screened/armoured)
• Relays and contactors (even when suppressed)
From experience, the following equipment is particularly sensitive and requires careful
installation.
• Any transducers which produce low level analog outputs (<1V) , e.g. load cells, strain
gauges, thermocouples, piezoelectric transducers, anemometers, LVDTs
• Wide band width control inputs (>100Hz)
• AM radios (long and medium wave only)
• Video cameras and closed circuit TV
• Office personal computers
• Capacitive devices such as proximity sensors and level transducers
• Mains borne communication systems
• Equipment not suitable for operation in the intended EMC environment, i.e. with
insufficient immunity to new EMC standards

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Requirements for UL Compliance

Solid-State Motor Overload Protection
These devices provide Class 10 motor overload protection. The maximum internal overload
protection level (current limit) is 150% for 60 seconds. Refer to Chapter 6: Programming Your
Application - I*t TRIP for user current limit adjustment information.
An external motor overload protective device must be provided by the installer where the motor
has a full-load ampere rating of less than 50% of the Inverter output rating.
Short Circuit Rating

All models of this Inverter are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
5000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes, 240V/460V maximum (as appropriate).
Solid-State Short-Circuit Protection

These devices are provided with Solid-State Short-Circuit (output) Protection. Branch circuit
fusing requirements must be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code
NEC/NFPA-70.
Recommended Branch Circuit Protection

It is recommended that UL Listed (JDDZ) non-renewable cartridge fuses, Class K5 or H; or UL
Listed (JDRX) renewable cartridge fuses, Class H, are installed upstream of the Inverter. Refer
to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” - Power Details for recommended fuse ratings.
Motor Base Frequency

The motor base frequency rating is 480Hz maximum.
Field Wiring Temperature Rating

Use 60°C or 60/75°C Copper conductors only.
Field Wiring Terminal Markings

For correct field wiring connections that are to be made to each terminal refer to Error!
Reference source not found. page 3-Error! Bookmark not defined., and Error! Reference
source not found. page 3-Error! Bookmark not defined..
Power Wiring Terminals

The wiring terminals accept a maximum conductor size of No. 10 AWG (5.3mm²).
Terminal Tightening Torque

The tightening torque for the power terminals is 9 lbf-in (1.0Nm).
Field Grounding Terminals

The field grounding terminals are identified with the International Grounding Symbol
(IEC Publication 417, Symbol 5019).
Operating Ambient Temperature

The maximum operating ambient temperature rating is 45°C (40°C for models with a Type 1
Enclosure).
Direct Wall-Mountable Models

All model of this Inverter with a Product Code Block VI designation xx20 and xx21 are suitable
for direct wall mounting applications as they have a “Type 1 Enclosure” rating.
In order to preserve this enclosure rating, it is important to maintain the environmental integrity
of the enclosure. Therefore, the installer must provide correct Type 1 closures for all unused
clearance holes provided within the Inverter’s glandplate.
Type 1 Enclosed models are suitable for use in no worse than a Pollution Degree 2 environment.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

European Directives and the CE Mark
The following information is supplied to provide a basic understanding of the Electro Magnetic
Compatibility (EMC) and Low Voltage Directive (LVD) CE marking requirements. The
following literature is recommended for further information:
• Recommendations for Application of Power Drive Systems (PDS), European Council
Directives - CE Marking and Technical Standardisation - (CEMEP)
Available from your local trade association.
• EMC Installation Guidelines for Modules and Systems - (SSD Drives)
Available from your local SSD Drives office, part number HA388879
• Short Form Overview of European Directives for Variable Speed Drives and Applications -
(SSD Drives)
Available from your local SSD Drives office, part number HA389770
The European machines and drives manufacturers via their national trade associations have
formed the European Committee of Manufacturers of Electrical Machines and Power
Electronics (CEMEP).
SSD Drives and other major European drives manufacturers are working to the CEMEP
recommendations on CE marking.
The CE mark shows that a product complies with the relevant EU directives, in our case the
LVD and, in some instances, the EMC Directive.
CE Marking for Low Voltage Directive

When installed in accordance with this manual, the Inverter is CE marked by SSD Drives Ltd in
accordance with the low voltage directive (S.I. No. 3260 implements this LVD directive into
UK law). An EC Declaration of Conformity (low voltage directive) is included at the end of this
chapter.
CE Marking for EMC - Who is Responsible?

Note: The specified EMC emission and immunity performance of this unit can only be achieved
when the unit is installed to the EMC Installation Instructions given in this manual.
According to S.I. No. 2373 which implements the EMC directive into UK law, the requirement
for CE marking this unit falls into two categories:
1. Where the supplied unit has an intrinsic/direct function to the end user, then the unit is
classed as Relevant Apparatus.
2. Where the supplied unit is incorporated into a higher system/apparatus or machine which
includes (at least) the motor, cable and a driven load but is unable to function without this
unit, then the unit is classed as a Component.
■ Relevant Apparatus - SSD Drives Responsibility

Occasionally, say in a case where an existing fixed speed motor - such as a fan or pump - is
converted to variable speed with an add-on drive module (Relevant Apparatus), it becomes the
responsibility of SSD Drives to apply the CE mark and issue an EC Declaration of Conformity
for the EMC Directive. This declaration and the CE mark is included at the end of this chapter.
■ Component - Customer Responsibility

The majority of SSD Drives’ products are classed as Components and therefore we cannot
apply the CE mark or produce an EC Declaration of Conformity in respect of EMC. It is
therefore the manufacturer/supplier/installer of the higher system/apparatus or machine who
must conform to the EMC directive and CE mark.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

The Legal Requirements of CE Marking for EMC
IMPORTANT: Before installation, clearly understand who is responsible for conformance with the EMC
Directive. Misappropriation of the CE mark is a CRIMINAL OFFENCE.
It is important that you have now defined who is responsible for conforming to the EMC
Directive, either:
■ SSD Drives Responsibility

You intend to use the unit as Relevant Apparatus.
When the unit has an internal ac supply EMC filter, or the specified external ac supply EMC
filter is correctly fitted to the unit, and the EMC installation instructions have been followed it
complies with the relevant standards indicated in the following tables. The use of a filter is
mandatory for the CE marking of this unit to apply.
The relevant declarations are to be found at the end of this chapter. The CE mark is displayed on
the EC Declaration of Conformity (EMC Directive) provided at the end of this chapter.
■ Customer Responsibility
You intend to use the unit as a Component, therefore you have a choice:
1. To use the internal or specified external ac supply EMC filter, following the EMC
installation instructions. This may help you gain EMC compliance for the final
machine/system.
2. Where the unit does not have an internal ac supply EMC filter, you can use a combination
of global or local filtering and screening methods, natural migration through distance, or the
use of distributed parasitic elements of the existing installation.
Note: When two or more EMC compliant components are combined to form the final
machine/system, the resulting machine/system may no longer be compliant, (emissions
tend to be additive, immunity is determined by the least immune component).
Understand the EMC environment and applicable standards to keep additional
compliance costs to a minimum.
Applying for CE Marking for EMC

We have supplied a Manufacturer’s EMC Declaration at the end of this chapter that you can use
as a basis for your own justification of overall compliance with the EMC directive. There are
three methods of demonstrating conformity:
1. Self-certification to a relevant standard
2. Third party testing to a relevant standard
3. Writing a technical construction file stating the technical rationale as to why your final
machine/system is compliant. An EMC “competent body” must then assess this and issue a
technical report or certificate to demonstrate compliance.
Refer to Article 10(2) of Directive 89/336/EEC.
With EMC compliance, an EC Declaration of Conformity and the CE mark will be issued for
your final machine/system.
IMPORTANT: Professional end users with EMC expertise who are using drive modules and cubicle
systems defined as components who supply, place on the market or install the relevant
apparatus must take responsibility for demonstrating EMC conformance and applying
the CE mark and issuing an EC Declaration of Conformity.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Which Standards Apply?
Basic and Generic Standards
The standards that may apply to this unit come under two broad categories:
1. Emission - these standards limit the interference caused by operating (this) drive module.
2. Immunity - these standards limit the effect of interference (on this unit) from other electrical
and electronic apparatus.
The following table indicates the standards that the unit may comply with, dependent upon how
it is installed and used.
Unit used as Unit used as a

Relevant Apparatus Component
Assuming installation to EMC instructions in this manual filter no filter filter no filter
“filter” refers to an internal or specified external ac supply EMC (EMC (EMC
compliance) compliance
filter.
may be
applied for)
wall enc wall enc wall enc wall enc
Installation Basic and Generic Standards
mt. l mt. l mt. l mt. l
EN55022 Class B (1994)

Radiated RF Emission
or
EN50081-1 (1992)
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
EN55022 Class B (1994)
Residential Conducted RF
Emission
or
EN50081-1 (1992)
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Immunity EN50082-1 (1992)
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
EN55022 Class B (1994)
or
EN50081-1 (1992)
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Commercial & EN55022 Class B (1994)
Light Industry Conducted RF
Emission
or
EN50081-1 (1992)
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Immunity EN50082-1 (1992)
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
EN55011 Class A (1991)

or
EN50081-2 (1994)
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
EN55011 Class A (1991)
Industrial Conducted RF
Emission
or
EN50081-2 (1994)
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Immunity prEN50082-2 (1992)
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Table 12-1 Applicable Basic and Generic Standards

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
STAR T
IS SSD MODULE NO
RELEVANT APPARATUS
WIT H INT RINSIC FUNCTION
TO END USER (CEMEP
VALIDIT Y FIELD 1)
CEMEP VALIDIT Y FIELDS
2, 3 AND 4
YES
OPTIONAL SSD FILTERS

AVAILABLE T O ASSIST USERS
IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE
EMC DIRECT IVE
WILL T HE SSD PRODUCT NO
BE INST ALLED
ACCORDING T O T HE
INST ALLAT ION EMC CHARACT ERIST ICS
GUIDELINES STAT ED IN MANUAL
YES
FIT THE SPECIFIED EMC INSTALLAT ION GUIDELINES

SSD EMC FILT ER
STAT ED IN MANUAL
T HE SSD EC DECLARAT ION OF

T HE ED MANUFACTURERS DECLARAT ION
CONFORMIT Y FOR EMC IS VALID FOR EMC IS VALID FOR T HE SPECIFIED
FOR T HE SPECIFIED ED MODULE MODULE WHEN INSTALLED CORRECTLY
A GLOBAL EMC SOLUTION

EMC 'CE' MARK CAN BE APPLIED TO SSD
MAY BE ADVANTAGEOUS
MODULE TO GENERIC EMC STANDARDS:
NO EMC 'CE' MARK APPLIED TO SSD MODULE.

EN61800-3 (1997)
SSD = SSD DRIVES LIMIT ED

RELEVANT APPARATUS
CEMEP : Refer to Chapter 12, "European Directives and the CE Mark"
MANUFACT URER/SUPPLIER/INST ALLERS
RESPONSIBILITY T O CONFORM WIT H EMC DIRECTIVE.
SSD EMC CHARACTERIST ICS AND MANUFACT URERS
DECLARATION MAY BE USED AS A BASIS
IN T HE OVERALL PRODUCT JUST IFICAT ION
Figure 12-3 SSD Drives EMC `CE' Mark Validity Chart

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

Certificates
605
EC DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY
Date CE marked first applied: 08.10.1996
Issued for EMC Directive Low Voltage Directive The drive is CE

compliance In accordance with the EEC Directive In accordance with the EEC Directive marked in
with the EMC 89/336/EEC and amended by 92/31/EEC and 73/23/EEC and amended by 93/68/EEC, accordance with
Directive when 93/68/EEC, Article 10 and Annex 1, (EMC Article 13 and Annex III, (LOW VOLTAGE the low voltage
the unit is used DIRECTIVE) DIRECTIVE) directive for
as relevant We SSD Drives Limited, address as below, We SSD Drives Limited, address as below, electrical
apparatus. declare under our sole responsibility that the declare under our sole responsibility that the equipment and
above Electronic Products when installed and above Electronic Products when installed and
appliances in the
operated with reference to the instructions in operated with reference to the instructions in
the Product Manual (provided with each piece the Product Manual voltage range
of equipment) is in accordance with the relevant (provided with each piece of equipment), is in when installed
clauses from the following standard:- accordance with the relevant clauses from the correctly.
following standard :-
* BSEN61800-3 (1997) EN50178 (1998)
MANUFACTURERS DECLARATIONS
This is EMC Declaration Machinery Directive Since the
provided to aid We SSD Drives Limited, address as below, The above Electronic Products potential hazards
your declare under our sole responsibility that the are components to be incorporated into are mainly
justification for above Electronic Products when installed and machinery and may not be operated alone. electrical rather
EMC operated with reference to the instructions in The complete machinery or installation using than mechanical,
compliance the Product Manual (provided with each piece this equipment may only be put into service the drive does not
when the unit of equipment) is in accordance with the when the safety considerations of the Directive fall under the
relevant clauses from the following standard:- 89/392/EEC are fully adhered to.
is used as a machinery
Particular reference should be made to
component. * BSEN61800-3 (1997) EN60204-1 (Safety of Machinery - Electrical
directive.
Equipment of Machines). However, we do
All instructions, warnings and safety supply a
information of the Product Manual must be manufacturer's
adhered to. declaration for
when the drive is
used (as a
component) in
machinery.
Dr Martin Payn (Conformance Officer)

* For information only
# Compliant with these immunity standards without specified EMC filters.
SSD DRIVES LIMITED

NEW COURTWICK LANE, LITTLEHAMPTON, WEST SUSSEX BN17 7RZ
TELEPHONE: 01903 737000 FAX: 01903 737100
Registered Number: 1159876 England. Registered Office: Southdownview Way, Worthing, West Sussex BN14 8NN
File Name: P:\CE\SAFETY\PRODUCTS\605\LVD\PRODFILE\HK389954.919
ISS: DATE DRN: MP CHKD: DRAWING NUMBER: HK389954.919

B 10.01.2005 TITLE:
SHT 1
Declarations of Conformity OF
1 SHTS

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Application Notes 13-1

APPLICATION NOTES
3
1
Application advice is available through our Technical Support Department, who can also
arrange for on-site assistance if required. Refer to Chapter 8: “Routine Maintenance and Repair”
for the address of your local Eurothem Drives company.
• Always use gold flash relays, or others designed for low current operation (5mA), on all
control wiring.
• Remove all power factor correction equipment from the motor side of the Inverter before
use.
• Avoid using motors with low efficiency and small cos ø (power factor) as they require a
larger kVA rated Inverter to produce the correct shaft kW.
Synchronous Motor Control

Although intended primarily for use with induction (asynchronous) motors, Inverters can also be
used for speed control of synchronous motors. Synchronous motors can offer economic
solutions in applications where tight control of speed is required together with the low
maintenance characteristics of an ac motor.
The two most common types of synchronous ac motor are permanent magnet and wound rotor.
In contrast to induction motors, synchronous motors run at synchronous speed whether on full
load or no load. Synchronous speed is set by the frequency of the supply applied to the stator.
The stator flux can be kept constant by keeping the stator volts/frequency ratio constant, as with
an induction motor.
Torque is produced in the motor by an increase in load angle between the stator and rotor fluxes.
Maximum torque occurs when the load angle approaches 90°. If the load angle exceeds this
value then torque drops and the motor will stall. Systems involving synchronous motors need
careful design to ensure that the motor can accelerate the load and handle transient load changes
without stalling.
Brake Motors
Brake motors are used in applications requiring a mechanical brake for safety or other
operational reasons. The motor can be a standard induction motor fitted with an electro-
mechanical brake, or it could be a special conical rotor machine. In the case of a conical rotor
machine the spring-loaded brake is controlled by the motor terminal voltage as follows:
• At rest the motor is braked.
• When the motor is energised an axial component of the magnetic field due to the conical
air-gap overcomes the force of the brake spring and draws the rotor into the stator. This
axial displacement releases the brake and allows the motor to accelerate like a normal
induction motor.
• When the motor is de-energised the magnetic field collapses and the brake spring displaces
the rotor, pushing the brake disc against the braking surface.
Inverters can be used to control the speed of conical rotor brake motors since the linear V/F
characteristic maintains the motor magnetic field constant over the speed range. It will be
necessary to set the FIXED BOOST parameter to overcome motor losses at low speed (see
FLUXING menu at level 3).

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
13-2 Application Notes
Using Multiple Motors on a Single Inverter

A single large Inverter can be used to supply several smaller motors provided that each
individual motor has overload protection.
Note: Conventional V/F control strategy must be
enabled for use with parallel motors.
(Sensorless vector control strategy cannot be
used). See the VECTOR ENABLE parameter 605
under VECTOR SET-UP menu at level 2.
The Inverter must be rated to supply the total M1/U M2/V M3/W
motor current. It is not sufficient to simply sum
the power ratings of the motors, since the Inverter
has also to supply the magnetising current for each
motor.
Note that the overload device will not prevent the
motor overheating due to inadequate cooling at low
speed. Force vented motors may be required;
consult your motor supplier. OL1 OL2
WARNING! M1 M2
All motors should be connected to the
Inverter output before the START
command is given.
Figure 13-1 Single Inverter supplying
multiple Motors
Caution
Restrict the total cable length on multiple motor installations as follows:
50 metres with no output choke fitted,

300 metres with choke as recommended in Tables 3-5 and 3-6.
Dynamic Braking
During deceleration, or with
an overhauling load, the
motor acts as a generator. EXTERNAL
Energy flows back from the RESISTOR
NETWORK
motor into the dc link +
capacitors in the frequency
Inverter. This causes the dc
link voltage to rise. If the GATE
DRIVE
dc link voltage exceeds CIRCUIT
800V (400V build) or 400V
(230V build) then the
frequency Inverter will trip
to protect the capacitors and
the Inverter power devices.
The amount of energy that
can be absorbed in the Figure 13-2 Dynamic Braking Circuit
capacitors is relatively small;
typically more than 20 % braking torque will cause the frequency Inverter to trip on
overvoltage. Dynamic braking increases the braking capability of the frequency Inverter by
dissipating the excess energy in a high power resistor connected across the dc link.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Application Notes 13-3

When the dc link voltage rises above 750V (400V build) or 385V (230V build), the brake unit
switches the external resistor network across the dc link. The brake unit switches off again
when the dc link voltage falls below the threshold level. The amount of energy produced by the
motor during regeneration depends upon the DECEL RATE parameter (refer to the SYSTEM
RAMP function block) and the inertia of the load.
Note: The dynamic braking circuit is designed to cope with short term stopping or braking only.
It is not rated for a continuously overhauling load.
The Inverter is supplied without braking resistors. Below is a guide to calculating the braking
requirements of the system.
Brake Resistor Selection

Brake resistor assemblies must be rated to absorb both peak braking power during deceleration
and the average power over the complete cycle.
2 2
0.0055J × ( n 1 − n 2 )
Peak braking power Ppk = ( W)
tb
J - total inertia (kgm2)
n1 - initial speed (rpm)
Ppk
Average braking power Pav = x tb n2 - final speed (rpm)
tc
tb - braking time (s)
tc - cycle time (s)
Obtain information on the peak power rating and the average power rating of the resistors from
the resistor manufacturer. If this information is not available, a large safety margin must be
incorporated to ensure that the resistors are not overloaded.
Note: SSD Drives can supply suitable brake resistors.
By connecting these resistors in series and in parallel the braking capacity can be selected for
the application.
The minimum resistance of the combination should not be less than that specified in Chapter 11:
“Technical Specifications” - Power Details.
The resistor(s) must be specified to the maximum dc link voltage (800V for 400V build, 400V
for 230V build).

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
13-4 Application Notes

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Serial Communications 14-1

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
4
1
Connection to the P3 Port

Using the P3 port on the Inverter, parameters can be monitored and updated by a suitable PC
programming tool.
The port is an un-isolated RS232; 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 Baud; supporting the standard EI
bisynch ASCII communications protocol. Contact SSD Drives for further information.
P3 Port
A standard P3 lead is used to connect to the Inverter.
1234
P3 Port Pin Lead Signal

1 Black 0V
2 Red 5V
3 Green TX
4 Yellow RX
6-Way Lead to DB9/DB25 Connector

Note: There is 5V present on pin 2 of the P3 port. This may damage your PC.
P3 Port Pin Lead Female DB9 Pin Female DB25 Pin

1 Black 5 7
2 Red not connected not connected
3 Green 2 3
4 Yellow 3 2

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
14-2 Serial Communications

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
Application Macros 15-1

APPLICATION MACROS
5
1
The Default Application

The Inverter is supplied with 7 macros, Macro 0 to Macro 6. Each macro recalls a pre-
programmed set of parameters when it is loaded.
• Macro 1 is the factory default macro, providing for basic speed control
• Macro 2 supplies speed control with Run Forward/Run Reverse
• Macro 3 is a set-up providing speed control with Raise/Lower Trim
• Macro 4 is for PID process control

• Macro 5 supplies speed control using preset speeds
• Macro 6 is a set-up using speed feedback
Note: To return to the default application, perform the Quick Restore Default procedure, refer to
Chapter 5: “The Operator Station” - Menu Shortcuts and Special Key Combinations.
How to Load a Macro

In the OPERATOR menu, go to the RESTORE
MMI Menu Map
DEFAULTS menu at level 2, press the M key.
1 SYSTEM
The macros are stored in this menu. RESTORE
1 DEFAULTS
1
2 RESTORE DEFAULTS menu at level 2
Use the up (∆) and down (∇) keys to select the
LOCAL
3 MACRO 1 appropriate macro, press the M key. HEALTH
SEQ REF
3 MACRO 2 Pressing the up (∆) key as instructed, loads the macro.

3 MACRO 3 Now update the non-volatile memory within the Inverter by performing a SAVE TO
MEMORY. Refer to Chapter 5: “The Operator Station” - Saving Your Application.
3 MACRO 4
3 MACRO 5
3 MACRO 6
3 MACRO 0
Macro Descriptions
Note: Parameters whose default values are product-related are indicated in the block diagrams
with * or **. Refer to Chapter 2: “An Overview of the Inverter” - Product-Related Default
Values.
Macro 0
This macro will not control a motor.
It is included to document the differences between all the configurations, using this as the base-
line.
Loading Macro 0 removes all internal links, and sets all parameter values to the values defined
for each function block in Chapter 6: Programming Your Application.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
15-2 Application Macros

The OPERATOR Menu for Macro 0
The default OPERATOR menu is shown below.
STARTUP SCREEN SETPOINT (REMOTE)

SPEED DEMAND
DRIVE FREQUENCY
MOTOR CURRENT
LOAD
DC LINK VOLTS
CURRENT LIMITING
ENTER PASSWORD

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected] Application Macros 15-3
ANALOG INPUT 1 VALUE FUNC 1 SKIP FREQUENCIES MINIMUM SPEED REFERENCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1

(1) OUTPUT [133] – 0.00%
(8) OUTPUT [346] – 0.0% (9) OUTPUT [335] – 0.00%
(10) SPEED DEMAND [255] – 0.00% (14) 0.00% – [ 45] VALUE –
BREAK [ 18] – 0.00%
0.00%
(17) 0.00% – [130] INPUT A – OUTPUT H z [363] – 0.0Hz 0.00% – [336] INPUT – SPEED SETPOINT [254] – 0.00% 100.00% – [ 46] SCALE –
100.00% – [ 14] SCALE – 0.00% – [131] INPUT B – INPUT H z [362] – 0.0Hz -100.00% – [337] MINIMUM – REVERSE [256] – FALSE 0.00% – [ 47] OFFSET –
0.00% – [ 15] OFFSET – 0.00% – [132] INPUT C – 0.00% – [340] INPUT – PROP. W/MIN. – [338] MODE – LOCAL SETPOINT [247] – 0.00% TRUE – [ 48] ABS –
0..+10V – [ 13] TYPE – A+B+C – [134] TYPE – 0.0Hz – [341] BAND 1 – LOCAL REVERSE [250] – FALSE 0..+10V – [ 49] TYPE –
FALSE – [ 12] BREAK ENABLE – 0.0Hz – [342] FREQUENCY 1 – COMMS SETPOINT [269] – 0.00%
0.00% – [ 17] BREAK VALUE – 0.0Hz – [680] BAND 2 – 0.00% – [245] REMOTE SETPOINT –
0.0Hz – [343] FREQUENCY 2 – 0.00% – [248] SPEED TRIM –
ANALOG INPUT 2 0.0Hz – [681] BAND 3 – 100.0 0% – [252] MAX SPEED CLAMP –

(2) 0.0Hz – [344] FREQUENCY 3 – -100.0 0% – [253] MIN SPEED CLAMP –
BREAK [ 27] – 0.00% 0.0Hz – [682] BAND 4 – FALSE – [243] TRIM IN LOCAL –
(18)
100.00% – [ 23] SCALE – 0.0Hz – [345] FREQUENCY 4 – FALSE – [249] REMOTE REVERSE –
0.00% – [ 24] OFFSET –

0..+10V – [ 22] TYPE – SETPOINT SCALE
FALSE – [ 21] BREAK ENABLE – RAISE/LOWER OUTPUT [ 59] – 0.00% lf
0.00% – [ 26] BREAK VALUE – (15) 0.00% – [ 58] INPUT –

OUTPUT [325] – 0.00% SYSTEM RAMP
FALSE – [327] RAISE INPUT – * 50.0Hz – [ 57] MAX SPEED –
I/O TRIPS RAMPING [698] – FALSE
FALSE – [328] LOWER INPUT – LINEAR – [244] RAMP TYPE –
FALSE – [234] EXTERNAL TRIP –
10.0s – [326] RAMP RATE –
FALSE – [235] INPUT 1 BREAK – 10.0s – [258] ACCEL RATE –
DIGITAL INPUT 1
100.00% – [330] MAX VALUE – ZERO SPEED
FALSE – [236] INPUT 2 BREAK – 10.0s – [259] DECEL RATE –
(3) AT ZERO SPEED [360] – FALSE
-100.00% – [329] MIN VALUE – 10.0s – [267] SYMETRIC RATE –
FALSE – [ 30] INVERT – – [358] INPUT –
0.00% – [331] RESET VALUE – (16)
FALSE – [268] SYMETRIC MODE –
FALSE – [332] RESET – I*t TRIP 0.50% – [357] LEVEL –
DIGITAL INPUT 2 FALSE – [260] RAMP HOLD –
105.00% – [237] I*t THRESHOLD – 0.00% – [359] BAND –
VALUE [ 34] – FALSE TRUE – [691] SRAMP CONTINUOUS –
(4)
60s – [238] I*t TIME –
FALSE – [ 33] INVERT – 10.00% – [692] SRAMP ACCEL –
150.00% – [239] I*t UPPER LIMIT –
10.00% – [693] SRAMP DECEL –
DIGITAL INPUT 3 10.00% – [694] SRAMP JERK 1 –

(5) 10.00% – [695] SRAMP JERK 2 –
FALSE – [ 36] INVERT – SEQUENCING LOGIC STALL TRIP 10.00% – [696] SRAMP JERK 3 –
TRIPPED [289] – FALSE (12) 100.00% – [240] STALL LIMIT – 10.00% – [697] SRAMP JERK 4 –
DIGITAL INPUT 4 RUNNING [285] – FALSE (13) 600.0s – [241] STALL TIME –
(6) JOGGING [302] – FALSE STOP
TRUE – [ 39] INVERT – STOPPING [303] – FALSE
RAMPED – [279] RUN STOP MODE –
OUTPUT CONTACTOR [286] – FALSE
10.0s – [263] STOP RATE –
DIGITAL INPUT 5 TRIPS STATUS
SWITCH ON ENABLE [288] – FALSE
0.10% – [266] STOP ZERO SPEED –
ACTIVE TRIPS [ 4] – 0000
VALUE [ 43] – FALSE SWITCHED ON [306] – TRUE
0.500s – [284] STOP DELAY –
– WARNINGS [ 5] – 0000
FALSE – [ 42] INVERT READY [287] – FALSE
RAMPED – [304] FAST STOP MODE –
(7) FIRST TRIP [ 6] – NO TRIP
SYSTEM RESET [305] – TRUE
30.0s – [275] FAST STOP LIMIT –
0600 – [231] DISABLED TRIPS –
MAIN SEQ STATE [301] – NOT READY
0.1s – [264] FAST STOP RATE –
REMOTE REV OUT [296] – FALSE (11)
1200Hz/s – [126] FINAL STOP RATE –
HEALTHY [274] – FALSE
FALSE – [291] RUN FWD – TRIPS HISTORY
FALSE – [292] RUN REV – TRIP 1 [NEWEST] [500] – NO TRIP JOG
FALSE – [293] /STOP – TRIP 2 [501] – NO TRIP 10.0 0%s – [246] SETPOINT –
FALSE – [280] JOG – TRIP 3 [502] – NO TRIP 1.0s – [261] ACCEL RATE –
TRUE – [276] DRIVE ENABLE – TRIP 4 [503] – NO TRIP 1.0s – [262] DECEL RATE –
TRUE – [277] /FAST STOP – TRIP 5 [504] – NO TRIP
TRUE – [278] /COAST STOP – TRIP 6 [505] – NO TRIP
FALSE – [294] REMOTE REVERSE – TRIP 7 [506] – NO TRIP
FALSE – [282] REM TRIP RESET – TRIP 8 [507] – NO TRIP DIGITAL OUTPUT 1
TRUE – [290] TRIP RST BY RUN – TRIP 9 [508] – NO TRIP FALSE – [ 52] VALUE –
FALSE – [283] POWER UP START – TRIP 10 [OLDEST] [509] – NO TRIP TRUE – [ 51] INVERT –
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2
FALSE – [ 55] VALUE –

Macro 1: Basic Speed Control (default)

Macro 1: Basic Speed Control (default)

This macro provides standard control of the inverter.
Terminal Name Purpose Comment

2 ANALOG INPUT 1 Setpoint 0V = 0%, 10V = 100%
4 ANALOG INPUT 2 Setpoint Trim 0V = 0%, 10V = 100%
5 ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Ramp Output Absolute Speed Demand, 0V =
0%, 10V = 100%
7 DIGITAL INPUT 1 Run 24V = Run
8 DIGITAL INPUT 2 Trip Reset 0V to 24V transition to reset trips.
9 DIGITAL INPUT 3 Direction 0V = Forward, 24V = Reverse
10 DIGITAL INPUT 4 External Trip 0V = Trip
11 DIGITAL INPUT 5 Jog 24V = Jog
13 DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 Health 0V = Tripped, i.e. not healthy
14 DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 Running 0V = Stopped, 24V = Running


SPEED DEMAND
DRIVE FREQUENCY
MOTOR CURRENT
LOAD
DC LINK VOLTS
CURRENT LIMITING
ENTER PASSWORD


(1) OUTPUT [133] – 0.00%
(8) OUTPUT [346] – 0.0% (9) OUTPUT [335] – 0.00% SPEED DEMAND [255] – 0.0 % (14) 0.00% – [ 45] VALUE –
(10)
BREAK [ 18] – 0.00% 0.00% – [130] INPUT A – OUTPUT H z [363] – 0.0Hz 0.00% – [336] INPUT – SPEED SETPOINT [254] – 0.00% 100.00% – [ 46] SCALE –
(17)

BREAK [ 27] – 0.00% 0.0Hz – [682] BAND 4 – FALSE – [243] TRIM IN LOCAL –
(18)
0.00% – [ 24] OFFSET –


OUTPUT [325] – 0.00%
SYSTEM RAMP * 50.0Hz – [ 57] MAX SPEED –
FALSE – [327] RAISE INPUT –
I/O TRIPS
FALSE – [328] LOWER INPUT – RAMPING [698] – FALSE
10.0s – [326] RAMP RATE – LINEAR – [244] RAMP TYPE –
DIGITAL INPUT 1 FALSE – [235] INPUT 1 BREAK –
100.00% – [330] MAX VALUE – 10.0s – [258] ACCEL RATE – ZERO SPEED
FALSE – [236] INPUT 2 BREAK –
(3) 10.0s – [259] DECEL RATE – AT ZERO SPEED [360] – FALSE
-100.00% – [329] MIN VALUE –
FALSE – [ 30] INVERT – 10.0s – [267] SYMETRIC RATE – – [358] INPUT –
0.00% – [331] RESET VALUE – (16)
FALSE – [332] RESET – I*t TRIP FALSE – [268] SYMETRIC MODE – 0.50% – [357] LEVEL –
DIGITAL INPUT 2
105.00% – [237] I*t THRESHOLD – FALSE – [260] RAMP HOLD – 0.00% – [359] BAND –
(4) TRUE – [691] SRAMP CONTINUOUS –
60s – [238] I*t TIME –
150.00% – [239] I*t UPPER LIMIT –
10.00% – [693] SRAMP DECEL –
DIGITAL INPUT 3
10.00% – [694] SRAMP JERK 1 –
(5) 10.00% – [695] SRAMP JERK 2 –
FALSE – [ 36] INVERT – SEQUENCING LOGIC STALL TRIP
10.00% – [696] SRAMP JERK 3 –
TRIPPED [289] – FALSE (12) 100.00% – [240] STALL LIMIT –
10.00% – [697] SRAMP JERK 4 –
DIGITAL INPUT 4 RUNNING [285] – FALSE 600.0s – [241] STALL TIME –
(13)
(6) JOGGING [302] – FALSE
TRUE – [ 39] INVERT – STOP
STOPPING [303] – FALSE
OUTPUT CONTACTOR [286] – FALSE RAMPED – [279] RUN STOP MODE –
DIGITAL INPUT 5 TRIPS STATUS 10.0s – [263] STOP RATE –
SWITCH ON ENABLE [288] – FALSE
ACTIVE TRIPS [ 4] – 0000 0.10% – [266] STOP ZERO SPEED –
VALUE [ 43] – FALSE SWITCHED ON [306] – TRUE
– WARNINGS [ 5] – 0000 0.500s – [284] STOP DELAY –
FALSE – [ 42] INVERT READY [287] – FALSE
(7) FIRST TRIP [ 6] – NO TRIP RAMPED – [304] FAST STOP MODE –
SYSTEM RESET [305] – TRUE
0600 – [231] DISABLED TRIPS – 30.0s – [275] FAST STOP LIMIT –
MAIN SEQ STATE [301] – NOT READY
REMOTE REV OUT [296] – FALSE (11) 0.1s – [264] FAST STOP RATE –
HEALTHY [274] – FALSE 1200Hz/s – [126] FINAL STOP RATE –

FALSE – [293] /STOP – TRIP 2 [501] – NO TRIP
10.0 0% – [246] SETPOINT –
FALSE – [280] JOG – TRIP 3 [502] – NO TRIP
1.0s – [261] ACCEL RATE –
TRUE – [276] DRIVE ENABLE – TRIP 4 [503] – NO TRIP
1.0s – [262] DECEL RATE –
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2

Macro 2: Run Forward/Run Reverse

Macro 2: Run Forward/Run Reverse

Same as Macro 1 except the sequencing is controlled by Run Forward and Run Reverse
digital inputs.

5 ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Ramp Output Absolute Speed Demand, 0V = 0%,
10V = 100%
7 DIGITAL INPUT 1 Run Forward 24V = Run Forward
8 DIGITAL INPUT 2 Run Reverse Trips reset on 0V to 24V transition.
9 DIGITAL INPUT 3 Trip Reset 0V to 24V transition to reset trips
11 DIGITAL INPUT 5 Jog 24V = Jog


SPEED DEMAND
DRIVE FREQUENCY
MOTOR CURRENT
LOAD
DC LINK VOLTS
CURRENT LIMITING
ENTER PASSWORD

(1) OUTPUT [133] – 0.00%
(8) OUTPUT [346] – 0.0% (9) OUTPUT [335] – 0.00%
BREAK [ 18] – 0.00%

BREAK [ 27] – (18)

0.00% 0.0Hz – [682] BAND 4 – FALSE – [243] TRIM IN LOCAL –
0.00% – [ 24] OFFSET –


0.00%
0.00%
OUTPUT [325] – 0.00%
(19) SYSTEM RAMP
* 50.0Hz – [ 57] MAX SPEED –
FALSE – [327] RAISE INPUT –
RAMPING [698] – FALSE
I/O TRIPS
FALSE – [328] LOWER INPUT – LINEAR – [244] RAMP TYPE –
10.0s – [326] RAMP RATE –
FALSE – [235] INPUT 1 BREAK – 10.0s – [258] ACCEL RATE –
DIGITAL INPUT 1
FALSE – [236] INPUT 2 BREAK – 10.0s – [259] DECEL RATE –
-10.00% – [329] MIN VALUE – 10.0s – [267] SYMETRIC RATE –
0.00% – [331] RESET VALUE – (16)
105.00% – [237] I*t THRESHOLD – 0.00% – [359] BAND –
(4)
60s – [238] I*t TIME –
150.00% – [239] I*t UPPER LIMIT –
10.00% – [693] SRAMP DECEL –

(5) 10.00% – [695] SRAMP JERK 2 –
FALSE – [ 36] INVERT – SEQUENCING LOGIC STALL TRIP 10.00% – [696] SRAMP JERK 3 –
TRIPPED [289] – FALSE (12) 100.00% – [240] STALL LIMIT – 10.00% – [697] SRAMP JERK 4 –
DIGITAL INPUT 4 RUNNING [285] – FALSE (13) 600.0s – [241] STALL TIME –
VALUE [ 40] – (6)
FALSE JOGGING [302] – FALSE STOP
TRUE – [ 39] INVERT – STOPPING [303] – FALSE RAMPED – [279] RUN STOP MODE –
OUTPUT CONTACTOR [286] – FALSE 10.0s – [263] STOP RATE –
DIGITAL INPUT 5 TRIPS STATUS
SWITCH ON ENABLE [288] – FALSE 0.10% – [266] STOP ZERO SPEED –
(7) SWITCHED ON [306] – TRUE 0.500s – [284] STOP DELAY –
– WARNINGS [ 5] – 0000
FALSE – [ 42] INVERT READY [287] – FALSE RAMPED – [304] FAST STOP MODE –
FIRST TRIP [ 6] – NO TRIP
SYSTEM RESET [305] – TRUE 30.0s – [275] FAST STOP LIMIT –
0600 – [231] DISABLED TRIPS –
MAIN SEQ STATE [301] – NOT READY 0.1s – [264] FAST STOP RATE –
REMOTE REV OUT [296] – FALSE(11) 1200Hz/s – [126] FINAL STOP RATE –
HEALTHY [274] – FALSE
FALSE – [293] /STOP – TRIP 2 [501] – NO TRIP 10.0 0% – [246] SETPOINT –
FALSE – [280] JOG – TRIP 3 [502] – NO TRIP 1.0s – [261] ACCEL RATE –
TRUE – [276] DRIVE ENABLE – TRIP 4 [503] – NO TRIP 1.0s – [262] DECEL RATE –
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2

Macro 3: Raise/Lower Trim

Macro 3: Raise/Lower Trim

This macro provides a raise/lower (push button) interface for an additional Setpoint Trim. The Setpoint is
derived from the sum of ANALOG INPUT 1, ANALOG INPUT 2 and the output of the raise/lower ramp.
This ramp is controlled by the 3 digital inputs RAISE INPUT, LOWER INPUT and RESET of the
RAISE/LOWER function block.
The raise/lower trim is restricted to be +/- 10.00%. This limit is set by the MIN VALUE and MAX VALUE
parameters in the RAISE/LOWER function block.
Note that the raise/lower ramp output is automatically preserved in non-volatile memory during a
power-down.

10V = 100%
8 DIGITAL INPUT 2 Raise 24V = Ramp Up
9 DIIGITAL INPUT 3 Lower 24V = Ramp Down
11 DIGITAL INPUT 5 Reset 24V = Reset and Hold Raise Lower


SPEED DEMAND
DRIVE FREQUENCY
MOTOR CURRENT
LOAD
DC LINK VOLTS
CURRENT LIMITING
ENTER PASSWORD

ANALOG INPUT 1 PID MINIMUM SPEED REFERENCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1
(1) PID OUTPUT [320] – 0.00% (9) OUTPUT [335] – 0.00% SPEED DEMAND [255] – 0.00% 0.00% – [ 45] VALUE –
(10) (14)
BREAK [ 18] – 0.00% PID ERROR [766] – 0.00 % 0.00% – [336] INPUT – SPEED SETPOINT [254] – 0.00% 100.00% – [ 46] SCALE –
(17)
100.00% – [ 14] SCALE – – [310] SETPOINT – -100.00% – [337] MINIMUM – REVERSE [256] – FALSE 0.00% – [ 47] OFFSET –
0.00% – [ 15] OFFSET – – [764] FEEDBACK – PROP. W/MIN. – [338] MODE – LOCAL SETPOINT [247] – 0.00% TRUE – [ 48] ABS –
0..+10V – [ 13] TYPE – FALSE – [763] SETPOINT NEGATE – LOCAL REVERSE [250] – FALSE 0..+10V – [ 49] TYPE –
FALSE – [ 12] BREAK ENABLE – FALSE – [765] FEEDBACK NEGATE – COMMS SETPOINT [269] – 0.00%
0.00% – [ 17] BREAK VALUE – – [311] ENABLE – 0.00% – [245] REMOTE SETPOINT –
FALSE – [312] INTEGRAL DEFEAT – 0.00% – [248] SPEED TRIM –
ANALOG INPUT 2 1.0 – [313] P GAIN – 100.0 0% – [252] MAX SPEED CLAMP –
VALUE
[ 25] – FALSE 1.00 s – [314] I TIME CONST – -100.0 0% – [253] MIN SPEED CLAMP –
(2)
BREAK [ 27] – 0.00% 0.000 s – [315] D TIME CONST – FALSE – [243] TRIM IN LOCAL –
(18)
100.00% – [ 23] SCALE – 2.000 s – [316] FILTER TC – FALSE – [249] REMOTE REVERSE –
0.00% – [ 24] OFFSET – 100.00 % – [317] OUTPUT POS LIMIT –
0..+10V – [ 22] TYPE – -100.00 % – [318] OUTPUT NEG LIMIT – SETPOINT SCALE
SYSTEM RAMP
FALSE – [ 21] BREAK ENABLE – RAISE/LOWER 1.0000 – [319] OUTPUT SCALING – OUTPUT [ 59] – 0.00% lf
0.00% – [ 26] BREAK VALUE – 0.00% – [ 58] INPUT –
OUTPUT [325] – 0.00% LINEAR – [244] RAMP TYPE – (15)
* 50.0Hz – [ 57] MAX SPEED –
FALSE – [327] RAISE INPUT – **10.0s – [258] ACCEL RATE –
I/O TRIPS
FALSE – [328] LOWER INPUT – **10.0s – [259] DECEL RATE –
10.0s – [326] RAMP RATE – **10.0s – [267] SYMETRIC RATE –
DIGITAL INPUT 1 FALSE – [235] INPUT 1 BREAK –
FALSE – [236] INPUT 2 BREAK – FALSE – [268] SYMETRIC MODE –
-100.00% – [329] MIN VALUE – FALSE – [260] RAMP HOLD –
0.00% – [331] RESET VALUE – TRUE – [691] SRAMP CONTINUOUS – (16)
10.00% – [692] SRAMP ACCEL –
DIGITAL INPUT 2
105.00% – [237] I*t THRESHOLD – 10.00% – [693] SRAMP DECEL – 0.00% – [359] BAND –
(4) 60s – [238] I*t TIME – 10.00% – [694] SRAMP JERK 1 –
150.00% – [239] I*t UPPER LIMIT – 10.00% – [695] SRAMP JERK 2 –

CUSTOM SCREEN 1 OPERATOR MENU
VALUE [ 37] – FALSE STALL TRIP 10.00% – [697] SRAMP JERK 4 –
(5) 16 – [ 74] TAG NO – 1 – [93] STARTUP SCREEN –
FALSE – [ 36] INVERT – SEQUENCING LOGIC 100.00% – [240] STALL LIMIT –
PROCESS SETPOINT – [324] NAME – 255 – [626] OPERATOR MENU 2 –
TRIPPED [289] – FALSE (12) 600.0s – [241] STALL TIME –
% – [323] UNITS – 591 – [627] OPERATOR MENU 3 –
STOP
DIGITAL INPUT 4 RUNNING [285] – FALSE (13) 67 – [628] OPERATOR MENU 4 –
xxx.x_ – [334] DECIMAL PLACE –
(6) JOGGING [302] – FALSE A/B * X + C – [125] FORMULA – 72 – [629] OPERATOR MENU 5 –
10.0s – [263] STOP RATE –
TRUE – [ 39] INVERT – STOPPING [303] – FALSE TRIPS STATUS 75 – [630] OPERATOR MENU 6 –
100 – [321] COEFFICIENT A –
OUTPUT CONTACTOR [286] – FALSE ACTIVE TRIPS [ 4] – 0000 100 – [ 44] COEFFICIENT B – 370 – [631] OPERATOR MENU 7 –
0.500s – [284] STOP DELAY –
DIGITAL INPUT 5 SWITCH ON ENABLE [288] – FALSE WARNINGS [ 5] – 0000 0 – [322] COEFFICIENT C – 1001 – [632] OPERATOR MENU 8 –
(7) SWITCHED ON [306] – TRUE FIRST TRIP [ 6] – NO TRIP 30000 – [101] HIGH LIMIT – 1002 – [633] OPERATOR MENU 9 –
30.0s – [275] FAST STOP LIMIT –
FALSE – [ 42] INVERT – READY [287] – FALSE 0600 – [231] DISABLED TRIPS – 310 – [634] OPERATOR MENU 10 –
-30000 – [ 53] LOW LIMIT –
0.1s – [264] FAST STOP RATE –
SYSTEM RESET [305] – TRUE 311 – [635] OPERATOR MENU 11 –
1200Hz/s – [126] FINAL STOP RATE –
MAIN SEQ STATE [301] – NOT READY CUSTOM SCREEN 2 0 – [636] OPERATOR MENU 12 –
REMOTE REV OUT [296] – FALSE (11) 25 – [371] TAG NO – 0 – [637] OPERATOR MENU 13 –
HEALTHY [274] – FALSE PROCESS FEEDBACK – [378] NAME – 0 – [638] OPERATOR MENU 14 –
JOG
FALSE – [291] RUN FWD – % – [377] UNITS – 0 – [639] OPERATOR MENU 15 –
10.00% – [246] SETPOINT –
FALSE – [292] RUN REV – TRIPS HISTORY xxx.x_ – [379] DECIMAL PLACE –
1.0s – [261] ACCEL RATE –
FALSE – [293] /STOP – TRIP 1 [NEWEST] [500] – NO TRIP A/B * X + C – [676] FORMULA –
1.0s – [262] DECEL RATE –
FALSE – [280] JOG – TRIP 2 [501] – NO TRIP 100 – [375] COEFFICIENT A –
TRUE – [276] DRIVE ENABLE – TRIP 3 [502] – NO TRIP 100 – [673] COEFFICIENT B –
TRUE – [277] /FAST STOP – TRIP 4 [503] – NO TRIP 0 – [376] COEFFICIENT C –
TRUE – [278] /COAST STOP – TRIP 5 [504] – NO TRIP 30000 – [674] HIGH LIMIT –
FALSE – [294] REMOTE REVERSE – TRIP 6 [505] – NO TRIP -30000 – [675] LOW LIMIT –
TRUE – [290] TRIP RST BY RUN – TRIP 8 [507] – NO TRIP
FALSE – [283] POWER UP START – TRIP 9 [508] – NO TRIP
TRUE – [ 51] INVERT –
TRIP 10 [OLDEST] [509] – NO TRIP
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2

Macro 4: Process PID

Macro 4: Process PID

PID error derived from the difference of 2 analog inputs.
Digital input to disable PID.
Additional Operator Menu display parameters.

2 ANALOG INPUT 1 Process 0V = 0%, 10V = 100%
Setpoint
4 ANALOG INPUT 2 Process 0V = 0%, 10V = 100%
Setpoint Trim
10V = 100%
11 DIGITAL INPUT 5 PID Enable 0V = PID Disabled, 24V = PID
Enabled


SPEED DEMAND
DRIVE FREQUENCY
MOTOR CURRENT
LOAD
DC LINK VOLTS
CURRENT LIMITING
PROCESS SETPOINT
PROCESS FEEDBACK
PID ERROR
PID ENABLE
ENTER PASSWORD

(1) OUTPUT [133] – 0.00%
(8) OUTPUT [346] – 0.0% (9) OUTPUT [335] – 0.00%
BREAK [ 18] – 0.00%
I/O TRIPS 0.0Hz – [343] FREQUENCY 2 – 0.00% – [248] SPEED TRIM –
ANALOG INPUT 2 – [234] EXTERNAL TRIP – 0.0Hz – [681] BAND 3 – 100.0 0% – [252] MAX SPEED CLAMP –

(2) – [235] INPUT 1 BREAK – 0.0Hz – [344] FREQUENCY 3 – -100.0 0% – [253] MIN SPEED CLAMP –
0.00%
BREAK [ 27] – (18) – [236] INPUT 2 BREAK – 0.0Hz – [682] BAND 4 – FALSE – [243] TRIM IN LOCAL –
0.00% – [ 24] OFFSET –

(22)
FALSE – [ 21] BREAK ENABLE – SEQUENCING LOGIC OUTPUT [ 59] – 0.00% lf

TRIPPED [289] – FALSE (12) SYSTEM RAMP
* 50.0Hz – [ 57] MAX SPEED –
RUNNING [285] – FALSE
JOGGING [302] – FALSE
FALSE LINEAR – [244] RAMP TYPE –
FALSE **10.0s – [258] ACCEL RATE –
DIGITAL INPUT 1 ZERO SPEED
FALSE **10.0s – [259] DECEL RATE –
(3) AT ZERO SPEED [360] – TRUE
SWITCH ON ENABLE [288] – TRUE
**10.0s – [267] SYMETRIC RATE –
SWITCHED ON [306] – FALSE (16)
READY [287] – FALSE 0.50% – [357] LEVEL –
SYSTEM RESET [305] – FALSE 0.00% – [359] BAND –
(4)
MAIN SEQ STATE [301] – START ENABLED
REMOTE REV OUT [296] – FALSE (11) 10.00% – [693] SRAMP DECEL –
HEALTHY [274] – TRUE
FALSE – [291] RUN FWD – OPERATOR MENU
(5) 10.00% – [695] SRAMP JERK 2 –
FALSE – [292] RUN REV – 1 – [93] STARTUP SCREEN –
FALSE – [ 36] INVERT – 10.00% – [696] SRAMP JERK 3 –
FALSE – [293] /STOP – 255 – [626] OPERATOR MENU 2 –
10.00% – [697] SRAMP JERK 4 –
– [280] JOG – 591 – [627] OPERATOR MENU 3 –
DIGITAL INPUT 4
TRUE – [276] DRIVE ENABLE – 67 – [628] OPERATOR MENU 4 –
VALUE [ 40] – (6)
FALSE STOP
TRUE – [277] /FAST STOP – 72 – [629] OPERATOR MENU 5 –
TRUE – [278] /COAST STOP – 355 – [630] OPERATOR MENU 6 –
10.0s – [263] STOP RATE –
– [294] REMOTE REVERSE – 356 – [631] OPERATOR MENU 7 –
DIGITAL INPUT 5
– [282] REM TRIP RESET – 347 – [632] OPERATOR MENU 8 –
(7) 0.500s – [284] STOP DELAY –
TRUE – [290] TRIP RST BY RUN – 348 – [633] OPERATOR MENU 9 –
FALSE – [ 42] INVERT
FALSE – [283] POWER UP START – 349 – [634] OPERATOR MENU 10 –
I*t TRIP 30.0s – [275] FAST STOP LIMIT –
350 – [635] OPERATOR MENU 11 –
DIGITAL INPUT 6 PRESET 1 105.00% – [237] I*t THRESHOLD – 0.1s – [264] FAST STOP RATE –
VALUE [726] – (19) OUTPUT 1 [356] – 60s – [238] I*t TIME – 1200Hz/s – [126] FINAL STOP RATE –
FALSE – [725] INVERT – VALUE FUNC 2 OUTPUT 2 [372] – 0.00% 150.00% – [239] I*t UPPER LIMIT –
OUTPUT [138] – (21) – [355] SELECT INPUT –
JOG 354 – [639] OPERATOR MENU 15 –
DIGITAL INPUT 7 – [135] INPUT A – 0.00% – [347] INPUT 0 –
STALL TRIP 10.0 0% – [246] SETPOINT –
VALUE [728] – (20) – [136] INPUT B – 25.00% – [348] INPUT 1 –
100.00% – [240] STALL LIMIT – 1.0s – [261] ACCEL RATE –
FALSE – [727] INVERT – 0.00% – [137] INPUT C – 50.00% – [349] INPUT 2 –
600.0s – [241] STALL TIME – 1.0s – [262] DECEL RATE –
BINARY DECODE – [139] TYPE – 100.00% – [350] INPUT 3 –
0.00% – [351] INPUT 4 – DIGITAL OUTPUT 1
0.00% – [352] INPUT 5 –
0.00% – [353] INPUT 6 –
0.00% – [354] INPUT 7 – (13)
TRIPS HISTORY
TRIPS STATUS TRIP 1 [NEWEST] [500] – NO TRIP
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2
ACTIVE TRIPS [ 4] – 0000 TRIP 2 [501] – NO TRIP
WARNINGS [ 5] – 0000 TRIP 3 [502] – NO TRIP
FIRST TRIP [ 6] – NO TRIP TRIP 4 [503] – NO TRIP
0600 – [231] DISABLED TRIPS – TRIP 5 [504] – NO TRIP
TRIP 10 [OLDEST] [509] – NO TRIP
Macro 5: Preset Speeds

Macro 5: Preset Speeds

Digital inputs select up to 4 preset speeds.

5 ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Ramp Output Absolute Speed Demand,
0V = 0%, 10V = 100%
(connect to terminal 18)
11 DIGITAL INPUT 5 PID Enable 0V = PID Disabled,
24V = PID Enabled
16 DIGITAL INPUT 6 Preset 1 Preset Speed Select
17 DIGITAL INPUT 7 Preset 2 Preset Speed Select
The Operator Menu System for Macro 5

The default Operator menu system is shown below.

SPEED DEMAND
DRIVE FREQUENCY
MOTOR CURRENT
LOAD
PRESET 1 SELECT
PRESET 1 OUTPUT 1
PRESET 1 INPUT 0
PRESET 1 INPUT 1
PRESET 1 INPUT 2
PRESET 1 INPUT 3
PRESET 1 INPUT 4
PRESET 1 INPUT 5
PRESET 1 INPUT 6
PRESET 1 INPUT 7
ENTER PASSWORD

ANALOG INPUT 1 VALUE FUNC 1 REFERENCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1
(1) OUTPUT [133] – 0.00%
BREAK [ 18] – 0.00%
(17) 0.00% – [130] INPUT A – MINIMUM SPEED SPEED SETPOINT [254] – 0.00% 100.00% – [ 46] SCALE –
100.00% – [ 14] SCALE – 0.00% – [131] INPUT B – OUTPUT [335] – 0.00%
(10) REVERSE [256] – FALSE 0.00% – [ 47] OFFSET –
0.00% – [ 15] OFFSET – 0.00% – [132] INPUT C – 0.00% – [336] INPUT – LOCAL SETPOINT [247] – 0.00% TRUE – [ 48] ABS –
0..+10V – [ 13] TYPE – A+B+C – [134] TYPE – -100.00% – [337] MINIMUM – LOCAL REVERSE [250] – FALSE 0..+10V – [ 49] TYPE –
FALSE – [ 12] BREAK ENABLE – PROP. W/MIN. – [338] MODE – COMMS SETPOINT [269] – 0.00% PID
0.00% – [ 17] BREAK VALUE – 0.00% – [245] REMOTE SETPOINT – PID OUTPUT [320] –
ZERO SPEED
I/O TRIPS 0.00% – [248] SPEED TRIM – PID ERROR [766] – 0.00 %
– [310] SETPOINT – AT ZERO SPEED [360] – TRUE
ANALOG INPUT 2 – [234] EXTERNAL TRIP – 100.0 0% – [252] MAX SPEED CLAMP – (15)
– [764] FEEDBACK – (16) – [358] INPUT –
(2) – [235] INPUT 1 BREAK – -100.00 % – [253] MIN SPEED CLAMP –
FALSE – [763] SETPOINT NEGATE – 0.50% – [357] LEVEL –
0.00%
BREAK [ 27] – (18) – [236] INPUT 2 BREAK – FALSE – [243] TRIM IN LOCAL –
FALSE – [765] FEEDBACK NEGATE – 0.00% – [359] BAND –
100.00% – [ 23] SCALE – – [249] REMOTE REVERSE –
– [311] ENABLE –
0.00% – [ 24] OFFSET –
0..+10V – [ 22] TYPE – FALSE – [312] INTEGRAL DEFEAT –
SEQUENCING LOGIC 1.0 – [313] P GAIN –

FALSE – [ 21] BREAK ENABLE –
1.00 s – [314] I TIME CONST –
0.00% – [ 26] BREAK VALUE – TRIPPED [289] – FALSE (12)
0.000 s – [315] D TIME CONST –
RUNNING [285] – FALSE
(20) 2.000 s – [316] FILTER TC –
JOGGING [302] – FALSE
FALSE 8.00 % – [317] OUTPUT POS LIMIT –
DIGITAL INPUT 1 FALSE -8.00 % – [318] OUTPUT NEG LIMIT –
FALSE 1.0000 – [319] OUTPUT SCALING –
(3) SWITCH ON ENABLE [288] – TRUE
SWITCHED ON [306] – FALSE
READY [287] – FALSE (21)
DIGITAL INPUT 2
SYSTEM RESET [305] – FALSE SETPOINT SCALE
(4)
MAIN SEQ STATE [301] – START ENABLED VALUE FUNC 2
FALSE – [ 33] INVERT – OUTPUT [ 59] – 0.00% lf
REMOTE REV OUT [296] – FALSE (11) ENCODER OUTPUT [138] – (22) 0.00% – [ 58] INPUT –
HEALTHY [274] – TRUE
DIGITAL INPUT 3 POSITION [748] – 0 – [135] INPUT A – * 50.0Hz – [ 57] MAX SPEED –
FALSE – [291] RUN FWD –
(5) SPEED Hz [568] – 0.0 Hz (19) – [136] INPUT B –
FALSE – [292] RUN REV –
FALSE – [ 36] INVERT – SPEED RPM [569] – 0 n/min 0.00% – [137] INPUT C –
FALSE – [293] /STOP –
SPEED % [749] – (8) A+B+C – [139] TYPE –
SYSTEM RAMP
– [280] JOG –
DIGITAL INPUT 4 QUADRATURE – [565] MODE –
TRUE – [276] DRIVE ENABLE – RAMPING [698] – FALSE
VALUE [ 40] – (6)
FALSE FALSE – [747] RESET –
STOP LINEAR – [244] RAMP TYPE –
TRUE – [277] /FAST STOP –
TRUE – [ 39] INVERT – 1000 – [566] LINES –
RAMPED – [279] RUN STOP MODE – **10.0s – [258] ACCEL RATE –
TRUE – [278] /COAST STOP –
10.0s – [263] STOP RATE – **10.0s – [259] DECEL RATE –
– [294] REMOTE REVERSE – 10.0V – [761] SUPPLY –
DIGITAL INPUT 5
0.10% – [266] STOP ZERO SPEED – **10.0s – [267] SYMETRIC RATE –
– [282] REM TRIP RESET –
(7) 0.500s – [284] STOP DELAY – FALSE – [268] SYMETRIC MODE –
TRUE – [290] TRIP RST BY RUN –
FALSE – [ 42] INVERT
RAMPED – [304] FAST STOP MODE – FALSE – [260] RAMP HOLD –
FALSE – [283] POWER UP START –
I*t TRIP 30.0s – [275] FAST STOP LIMIT – TRUE – [691] SRAMP CONTINUOUS –
105.00% – [237] I*t THRESHOLD – 0.1s – [264] FAST STOP RATE – 10.00% – [692] SRAMP ACCEL –
60s – [238] I*t TIME – 1200Hz/s – [126] FINAL STOP RATE – 10.00% – [693] SRAMP DECEL –
150.00% – [239] I*t UPPER LIMIT – 10.00% – [694] SRAMP JERK 1 –

10.00% – [695] SRAMP JERK 2 –
JOG
10.00% – [696] SRAMP JERK 3 –
STALL TRIP 10.0 0% – [246] SETPOINT –
10.00% – [697] SRAMP JERK 4 –
100.00% – [240] STALL LIMIT – 1.0s – [261] ACCEL RATE –
OPERATOR MENU
600.0s – [241] STALL TIME – 1.0s – [262] DECEL RATE –
1 – [93] STARTUP SCREEN –
255 – [626] OPERATOR MENU 2 – DIGITAL OUTPUT 1
591 – [627] OPERATOR MENU 3 – FALSE – [ 52] VALUE –

67 – [628] OPERATOR MENU 4 – TRUE – [ 51] INVERT –
(13)
72 – [629] OPERATOR MENU 5 – TRIPS HISTORY
75 – [630] OPERATOR MENU 6 – TRIPS STATUS TRIP 1 [NEWEST] [500] – NO TRIP
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2
370 – [631] OPERATOR MENU 7 – TRIP 2 [501] – NO TRIP
WARNINGS [ 5] – 0000 TRIP 3 [502] – NO TRIP
FIRST TRIP [ 6] – NO TRIP TRIP 4 [503] – NO TRIP
0600 – [231] DISABLED TRIPS – TRIP 5 [504] – NO TRIP
766 – [639] OPERATOR MENU 15 – TRIP 10 [OLDEST] [509] – NO TRIP
Macro 6: Closed-Loop Speed Feedback

Macro 6: Closed-Loop Speed Feedback

Encoder speed feedback.
PID speed regulation loop.

5 ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Ramp Output Absolute Speed Demand, 0V =
0%, 10V = 100%
10 DIGITAL INPUT 4 External Trip 0V = Trip (connect to terminal
18)
11 DIGITAL INPUT 5 PID Enable 0V = PID Disabled, 24V = PID
Enabled
The Operator Menu System for Macro 6

The default Operator menu system is shown below.

SPEED DEMAND
DRIVE FREQUENCY
MOTOR CURRENT
LOAD
DC LINK VOLTS
CURRENT LIMITING
PID OUT SCALING
PID P GAIN
PID I TIME CONST
PID D TIME CONST
PID FILTER TC
PID SETPOINT
PID FEEDBACK
PID ERROR
ENTER PASSWORD

MOTOR CONTROL SETPOINT FUNCS SEQ & REF MENUS
SLEW RATE LIMIT AUTOTUNE RAISE/LOWER AUTO RESTART OP STATION

TRUE – [ 60] ENABLE – ACTIVE [604] –FALSE OUTPUT [325] – 0.00% PENDING [608] – FALSE OP DATABASE [115] – FALSE
500.0Hz/s – [ 62] ACCEL LIMIT – FALSE – [603] ENABLE – FALSE – [327] RAISE INPUT – RESTARTING [616] – FALSE OP VERSION [230] – 0000
500.0Hz/s – [ 61] DECEL LIMIT – CALC NO LOAD I – [689] MODE – FALSE – [328] LOWER INPUT – ATTEMPTS LEFT [614] – 5 BASIC – [ 3] VIEW LEVEL –
10.0s – [326] RAMP RATE – TIME LEFT [615] – 10.0s * ENGLISH – [ 1] LANGUAGE –
100.00% – [330] MAX VALUE – FALSE – [611] ENABLE – 00F0 – [127] ENABLED KEYS –
-100.00% – [329] MIN VALUE – 5 – [612] ATTEMPTS – FALSE – [116] AUTO BACKUP –
SLIP COMP VOLTAGE CONTROL
0.00% – [331] RESET VALUE – 10.0s – [610] INITIAL DELAY 1 – * AC MOTOR DRIVE – [339] CONFIGURATION ID –
FALSE – [ 82] ENABLE – NONE [595] VOLTAGE MODE –
FALSE – [332] RESET – 10.0s – [613] ATTEMPT DELAY 1 –
1420 n/min – [ 83] NAMEPLATE RPM – ** 230.0V – [122] MOTOR VOLTS –
0000 – [609] TRIGGERS 1 –
4 – [ 84] MOTOR POLES – 100.00% – [112] BASE VOLTS –
0.1s – [678] INITIAL DELAY 2 –
120.0 n/min – [ 85] MOTORING LIMIT – PASSWORD
0.1s – [679] ATTEMPT DELAY 2 –
120.0 n/min – [ 86] REGEN LIMIT – 0000 – [ 7] ENTER PASSWORD
0000 – [677] TRIGGERS 2 –
SKIP FREQUENCIES 0000 – [ 8] CHANGE PASSWORD
UNDERLAP COMP OUTPUT [346] – 0.0% FALSE – [361] PROTECT LOCAL SP –
TRUE – [600] ENABLE – OUTPUT H z [363] – 0.0Hz FALSE – [364] PROTECT OP MENU –
CURRENT FEEDBACK INPUT H z [362] – 0.0Hz
MOTOR CURRENT [ 66] – 0.00% 0.00% – [340] INPUT –
MOTOR CURRENT [ 67] – 0.0A 0.0Hz – [341] BAND1 –
PATTERN GEN LOCAL CONTROL
I MAGNETISING [ 68] – 0.00% 0.0Hz – [342] FREQUENCY 1 – OPERATOR MENU
DRIVE FREQUENCY [591] – 0.0Hz REMOTE SEQ [297] –TRUE
I MAGNETISING [ 69] – 0.0A 0.0Hz – [680] BAND 2 – 1 – [93] STARTUP SCREEN –
VOLTS [592] – 0.0V REMOTE REF [257] –TRUE
I TORQUE [ 70] – 0.00% 0.0Hz – [343] FREQUENCY 2 – 255 – [626] OPERATOR MENU 2 –
I TORQUE [ 71] – 0.0A BOOST [593] – 0.0V 0.0Hz – [681] BAND 3 – LOCAL/REMOTE – [298] SEQ MODES –
TRUE – [ 98] RANDOM PATTERN – LOCAL/REMOTE – [265] REF MODES –
LOAD [ 72] – 0.00% 0.0Hz – [344] FREQUENCY 3 – 67 – [628] OPERATOR MENU 4 –
3kHz – [ 99] FREQ SELECT – REMOTE – [299] POWER UP MODE –
FIELD [ 73] – 0.00% 0.0Hz – [682] BAND4 – 72 – [629] OPERATOR MENU 5 –
2.0s – [100] DEFLUX DELAY – FALSE – [281] SEQ DIRECTION –
** 3.4A – [ 64] FULL LOAD CALIB – 0.0Hz – [345] FREQUENCY 4 – 75 – [630] OPERATOR MENU 6 –
** 1.9A – [ 65] NO LOAD CALIB – 370 – [631] OPERATOR MENU 7 –
0.80 – [242] POWER FACTOR – 0 – [632] OPERATOR MENU 8 –
DYNAMIC BRAKING
MINIMUM SPEED
DC LINK VOLTS [ 75] – 0.0V
CURRENT LIMIT OUTPUT [335] – 0.00% 0 – [636] OPERATOR MENU 12 –
BRAKING [ 81] – FALSE
LIMITING [370] – FALSE 0.00% – [336] INPUT – 0 – [637] OPERATOR MENU 13 –
TRUE – [ 80] ENABLE –
150.00% – [365] MOTOR I LIMIT – -100.00% – [337] MINIMUM – 0 – [638] OPERATOR MENU 14 –
100 Ohm – [ 77] BRAKE RESISTANCE – SERIAL LINKS
-150.00% – [623] REGEN I LIMIT – PROP. W/MIN. – [338] MODE – 0 – [639] OPERATOR MENU 15 –
0.1kW – [ 78] BRAKE POWER –
CURRENT – [366] FEEDBACK SOURCE –
25 – [ 79] 1 SEC OVER RATING – COMMS CONTROL
TRUE – [686] REGEN LIM ENABLE –
COMMS SEQ [295] – FALSE
COMMS REF [270] – FALSE
PID COMMS STATUS [272] – 0000 CUSTOM SCREEN 1
PID OUTPUT [320] – 0.00% COMMS COMMAND [273] – 0000
INJ BRAKING 0 – [ 74] TAG NO –
STABILISATION 0.00% – [310] ERROR INPUT – FALSE – [300] REMOTE COMMS SEL –
ACTIVE [583] – FALSE – [324] NAME –
TRUE – [ 82] ENABLE – FALSE – [311] ENABLE – TERMINALS/COMMS – [307] REMOTE SEQ MODES –
0.5s – [710] DEFLUX TIME – – [323] UNITS –
FALSE – [312] INTEGRAL DEFEAT – TERMINALS/COMMS – [308] REMOTE REF MODES –
9.0Hz – [577] FREQUENCY – xxxxx. – [334] DECIMAL PLACE –
1.0 – [313] P GAIN – 0.0s – [309] COMMS TIMEOUT –
100.00% – [578] I-LIM LEVEL – A/B * X + C – [125] FORMULA –
1.00s – [314] I TIME CONST –
2.0s – [579] DC PULSE – 100 – [321] COEFFICIENT A –
FLUXING 0.000s – [315] D TIME CONST –
1.0s – [580] FINAL DC PULSE – 100 – [ 44] COEFFICIENT B –
LINEAR LAW – [104] V/F SHAPE – 2.000s – [316] FILTER TC –
3.00% – [581] DC LEVEL – SYSTEM PORT (P3) 0 – [322] COEFFICIENT C –
100.00% – [105] V/F SCALE – 100.00% – [317] OUTPUT POS LIMIT –
600.0s – [582] TIMEOUT – 0 – [102] GROUP ID (GID) – 30000 – [101] HIGH LIMIT –
* 50.0Hz – [106] BASE FREQUENCY – -100.00% – [318] OUTPUT NEG LIMIT –
100.00% – [739] BASE VOLTS – 0 – [103] UNIT ID (UID) – -30000 – [ 53] LOW LIMIT –
120Hz – [113] LIMIT FREQUENCY – 1.0000% – [319] OUTPUT SCALING –
0.00% – [107] FIXED BOOST –

0.00% – [108] AUTO BOOST – CUSTOM SCREEN 2
FLYCATCHING TEC OPTION
0 – [371] TAG NO –
ACTIVE [576] –FALSE NONE – [750] TYPE –
– [378] NAME –
SETPOINT [ 28] –0.00% 0 – [751] INPUT 1 –
BRAKE CONTROL
– [377] UNITS –
FALSE – [570] ENABLE – 0 – [752] INPUT 2 –
RELEASE [587] – FALSE
VECTOR FLUXING 0 – [753] INPUT 3 – xxxxx. – [379] DECIMAL PLACE –
ALWAYS – [571] START MODE –
HOLD [590] – FALSE A/B * X + C – [676] FORMULA –
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [596] – 0.0V BIDIRECTIONAL – [572] SEARCH MODE – 0 – [754] INPUT 4 –
50.00% – [584] ON LOAD –
0 – [755] INPUT 5 – 100 – [375] COEFFICIENT A –
FALSE – [118] ENABLE – 9.00% – [573] SEARCH VOLTS –
5.0Hz – [585] ON FREQUENCY –
FAULT [756] – NONE 100 – [673] COEFFICIENT B –
** DELTA – [124] MOTOR CONNECTION – 35.00% – [ 32] SEARCH BOOST –
3.0Hz – [586] OFF FREQUENCY –
0 – [376] COEFFICIENT
– C
** 1.00 Ohm – [119] STATOR RES – 5.0s – [574] SEARCH TIME – VERSION [757] – 0000
0.00s – [588] ON HOLD TIME –
30000 – [674] HIGH LIMIT –
** 10.0mH – [120] LEAKAGE INDUC – 5.0Hz – [575] MIN SEARCH SPEED – OUTPUT 1 [758] – 0000
0.00s – [589] OFF HOLD TIME –
-30000 – [675] LOW LIMIT –
** 1000.0mH – [121] MUTUAL INDUC – 3.0s – [709] REFLUX TIME – OUTPUT 2 [759] – 0000
Macro Control Blocks Some of these blocks may already be in use by the macros.

SETPOINT FUNCS MISCELLANEOUS

INPUTS & OUTPUTS
PRESET 1 PRESET 2 VALUE FUNC 1 VALUE FUNC 2 DEMULTIPLEXER
ANALOG INPUT 1 ANALOG DIGIN 1
OUTPUT 1 [356] – 0.00% OUTPUT 1 [389] – 0.00% OUTPUT [133] – 0.00% OUTPUT [138] –0.00% OUTPUT 0 [657] – FALSE
VALUE [ 16] – 0.00 % VALUE [ 90] – FALSE
OUTPUT 2 [372] – 0.00% OUTPUT 2 [373] – 0.00% 0.00% – [130] INPUT A – 0.00% – [135] INPUT A – OUTPUT 1 [658] – FALSE
BREAK [ 18] – FALSE FALSE – [ 89] INVERT –
INPUT 0 – [355] SELECT INPUT – INPUT 0 – [388] SELECT INPUT – 0.00% – [131] INPUT B – 0.00% – [136] INPUT B – OUTPUT 2 [659] – FALSE
100.00 % – [ 14] SCALE – 70.00 % – [ 91] LEVEL –
0.00% – [347] INPUT 0 – 0.00% – [380] INPUT 0 – 0.00% – [132] INPUT C – 0.00% – [137] INPUT C – OUTPUT 3 [660] – FALSE
0.00 % – [ 15] OFFSET – 10.00 % – [ 92] HYSTERISIS –
0.00% – [348] INPUT 1 – 0.00% – [381] INPUT 1 – IF[C]-A – [134] TYPE – IF[C] -A – [139] TYPE – OUTPUT 4 [661] – FALSE
0..+10 V – [ 13] TYPE –
0.00% – [349] INPUT 2 – 0.00% – [382] INPUT 2 – OUTPUT 5 [662] – FALSE
FALSE – [ 12] BREAK ENABLE – ANALOG DIGIN 2
0.00% – [350] INPUT 3 – 0.00% – [383] INPUT 3 – VALUE FUNC 3 VALUE FUNC 4 OUTPUT 6 [663] – FALSE
0.00 % – [ 17] BREAK VALUE – VALUE [95] – FALSE
0.00% – [351] INPUT 4 – 0.00% – [384] INPUT 4 – OUTPUT [143] – 0.00% OUTPUT [148] –0.00% OUTPUT 7 [664] – FALSE
0.00% – [352] INPUT 5 – 0.00% – [385] INPUT 5 – 0.00% – [140] INPUT A – 0.00% – [145] INPUT A – OUTPUT 8 [665] – FALSE
70.00 % – [96] LEVEL –
0.00% – [353] INPUT 6 – 0.00% – [386] INPUT 6 – 0.00% – [141] INPUT B – 0.00% – [146] INPUT B – OUTPUT 9 [666] – FALSE ANALOG INPUT 2
10.00 % – [97] HYSTERISIS –
0.00% – [354] INPUT 7 – 0.00% – [387] INPUT 7 – 0.00% – [142] INPUT C – 0.00% – [147] INPUT C – OUTPUT 10 [667] – FALSE VALUE [ 25] – 0.00 %
IF[C] -A – [144] TYPE – IF[C] -A – [149] TYPE – OUTPUT 11 [668] – FALSE BREAK [ 27] – FALSE
PRESET 3 PRESET 4 OUTPUT 12 [669] – FALSE 100.00 % – [ 23] SCALE –
OUTPUT 1 [399] – 0.00% OUTPUT 1 [519] – 0.00% VALUE FUNC 5 VALUE FUNC 6 OUTPUT 13 [670] – FALSE 0.00 % – [ 24] OFFSET – DIGITAL INPUT 1
OUTPUT 2 [374] – 0.00% OUTPUT 2 [520] – 0.00% OUTPUT [153] – 0.00% OUTPUT [158] –0.00% OUTPUT 14 [671] – FALSE 0..+10 V – [ 22] TYPE – VALUE [ 31] – FALSE
INPUT 0 – [398] SELECT INPUT – INPUT 0 – [518] SELECT INPUT – – – OUTPUT 15 [672] – FALSE FALSE – [ 21] BREAK ENABLE – FALSE – [ 30] INVERT –
0.00% – [150] INPUT A 0.00% – [155] INPUT A
0.00% – [390] INPUT 0 – 0.00% – [510] INPUT 0 – 0.00% – [151] INPUT B – 0.00% – [156] INPUT B – 0000 – [599] INPUT – 0.00 % – [ 26] BREAK VALUE –
0.00% – [391] INPUT 1 – 0.00% – [511] INPUT 1 – 0.00% – [152] INPUT C – 0.00% – [157] INPUT C – DIGITAL INPUT 2
0.00% – [392] INPUT 2 – 0.00% – [512] INPUT 2 – IF[C] -A – [154] TYPE – IF[C] -A – [159] TYPE – VALUE [ 34] – FALSE
0.00% – [393] INPUT 3 – MULTIPLEXER FALSE – [ 33] INVERT –
0.00% – [513] INPUT 3 –
0.00% – [394] INPUT 4 – 0.00% – [514] INPUT 4 – OUTPUT [598] – 0000
0.00% – [395] INPUT 5 – 0.00% – [515] INPUT 5 – FALSE – [641] INPUT 0 – DIGITAL INPUT 3
OUTTPUT [163] – 0.00% OUTTPUT [168] –0.00%
0.00% – [396] INPUT 6 – 0.00% – [516] INPUT 6 – FALSE – [642] INPUT 1 – VALUE [ 37] – FALSE
0.00% – [160] INPUT A – 0.00% – [165] INPUT A –
0.00% – [397] INPUT 7 – 0.00% – [517] INPUT 7 – FALSE – [643] INPUT 2 – FALSE – [ 36] INVERT –
0.00% – [161] INPUT B – 0.00% – [166] INPUT B –
0.00% – [162] INPUT C – 0.00% – [167] INPUT C –
PRESET 5 FALSE – [645] INPUT 4 – DIGITAL INPUT 4
PRESET 6 IF[C] -A – [164] TYPE – IF[C] -A – [169] TYPE –
FALSE – [646] INPUT 5 – ANALOG OUTPUT 1 VALUE [ 40] – FALSE
OUTPUT 1 [530] – 0.00% OUTPUT 1 [541] – 0.00%
FALSE – [647] INPUT 6 – – FALSE – [ 39] INVERT –
OUTPUT 2 [531] – 0.00% OUTPUT 2 [542] – 0.00% VALUE FUNC 9 VALUE FUNC 10 0.00 % – [ 45] VALUE
INPUT 0 – [529] SELECT INPUT – INPUT 0 – [540] SELECT INPUT – OUTPUT [173] – 0.00% OUTPUT [178] –0.00% 100.00 % – [ 46] SCALE –
0.00 % – [ 47] OFFSET – DIGITAL INPUT 5
0.00% – [521] INPUT 0 – 0.00% – [532] INPUT 0 – 0.00% – [170] INPUT A – 0.00% – [175] INPUT A –
FALSE – [650] INPUT 9 – TRUE – [ 48] ABS – VALUE [ 43] – FALSE
0.00% – [522] INPUT 1 – 0.00% – [533] INPUT 1 – 0.00% – [171] INPUT B – 0.00% – [176] INPUT B –
FALSE – [651] INPUT 10 – 0..+10 V – [ 49] TYPE – FALSE – [ 42] INVERT –
0.00% – [523] INPUT 2 – 0.00% – [534] INPUT 2 – 0.00% – [172] INPUT C – 0.00% – [177] INPUT C –
0.00% – [524] INPUT 3 – 0.00% – [535] INPUT 3 – IF[C] -A – [174] TYPE – IF[C] -A – [179] TYPE –
0.00% – [525] INPUT 4 – FALSE – [653] INPUT 12 –
0.00% – [536] INPUT 4 – DIGITAL INPUT 6
0.00% – [526] INPUT 5 – 0.00% – [537] INPUT 5 – VALUE [726] – FALSE
FALSE – [655] INPUT 14 – ENCODER
0.00% – [527] INPUT 6 – 0.00% – [538] INPUT 6 – FALSE – [725] INVERT –
FALSE – [656] INPUT 15 – SPEED Hz [568] – 0.0 Hz
0.00% – [528] INPUT 7 – 0.00% – [539] INPUT 7 –
SPEED RPM [569] – 0 n/min
DIGITAL INPUT 7
FALSE – [181] INPUT B – FALSE – [186] INPUT B – SPEED % [749] – 0.00%
PRESET 7 PRESET 8 VALUE [728] – FALSE
FALSE – [182] INPUT C – FALSE – [187] INPUT C – POSITION [748] – 0
OUTPUT 1 [552] – 0.00% OUTPUT 1 [563] – 0.00% FALSE – [727] INVERT –
NOT [A] – [184] TYPE – NOT [A] – [189] TYPE – QUADRATURE – [565] MODE –
OUTPUT 2 [553] – 0.00% OUTPUT 2 [564] – 0.00%
FALSE – [747] RESET –
LOGIC FUNC 3 LOGIC FUNC 4 1000 – [566] LINES –
0.00% – [543] INPUT 0 – 0.00% – [554] INPUT 0 –
OUTPUT [193] – FALSE OUTPUT [198] – FALSE FALSE – [567] INVERT –
0.00% – [544] INPUT 1 – 0.00% – [555] INPUT 1 –
FALSE – [190] INPUT A – FALSE – [195] INPUT A – DIGITAL OUTPUT 1
0.00% – [545] INPUT 2 – 0.00% – [556] INPUT 2 –
FALSE – [191] INPUT B – FALSE – [196] INPUT B – FALSE – [ 52] VALUE –
0.00% – [546] INPUT 3 – 0.00% – [557] INPUT 3 –
FALSE – [192] INPUT C – FALSE – [197] INPUT C – FALSE – [ 51] INVERT –
0.00% – [547] INPUT 4 – 0.00% – [558] INPUT 4 –
NOT [A] – [194] TYPE – NOT [A] – [199] TYPE –
0.00% – [548] INPUT 5 – 0.00% – [559] INPUT 5 –
0.00% – [549] INPUT 6 – 0.00% – [560] INPUT 6 – LOGIC FUNC 9 DIGITAL OUTPUT 2
0.00% – [550] INPUT 7 – 0.00% – [561] INPUT 7 – OUTPUT [223] – FALSE FALSE – [ 55] VALUE –
FALSE – [220] INPUT A – FALSE – [ 54] INVERT –
FALSE – [202] INPUT C –
NOT [A] – [209] TYPE – NOT [A] – [224] TYPE –
NOT [A] – [204] TYPE –
LOGIC FUNC 7 LOGIC FUNC 8 LOGIC FUNC 10
OUTPUT [213] – FALSE OUTPUT [218] – FALSE OUTPUT [228] – FALSE
FALSE – [210] INPUT A – FALSE – [215] INPUT A – FALSE – [225] INPUT A –
FALSE – [211] INPUT B – FALSE – [216] INPUT B – FALSE – [226] INPUT B –
FALSE – [212] INPUT C – FALSE – [217] INPUT C – FALSE – [227] INPUT C –
NOT [A] – [214] TYPE – NOT [A] – [219] TYPE – NOT [A] – [229] TYPE –
Macro User Blocks Some of these blocks may already be in use by the macros.

+44 (0)117 938 1800 - [email protected]
ISS. MODIFICATION ECN No. DATE DRAWN CHK'D
1 First Issue of HA463544, replacing HA389591. 12201 22/2/98 CM KJ

Updated to Version 2.x software. Manual style
updated.
1 First Issue of HA463550, replacing HA463544. 12799 1/06/98 CM KJ
Updated to Version 4.x Software, Technology Box
release.
2 Includes the Addendum for HA463550 Issue 1, known 12982 1/10/98 CM MR
as HA463553 Issue 1. Amendments coincide with
605A Technology Box release.
1 First issue of HA453550U001, replacing HA463550. 13514 6/5/99 CM KJ
Updated to Version 5.x Software.
2 Updated to Version 5.2 Software, ECN13746. Various 13746 13/9/99 CM KJ
other small amendments.
Page 3-1 changed fixings from M5 to M4 13257
Page 1-1 Added Important note. 13713
Chapter 12 Replaced Certificates with new formated
version.
Page 3-7 Corrected diamension from 48 to 48.2 13122
Page 6-18 Replaced MOTOR CURRENT with I
MAGNETISING under FIELD parameter. 13788
3 Added MMI Diagnostic information. 13556 4/10/01 CM KJ
Updated to show new gland plate arrangement for (15087)
605B.
Added Vibration details to Environmental Details. (16024)
Other small amendments (page 9-6, 10-9, 11-1)
4 New motor choke information. 16318 24/7/02 CM KJ
Other small amendments (page 1-3)
5 Change of company name and logo to SSD Drives Ltd 18354 10/01/05 CM RB
Various small changes.
FIRST USED ON MODIFICATION RECORD
DRAWING NUMBER SHT. 1
ZZ463550U001 OF 1

605 Series Frequency Inverter: Product Manual

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationİnverter

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

605 Series Frequency Inverter: Product Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

605 Series Frequency Inverter: Product Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

This manual was downloaded on www.sdsdrives.

Compatible with Version 5.x Software

 Copyright 2005 SSD Drives Limited (formerly Eurotherm Drives Limited)

Unit fitted: R Wall-mounted R Enclosure

Chapter 1 GETTING STARTED

Chapter 2 AN OVERVIEW OF THE INVERTER

Chapter 3 INSTALLING THE INVERTER

Chapter 4 OPERATING THE INVERTER

Chapter 5 THE OPERATOR STATION

Controlling the Operator Station.................................................................. 5-2

The Menu System .......................................................................................... 5-4

Special Menu Features ............................................................................... 5-10

Chapter 6 PROGRAMMING YOUR APPLICATION

Chapter 7 TRIPS AND FAULT FINDING

Chapter 8 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

Chapter 9 SEQUENCING LOGIC

Chapter 12 CE R T I F I C A T I O N FOR THE INVERTER

• Screening & Earthing (cubicle mounted, Class B) ..................................12-3

Getting Started 1-1

605 Series Frequency Inverter

1-2 Getting Started

About this Manual

Programming (Operator Station or suitable PC programming tool only)

605 Series Frequency Inverter

Getting Started 1-3

Application Block Diagrams

Information for Users without an Operator Station

605 Series Frequency Inverter

1-4 Getting Started

605 Series Frequency Inverter

An Overview of the Inverter 2-1

Figure 2-1 View of Component Parts

1 Main Inverter assembly 9 Blank cover

605 Series Frequency Inverter

2-2 An Overview of the Inverter

General Output Selectable 0-120Hz, 240Hz or 480Hz

Table 2-1 Control Features

605 Series Frequency Inverter

An Overview of the Inverter 2-3

Block Variable Description

605 Series Frequency Inverter

2-4 An Overview of the Inverter

RS232 6901 FILTER

Figure 2-2 Functional Block Diagram

605 Series Frequency Inverter

An Overview of the Inverter 2-5

Operator Station Interface

605 Series Frequency Inverter

2-6 An Overview of the Inverter

605 Series Frequency Inverter

Installing the Inverter 3-1

H H1 If wall-mounted, the unit

Figure 3-1 Mechanical Dimensions for 605 Type A

605 Model Number H H1 W W1 W2 D Fixings

605 Type Model Number H H1 W W1 W2 D Fixings

Table 3-1 Mechanical Dimensions for 605 Type B

605 Series Frequency Inverter